Denon AVR-4306 7-channel home theater receiver Operating instructions

AV SURROUND RECEIVER

AVR-4306

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

2

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT

REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE

PERSONNEL.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance.

WARNING:

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO

NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANCE TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

GROUND

CLAMP

SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1.

Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated.

2.

Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference.

3.

Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to.

4.

Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed.

5.

Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning.

Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.

6.

Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.

7.

Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like.

8.

Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.

9.

A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn.

10. Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to.

11. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions.

12. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating-current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way.

This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.

FIGURE A

EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING

AS PER NATIONAL

ELECTRICAL CODE

ANTENNA

LEAD IN

WIRE

ANTENNA

DISCHARGE UNIT

(NEC SECTION 810-20)

ELECTRIC

SERVICE

EQUIPMENT

GROUNDING CONDUCTORS

(NEC SECTION 810-21)

GROUND CLAMPS

NEC - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE

POWER SERVICE GROUNDING

ELECTRODE SYSTEM

(NEC ART 250, PART H)

I

13. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product.

15. Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code,

ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna-discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. See Figure A.

16. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges.

17. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal.

18. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock.

19. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock.

Never spill liquid of any kind on the product.

20. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel.

21. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, d) If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance – this indicates a need for service.

22. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part.

Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards.

23. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition.

24. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The product should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer.

25. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

FCC INFORMATION (For US customers)

1. COMPLIANCE INFORMATION

Product Name: AV Surround Receiver

Model Number: AVR-4306

This product complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this product may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this product must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.

Denon Electronics (USA), LLC

19C Chapin Road, Suite 205

Pine Brook, NJ 07058-9385

Tel. 973-396-0810 (Main)

2. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS PRODUCT

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modification not expressly approved by DENON may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

3. NOTE

This product has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a

Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation.

This product generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this product does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the product

OFF and ON, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the product into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

This class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

2

NOTE ON USE / OBSERVATIONS RELATIVES A L’UTILISATION

• Avoid high temperatures.

Allow for sufficient heat dispersion when installed in a rack.

• Eviter des températures

élevées.

Tenir compte d’une dispersion de chaleur suffisante lors de l’installation sur une étagère.

• Keep the apparatus free from moisture, water, and dust.

• Protéger l’appareil contre l’humidité, l’eau et la poussière.

• Do not let foreign objects into the apparatus.

• Ne pas laisser des objets

étrangers dans l’appareil.

• Unplug the power cord when not using the apparatus for long periods of time.

• Débrancher le cordon d’alimentation lorsque l’appareil n’est pas utilisé pendant de longues périodes..

• Do not let insecticides, benzene, and thinner come in contact with the apparatus.

• Ne pas mettre en contact des insecticides, du benzène et un diluant avec l’appareil.

• Handle the power cord carefully.

Hold the plug when unplugging the cord.

• Manipuler le cordon d’alimentation avec précaution.

Tenir la prise lors du débranchement du cordon.

* (For apparatuses with ventilation holes)

• Do not obstruct the ventilation holes.

• Ne pas obstruer les trous d’aération.

• Never disassemble or modify the apparatus in any way.

• Ne jamais démonter ou modifier l’appareil d’une manière ou d’une autre.

II

Getting Started

Thank you for choosing the DENON AVR-4306 AV Surround Receiver. This remarkable component has been engineered to provide superb surround sound listening with home theater sources such as DVD, as well as providing outstanding high fidelity reproduction of your favorite music sources.

As this product is provided with an immense array of features, we recommend that before you begin hookup and operation that you review the contents of this manual before proceeding.

Contents

Getting Started

Accessories ··············································································2

Before using·············································································2

Cautions on installation ·························································3

Cautions on handling······························································3

Preparing the remote control unit ········································3

Inserting the batteries ····························································3

Operating range of the remote control unit ························3

Part names and functions

Front panel··············································································4

Display ····················································································4

Rear panel···············································································5

Remote control unit································································5

Easy Setup and Operation

Easy to setup flow ··································································6

Speaker system layout ···························································6

Speaker connections ······························································7

Connecting a DVD player and monitor (TV) ························8

Auto Setup / Room EQ···························································9

Connecting a microphone ····················································10

Turning on the power ···························································10

Starting Auto Setup ······························································11

Power Amp Assign·······························································11

Preliminary measurements·············································11, 12

Speaker system measurement ············································12

Check of the measurement result ·································12, 13

About the error message ·····················································13

Playing a DVD with surround sound ··································13

Connecting Other Sources

Cable indications···································································14

The video conversion function ············································15

On screen display for component video outputs

and HDMI output ··································································15

Connecting equipment with HDMI

(High-Definition Multimedia Interface) terminals

[To convert analog video signals to HDMI signals] ···········16

Connecting a TV tuner ·························································16

Connecting a DBS tuner·······················································16

Connecting the external inputs (EXT. IN) terminals··········17

Connecting a video camera component or video game·······17

Connecting a CD player························································17

Connecting a turntable·························································17

Connecting a VCR ·································································18

Connecting a DVD recorder ·················································18

Connecting a CD recorder or MD recorder·························19

Connecting a tape deck························································19

DENON LINK connection······················································19

Connecting equipment with HDMI

(High-Definition Multimedia Interface) terminals··············20

Connecting the antenna terminals······································21

Connecting the XM terminal ···············································21

Connecting the RS-232C terminal ·······································22

Connecting the TRIGGER OUT terminals ···························22

Connecting the MULTI ZONE terminals

ZONE2 (or ZONE3) pre-out connections ······························22

ZONE2 / ZONE3 speaker out connections···························23

Connecting the pre-out terminals ·······································23

Connecting the power supply cord·····································23

Basic Operation

Playback

Operating the remote control unit········································24

Playing the input source ·······················································25

Playback using the external input (EXT. IN) terminals ··········26

Turning the sound off temporarily (MUTING) ·······················26

Listening over headphones ··················································26

Combining the currently playing sound with the desired image (VIDEO SELECT) ···········································26

Switching the surround speakers·········································26

Checking the currently playing program source, etc.···········27

Input mode ·····································································27, 28

Room EQ function ································································28

Surround

Playing modes for different sources ····································29

Playing audio sources (CDs and DVDs)

2-channel playback modes ···················································30

Dolby Digital mode and DTS surround

(only with digital input) ·························································31

1

Getting Started

Night mode···········································································31

Dolby Pro Logic II x (Pro Logic II ) mode ·································33

DTS NEO:6 mode ·································································35

Memory and call-out functions (USER MODE function) ······36

DENON original surround modes

Surround modes and their features······································36

DSP surround simulation················································37, 38

Tone control setting ······························································38

Channel level ········································································39

Fader function·······································································39

Listening to the radio

Auto tuning ···········································································40

Manual tuning·······································································40

Preset memory·····································································41

Checking the preset stations················································41

Recalling preset stations ······················································41

XM Satellite Radio

Checking the XM signal strength and Radio ID ···················42

Channel selection ·································································42

Category search····································································42

Direct access of channels ····················································43

Playing the iPod

Connecting the iPod ·····························································44

Listening to music ································································45

Viewing still pictures

(only for iPods equipped with the slideshow function) ········45

Disconnecting the iPod·························································45

Using the Network Audio Function

Internet radio function ··························································46

Music server function···························································46

System requirements ·····················································46, 47

Listening to Internet radio ··············································47, 48

Presetting (registering) Internet radio stations ·····················48

Registering Internet radio stations in your favorites ············48

Character search function (searching by first letter) ············49

Updating the list of radio stations ········································49

Playing music files stored on the computer

(music server) ·······································································50

Operating the AVR-4306 using a browser ····························50

Playing the USB (mass storage) device ·······························50

2

System setup menu

page 80 page 80 page 81 page 76 page 77 page 77, 78 page 78 page 78, 79 page 79 page 79 page 74 page 74 page 75 page 75, 76

III page 9~13 page 87 page 87 page 87 page 88 page 82 page 83 page 83, 84 page 84, 85 page 85, 86 page 86 page 67 page 67, 68 page 68 page 68 page 69 page 69, 70 page 71 page 71, 72 page 72 page 72, 73 page 73 page 73

2

2

We greatly appreciate your purchase of the AVR-4306.

To be sure you take maximum advantage of all the features the AVR-4306 has to offer, read these instructions carefully and use the set properly. Be sure to keep this manual for future reference should any questions or problems arise.

“SERIAL NO.

PLEASE RECORD UNIT SERIAL NUMBER ATTACHED TO THE REAR OF THE CABINET FOR

FUTURE REFERENCE”

MEMO

IV

Getting Started

Advanced Operation

Remote control unit

Operating DENON audio components ···························51, 52

Preset memory·····································································53

Operating a component stored in the preset memory ·····53 ~ 55

Learning function··································································56

System call ···········································································57

Punch through ······································································57

Setting the back light’s lighting time ····································58

Setting the ambient light sensor ··········································58

Setting the brightness ··························································58

Resetting ··············································································59

Multi zone music entertainment system

Multi-zone playback using the ZONE2 and ZONE3 PREOUT terminals ············································60

Multi-zone playback using the SPEAKER terminals ·············61

Outputting a program source to amplifier, etc., in the ZONE2 (or ZONE3) room

(ZONE2 or ZONE3 SELECT mode)·······································62

Remote control unit operations during multi-source playback ···························································62

Other function

Playing Super Audio CDs with DENON LINK·······················63

Multi-source recording / playback·········································64

Last function memory ··························································64

Initialization of the microprocessor·······································64

Advanced Setup – Part 1

Navigating through the System Setup Menu····················65

On screen display and front display ···································66

Audio Input Setup

Setting the Digital In Assignment·········································67

• Setting the DENON LINK···················································67

Setting the EXT. IN Setup···············································67, 68

Setting the iPod Assignment················································68

Setting the Input Function Level ··········································68

Setting the Function Rename···············································69

Tuner Presets ·································································69, 70

Video Setup

Setting the HDMI In Assignment ·········································71

Setting the Component In Assignment··························71, 72

Setting the Video Convert ····················································72

Setting the HDMI Out Setup··········································72, 73

Setting the Audio Delay························································73

Setting the On Screen Display (OSD) ··································73

Advanced Playback

Setting the 2ch Direct / Stereo·············································74

Setting the Dolby Digital Setup ············································74

Setting the Auto Surround Mode ·········································75

Setting the Manual EQ Setup···············································75

Procedure for copying the “Flat” correction curve ··············76

Option Setup

Setting the Power Amplifier Assignment·····························76

Setting the Volume Control ··················································77

Setting the Trigger Out ···················································77, 78

Setting the Display ·······························································78

Setting the Remote Control ···········································78, 79

Setting the iPod Charge ·······················································79

Setup Lock············································································79

Network Setup

Setting the IP Address ·························································80

Setting the Proxy ··································································80

Setting the Network Option ·················································81


Speaker Setup

Setting the type of speakers ··········································82, 83

Setting the low frequency distribution ·································83

Setting the Distance·······················································83, 84

Setting the Channel Level ··············································84, 85

Setting the Crossover Frequency···································85, 86

Setting the crossover frequency individually for the different channels ·····················································86

Selecting the surround speakers for the different surround modes·····················································86

Others Setup

Setting the Room EQ Setup·················································87

Setting the Direct Mode Setup ············································87

Setting the MIC Input Select················································87

Check the parameter ····························································88

System setup items and default values·······················89~91

Additional Information·················································92~104

Troubleshooting ··························································105, 106

Specifications ······································································106

List of preset codes ····································End of this manual

Getting Started

Accessories

Check that the following parts are included in addition to the main unit: q Operating instructions ......................................................1

w Warranty (for North America model only) .............................1

e Service station list.............................................................1

r Power supply cord ............................................................1

t Remote control unit (RC-1024) .........................................1

y LR6/AA alkaline batteries..................................................2

u AM loop antenna ..............................................................1

i FM indoor antenna............................................................1

o Setup microphone (DM-S205) ..........................................1

r t y u

Before using

i

Pay attention to the following before using this unit: o

• Moving the unit

To prevent short-circuits or damaged wires in the connection cables, always unplug the power supply cord and disconnect the connection cables between all other audio components when moving the unit.

• Before turning the power switch on

Check once again that all connections are correct and that there are not problems with the connection cables. Always set the power switch to the standby position before connecting and disconnecting connection cables.

• Store these instructions in a safe place.

After reading, store this instructions along with the warranty card in a safe place.

• Note that the illustrations in these instructions may differ from the actual unit for explanation purposes.

2

Getting Started

Cautions on installation

Noise or disturbance of the picture may be generated if this unit or any other electronic equipment using microprocessors is used near a tuner or TV.

If this happens, take the following steps:

• Install this unit as far away as possible from the tuner or TV.

• Run the antenna wires from the tuner or

TV away from this unit’s power supply cord and input/output connection cables.

• Noise or disturbance tends to occur particularly when using indoor antennas or

300

Ω

/ohms feeder wires. We recommend using outdoor antennas and 75

Ω

/ohm coaxial cables.

Note

Wall

Note:

For heat dispersal, do not install this unit in a confined space such as a bookcase or similar enclosure.

Getting Started

Inserting the batteries

q Remove the remote control unit’s rear cover.

w Set two LR6/AA batteries in the battery compartment in the indicated direction.

e Put the rear cover back on.

Notes on batteries:

• Replace the batteries with new ones if the set does not operate even when the remote control unit is operated nearby the unit. (The included batteries are only for verifying operation.)

• When inserting the batteries, be sure to do so in the proper direction, following the “<” and

“>” marks in the battery compartment.

• To prevent damage or leakage of battery fluid:

• Do not use a new battery together with an old one.

• Do not use two different types of batteries.

• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or dispose of batteries in flames.

• If the battery fluid should leak, carefully wipe the fluid off the inside of the battery compartment and insert new batteries.

• When replacing the batteries, have the new batteries ready and insert them as quickly as possible.

Cautions on handling

• Switching the input source when input terminals are not connected.

A clicking noise may be produced if the input source is switched when nothing is connected to the input terminals. If this happens, either turn down the MASTER VOLUME control knob or connect components to the input terminals.

• Muting of PRE OUT terminals, PHONES jack and SPEAKER terminals.

The PRE OUT terminals, PHONES jack and SPEAKER terminals include a muting circuit. Because of this, the output signals are greatly attenuated for several seconds after the power switch is turned on or the input source, surround mode or any other set-up is changed. If the volume is turned up during this time, the output will be very high after the muting circuit stops functioning.

Always wait until the muting circuit turns off before adjusting the volume.

• Whenever the power switch is in the STANDBY state, the unit is still connected to AC line voltage.

Please be sure to turn off the power switch or unplug the cord when you leave home for, say, a vacation.

Preparing the remote control unit

The included remote control unit (RC-1024) can be used to operate not only the AVR-4306 but other remote control compatible DENON components as well. In addition, the memory contains the control signals for other remote control units, so it can be used to operate non-DENON remote control compatible products.

Operating range of the remote control unit

• Point the remote control unit at the remote sensor on the main unit as shown in the diagram.

• The remote control unit can be used from a straight distance of approximately 23 feet/7 meters from the main unit, but this distance will be shorter if there are obstacles in the way or if the remote control unit is not pointed directly at the remote sensor.

• The remote control unit can be operated at a horizontal angle of up to 30 degrees with respect to the remote sensor.

Approx. 23 feet / 7 m

30°

30°

NOTE:

• It may be difficult to operate the remote control unit if the remote sensor is exposed to direct sunlight or strong artificial light.

• Do not press buttons on the main unit and remote control unit simultaneously. Doing so may result in malfunction.

• Neon signs or other devices emitting pulsetype noise nearby may result in malfunction, so keep the set as far away from such devices as possible.

3

Getting Started

Part names and functions

Front panel

For details on the functions of these parts, refer to the pages given in parentheses ( ).

!6

!5 !4

!3

!2

!1

!0

Display

!4

!3

!2

!1

!0

o i u y

Getting Started

#7 #5#4

!7

!8

!9

@0

#6#5 #4#3 #2 #1 q w e r t y u i o q

Power ON/STANDBY button ··············(10) w

Power indicator····································(10) e

Power switch ·································(10, 64) r

Headphones jack (PHONES) ···············(26) t

V.AUX INPUT terminals ······················(17) y

SETUP MIC jack ···································(10) u

USER MODE 1 button ·························(36) i

USER MODE 2 button ·························(36) o

USER MODE 3 button ·························(36)

!0

MASTER VOLUME control knob ········(25)

!1

Master volume indicator ·····················(25)

!2

Display

!3

MultEQ XT indicator ····························(28)

!4

NIGHT indicator ···································(31)

!5

Remote control sensor··························(3)

!6

FUNCTION knob···································(25)

!7

SOURCE button ···································(25)

!8

TUNING PRESET button ·····················(40)

!9

ZONE2/3/REC SELECT button······(62, 64)

@0

VIDEO SELECT button·························(26)

@1

NIGHT button ·······································(31)

@2

ROOM EQ button ·································(28)

@3

PURE DIRECT button···························(30)

@4

DIRECT/STEREO button······················(30)

@5

STANDARD button ······························(25)

@6

DSP SIMULATION button ···················(37)

@7

CH SELECT/ENTER button ·················(39)

@8

SURROUND PARAMETER button ······(31)

@9

USB connector ·····································(50)

#0

iPod connector ·····································(44)

#1

STATUS button ····································(27)

#2

CURSOR button ···································(11)

#3

SYSTEM SETUP button ······················(11)

#4

EXT. IN button······································(26)

#5

ANALOG button···································(28)

#6

INPUT MODE button ···························(26) q w e r t q

Input signal indicator

The respective indicator will light corresponding to the input signal.

w

Input signal channel indicator

The channels included in the input source will light.

This lights when the digital signal is inputted.

e

Information display

This displays the surround mode, function name or setting value, etc. r

Output signal channel indicator

The audio channels that can be output light.

t

Speaker indicator

This lights corresponding to the settings of the surround speakers of the various surround modes. y

Master volume indicator

This displays the volume level.

The Setup item number is displayed in

System Setup.

u

MULTI (zone) indicator

ZONE2 mode is selected in ZONE2/REC

SELECT.

i

Recording output source indicator

REC OUT mode is selected in ZONE2/REC

SELECT. o

DENON LINK indicator

This lights during playback in a DENON LINK connection.

!0

AL24 indicator

The AL24 indicator lights when the PURE

DIRECT, DIRECT, STEREO, MULTI CH PURE

DIRECT, MULTI CH DIRECT, MULTI CH IN mode is selected in the PCM input signal.

!1

Input mode indicator

This lights corresponding to the setting of the input mode.

!2

AUTO indicator

This lights when the broadcast station is selected in the AUTO tuning mode.

!3

TUNED indicator

This lights when an FM/AM broadcast has been received.

!4

STEREO indicator

This lights when an FM stereo broadcast has been received.

4

Getting Started

Rear panel

!6

!5

!4

!3

!2

!1

!0

o i

!7

!8

!9

q w e w r t q

Digital audio terminals (Optical/Coaxial) ···(8) w

Analog audio terminals ·························(8) e

Pre-out terminals ·································(23) r

SIGNAL GND terminal·························(18) t

12V TRIGGER OUT terminals ·············(22) y

Speaker terminals··································(7) u

AC outlet (s) ·········································(23) i

AC inlet ·················································(23) o

Component video terminals ·················(8)

!0

Video/S-Video terminals·······················(8) y u

!1

Remote control terminals ···················(22)

!2

RS-232C terminal ·································(22)

!3

EXT. IN terminals ·································(17)

!4

DENON LINK terminal ·························(19)

!5

HDMI terminals ····································(20)

!6

AM/FM antenna terminals··················(21)

!7

iPod connector·······································(44)

!8

ETHERNET terminal······························(47)

!9

XM terminal··········································(21)

Getting Started


For details on the functions of these parts, refer to the pages given in parentheses ( ).

Remote control signal

transmitter···················(3)

IR segment

····································(53)

Input mode selector

buttons·······················(26)

Mode selector buttons

····································(51)

VIDEO SELECT button

····································(26)

USER MODE/SYSTEM

CALL buttons·······(36, 57)

NIGHT button

····································(31)

Surround mode/System

buttons·················(25, 51)

Tuner system buttons

····································(40)

ROOM EQ button

····································(28)

SYSTEM SETUP button

····································(11)

CURSOR buttons

····································(11)

SURROUND

PARAMETER/SEARCH

button···················(31, 43)

Tuner system buttons

····································(40)

Mode selector button

····································(51)

FUNCTION/NUMBER

buttons·······················(25)

TEST TONE button

····································(85)

SPEAKER button

····································(26)

Power buttons

····································(10)

CH SELECT/ENTER button ···························· (39)

ON SCREEN button

····································(27)

Master volume control

buttons·······················(25)

MUTING button

····································(26)

5

MEMO

• For instructions on setting the remote control unit back light’s lighting time ( page 58).


• This section contains the basic steps necessary to configure the AVR-4306 according to your listening room environment and the source equipment and loudspeakers you are using.

• For optimum performance, we recommend using the Auto Setup function.

• If you wish, you can set the various settings manually without using Auto Setup (

86).

page 82 ~

Easy to setup flow

Placing the speakers.

Auto setup flow

Connecting a microphone.

Connecting the speakers.

Connecting a monitor and a DVD player.

Starting the Auto

Setup.

Playing a DVD with surround sound.

Preliminary measurement

1) Measuring the background noise (noise in the room)

2) Determining whether or not speakers are connected

3) Checking the polarities of the speakers

Measurement of the speakers in the listening position.

1) Speaker Configuration

2) Distance

3) Channel Level

4) Crossover Frequency

5) Room EQ

The measurement of the speakers in the 2nd to 6th listening position


Speaker system layout

2

Basic system layout

The following is an example of the basic layout for a system consisting of eight speaker systems and a television monitor:

Subwoofer Center speaker system

Front speaker systems

Set these at the sides of the TV or screen with their front surfaces as flush with the front of the screen as possible.

Surround back speaker systems

Surround speaker systems

With the AVR-4306 it is also possible to use the surround speaker selector function to choose the best layout for a variety of sources and surround modes.

2

Surround speaker selector function

This function makes it possible to achieve the optimum sound fields for different sources by switching between two systems of surround speakers (A and B). The settings of the different speakers (A only, B only or A+B) are stored in the memory for the different surround modes, so they are set automatically when the surround mode is selected.

Check of the measurement result.

Store the measurement result in the memory.

A A A A

6

B B

SB SB

Using A only

(Multi surround speaker system)

B

SB SB

B

( SB : Surround back speakers)

Using B only

(Single surround speaker system)


Speaker connections

• Connect the speaker terminals with the speakers making sure that like polarities are matched (

< with

<

,

> with

>

). Mismatching of polarities will result in weak central sound, unclear orientation of the various instruments, and the stereo image being impaired.

NOTE:

NEVER touch the speaker terminals when the power is on. Doing so could result in electric shocks.

When making connections, take care that none of the individual conductors of the speaker cable come in contact with adjacent terminals, with other speaker cable conductors, or with the rear panel and screws.

Connecting the speaker cables

1. Loosen by turning counterclockwise.

Either tightly twist or terminate the core wires.

2. Insert the cable.

3. Tighten by turning clockwise.

Connecting banana plugs

Turn clockwise to tighten, then insert the banana plug.

2

Speaker impedance

• Speakers with an impedance of from 6 to 16

Ω

/ohms can be connected for use as front, center, surround and surround back speakers.

• Be careful when using two pairs of surround speakers (A + B) at the same time, since use of speakers with an impedance of less than 8

Ω

/ohms will lead to damage.

Note on speaker impedance

The protector circuit may be activated if the set is played for long periods of time at high volumes when speakers with an impedance lower than the specified impedance (for example speakers with an impedance of lower than 4

Ω

/ohms) are connected. If the protector circuit is activated, the speaker output is cut off. Turn off the set’s power, wait for the set to cool down, improve the ventilation around the set, then turn the power back on.

Protector circuit

This unit is equipped with a high-speed protection circuit. The purpose of this circuit is to protect the speakers under circumstances such as when the output of the power amplifier is inadvertently short-circuited and a large current flows, when the temperature surrounding the unit becomes unusually high, or when the unit is used at high output over a long period which results in an extreme temperature rise.

When the protection circuit is activated, the speaker output is cut off and the power supply indicator flashes. Should this occur, please follow these steps: be sure to switch off the power of this unit, check whether there are any faults with the wiring of the speaker cables or input cables, and wait for the unit to cool down if it is very hot.

Improve the ventilation condition around the unit and switch the power back on.

If the protection circuit is activated again even though there are no problems with the wiring or the ventilation around the unit, switch off the power and contact a DENON service center.


2

Connections

• The AVR-4306 can be configured for 10 speaker playback using two pairs of surround speakers

(A+B) and one pair of surround back speakers as shown below.

• The output of the surround back’s power amplifier can be assigned to the multi zone or front channel.

For details, refer to “Setting the Power Amplifier Assignment” ( page 76).

• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components.

Subwoofer Center speaker

Surround speaker systems (A)

Surround speaker systems (B)

IN

Connection terminal for subwoofer with built-in amplifier

(subwoofer), etc.

> <

>

(L)

< >

(R)

< >

(L)

< >

(R)

<

>

(L)

< >

(R)

<

>

(L)

< >

(R)

<


Precautions when connecting speakers:

If a speaker is placed near a TV or video monitor, the colors on the screen may be disturbed by the speaker’s magnetism. If this should happen, move the speaker away to a position where it does not cause this effect.

Surround back speaker systems

NOTE:

• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel.

7


Connecting a DVD player and monitor (TV)

• To connect the video output from the DVD player to the AVR-4306, you only need to choose one connection type. Component video connection offers the best quality (and is required for progressive DVD playback), followed by S-Video, while composite video offers the lowest picture quality of the three connection types. For more information about the video up conversion function ( page 15).

• The AVR-4306 is equipped with HDMI connectors, so it can be connected to a DVD player or monitor (TV) using an HDMI cable.

• To connect the digital audio output from the DVD player, you can choose from either the coaxial or optical connections. If you choose to use the optical connection, it needs to be assigned. For more information about Digital Input Assignment ( page 67).

• The AVR-4306 is equipped with another set of input terminals for a non-DVD Video Disc Player

(such as laser disc, VCD/SVCD, or future high definition disc player). The above connection guidelines for DVD also apply to the VDP input.


• For best picture quality (especially with progressive DVD and other high definition sources), choose the component video or HDMI connection to your monitor (TV). S-Video and composite video outputs are also provided if your TV does not have component video inputs.

I

Monitor (TV)

COMPONENT VIDEO IN

Y

P B

P

R

H

S VIDEO

IN

G

VIDEO

IN

J

HDMI

IN

I

DVD player

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Y

P

B

P

R

J

G

H

HDMI

OUT

VIDEO

OUT

NOTE:

• The component video input and/or output jacks may be labelled differently on some TVs, monitors or video components (Y, P

B

, P

R

; Y, C

B

, C

R

; Y, B-Y, R-Y). Check the owner’s manuals for other components for further information.

• The COMPONENT MONITOR OUT-1 and the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT-2 can be used simultaneously.

• Audio signals are only output from the HDMI monitor out terminal when audio signals are input to the HDMI input terminal.

• When connecting the AVR-4306 and DVD player using an HDMI cable, also connect the AVR-

4306 and monitor (TV) using an HDMI cable ( page 20).

A

L

R

D

S VIDEO

OUT

L

AUDIO OUT

L

R R

OPTICAL

OUT

C

COAXIAL

OUT

Audio signal flow is shown with white arrows; video signal flow is shown with gray arrows.

8


Auto Setup / Room EQ

The Auto Setup and Room EQ function of this unit performs an analysis of the speaker system and measures the acoustic characteristics of your room to permit an appropriate automatic setting.

The AVR-4306’s Audyssey MultEQ XT function has the feature that it provides the optimum listening environment at all listening positions in the home theater, where there are often multiple listeners viewing programs together. To achieve this, it is first necessary to use a microphone to measure test tones generated from the different speakers at the various listening positions. All this measured data is analyzed with a unique method to comprehensively improve acoustic characteristics in the listening area. For optimum effectiveness, measurements should be performed at six points. Move the microphone successively within the listening area surrounded by the speakers as shown on the diagram below to measure the test tones. When listening to music or viewing movies with the whole family, move the microphone successively to the different positions in which the members of the family sit (“ ” on the diagram indicates the points of installation) and measure repeatedly (Example q). Even if the number of people using the home theater is small, taking multiple measurements at or near the listening positions makes it possible to correct the sound more effectively (Example w).

The AVR-4306’s Room EQ function offers three correction curves: “Audyssey”, “Front” and “Flat”. These can be selected after performing the auto setup procedure. Details of the different correction curves are described below.

• Audyssey:

This adjusts the frequency response of all speakers to correct the effects of room acoustics.

• Front:

This adjusts the characteristics of each speaker to the characteristics of the front speakers.

• Flat:

This the frequency response of all speakers flat.

This is suitable for multi-channel music reproduction, from discrete music sources such as Dolby Digital 5.1, DTS, DVD-

Audio and Super Audio CD.

2

About the main listening position (*M)

The main listening position is the point where a listener sits most often or the listening position when only one person is listening.

Measurements on the AVR-4306 start from this point. Correction for the speaker distance is set based on this point.

• To make the Speaker system settings without using the Auto

Setup function ( page 82 ~ 86).

Example: q

* M

Example: w

* M

9



POWER ENTER SETUP MIC

SYSTEM

SETUP

ON/STANDBY CURSOR

AMP

SYSTEM SETUP

CURSOR

ON

OFF

ENTER

Connecting a microphone

1 Connect the microphone for Auto Setup to the

SETUP MIC jack on the front panel of the unit.

2 Mount the auto setup microphone onto a camera tripod, etc., and place it at ear height at the main listening position in the listening room with the sound receptor facing the ceiling.

Microphone


Turning on the power

1 Turn on your subwoofer.

Set the volume to halfway and set the crossover frequency to the maximum or Low pass filter off if your subwoofer can adjust the output volume and the crossover frequency

Some subwoofers have a standby mode. Be sure to turn this function off before performing the Auto Setup procedure.

2 Turn on your monitor (TV).

3 Press the POWER switch.

¢

ON:

The power turns on and the indicator lights.

Set the POWER switch to this position to turn the power on and off from the included remote control unit.

£

OFF:

The power turns off and the indicator is off.

In this position, the power cannot be turned on and off from the remote control unit.

When placing the microphone, adjust the height so that the microphone’s sound receptor is at the height of the ears of the listener.

Be sure that at the beginning, the measurement is started with the microphone set up at the main listening position.

It is not possible to measure properly if there are any obstacles between the speakers and microphone. Check that there are no obstacles.

Please do not stand between or near the speakers and the microphone during the measurements.

NOTE:

• Do not disconnect the microphone until the settings are completed.

• Do not change the connection of speakers or the subwoofer’s volume after performing these measurements.

4 Press the or

ON/STANDBY button on the main unit

ON button on the remote control unit.

• When pressed, the power turns on and the display lights.

• When pressed again, the power turns off, the standby mode is set and the display turns off.

The sound is muted for several seconds, after which the unit operates normally.

When ever the ON/STANDBY button is in the standby state, the apparatus is still connected to the AC line voltage.

Please be sure to turn off the POWER switch or unplug the cord when you leave home for, say, a vacation.

5 Press the AMP button to select “AMP” mode

(only when operating with the remote control unit ( page 24)).

10


Starting Auto Setup

1 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button.

• The “System Setup Menu” appears.

2 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select “Auto

Setup / Room EQ”, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Auto Setup / Room EQ” menu screen appears.

Power Amp Assign

The AVR-4306 has available surround back amplifier channel. If no surround back speakers are used in the main room, their amplifier channels can be assigned for multi-zone use or the front speaker‘s Bi-Amp connection. If this functionality is not needed, skip this “Power Amp Assign” procedure and proceed to

“Preliminary Measurements”.

Press the CURSOR D or H button to select “Power

Amp Assign”, then press the CURSOR F or G button to select “Surround Back”, “Front”, “Front B”,

“ZONE2” or “ZONE3”.


Preliminary measurements

• This procedure is used to automatically determine the background noise, whether or not speakers are connected, and the polarities of the connected speakers.

• To avoid affecting the measurements, turn off the airconditioner or any other device that makes noise and take the measurements with the room as quiet as possible.

• The set measures the background noise even when in the silent state with no test tones being output, so keep as quiet as possible until the measurements are completed.

1 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select

“Start”, then press the F button.

• The preliminary measurements start.


Setup”, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Auto Setup” screen appears.

The message “Connect Microphone” is displayed if no microphone is connected. If so, connect the auto setup microphone.

When “Surround Back” is selected, the surround back channel‘s test tone during Auto Setup will be output from surround back speakers.

When “Front” is selected, change the setting to a Bi-Amp mode for the front speakers.

The front channel‘s test tone during Auto Setup will be output from the front speakers and the surround back speakers.

When “Front B” is selected, change the setting to a second stereo output mode.

The test tone during Auto Setup will not be output from the surround back speakers.

When “ZONE2” or “ZONE3” is selected, change the setting to “ZONE2” or “ZONE3”.

The test tone during Auto Setup it will not be output to

“ZONE2” or “ZONE3” (Another room).

The screen shown at the below appears once the preliminary measurements are completed.

2

Press the ENTER button.

•The “Speaker Detect Check” screen appears.

[ First screen ]

11


3 Check the results of the speaker detection, then press the ENTER button.

• The second screen appears.

The screen shown at the below appears once the measurements for the main listening position are completed.


The amount of time required for the analysis depends on the number of speakers and the number of measuring points.

The greater the number of speakers and measuring points, the longer the time required.

Measurements can be ended when there are 6 or less measurement locations; however, to obtain better results, measurements at 6 locations is recommended.

Once the calculations are completed, a screen for confirming the results of the measurements appears.

[ Second screen ]

4 If the check ends, press the ENTER button again.

NOTE:

• If the results are not as expected or if an error message is displayed, select “Retry” and perform the measurements again (For details on the error messages ( page 13).)

If the results of remeasurement are still not as expected or if an error message is displayed, turn off the power switch and check the speaker connections. Then start the measurements again from the beginning.

• Measurement is cancelled when MASTER VOLUME knob is operated while the Auto Setup is performed.

2 Next the measurements for the second point will be taken.

Place the microphone at the second listening position. For instructions on the position in which the microphone should be placed ( page 9).

3

Press the CURSOR F F button.

• Measurements for the second point start.

Check of the measurement result

The results of the measured items can be checked.

1 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select an item, then press the ENTER button.

• The verification screen appears.

Example: Speaker Config. Check

Speaker system measurement

With these measurements, the “Speaker Configuration”,

“Distance”, “Channel Level”, “Crossover Frequency” and

“Room EQ” are analyzed automatically. The main listening position is measured first, so leave the microphone where it is.

4 Perform step 2, 3 repeatedly.

The more measurement points, the better the resulting room correction effect. We recommend 6 measurement points – 6 measurement points provides the best room correction effect.

1 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select “OK

Start”, then press the F button.

• Measurements for the first point start.

5 After measuring at the number of points according to your listening environment, press the CURSOR D or H button to select

“Calculate”, then press the F button.

• The speaker system is analyzed.

[ First screen ]

2 Press the ENTER button.

• The second screen appears.

Example: Speaker Config. Check

[ Second screen ]

12


3 If the check ends, press the ENTER button again.

4 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select whether or not to save the data you have checked.

Store:

Store the checked measurement values.

All parameters are stored.

Cancel:

Cancel the auto setup settings.


About the error message

These error messages will be displayed when performing the measurements of Auto Setup and the automatic measurements can not be completed because of the speaker arrangement, measurement environment, or other factors. Please check the following matters, reset the pertinent items, and measure again. Be sure to turn off the AVR-4306’s power before checking the speaker connections.

Screen example Cause Measures q The speakers required for producing suitable reproduction have not been detected.

• The front L and front R speakers were not properly detected.

• Only one channel of the surround (A) and surround (B) speakers was detected.

• Sound was output from the R channel when only one surround back speaker was connected.

• The surround back or the surround (B) speaker was detected, but the surround (A) speaker was not detected.

• Check that the pertinent speakers are properly connected.

to check the contents.

w The speaker polarity is connected in reverse.

to check the contents.

• Check the polarity of the pertinent speakers.

• For some speakers, the screen below may be displayed even though the speakers are properly connected.

If so, select “Skip 0 ”.

5 Press the CURSOR F button.

• After the data is stored, the “Auto Setup / Room EQ” menu screen appears automatically.

• When measurements have been made using the measurement microphone, speakers with a built-in filter such as subwoofers might be set with a value that differs from the physical distance because of the internal electrical delay.

NOTE:

• Do not turn off the power while the data is being stored.

If the power is turned off while the data is being stored, the

Room EQ parameters stored in the memory will be cleared, and it will not be possible to select “Audyssey”, “Front” or

“Flat” equalizer settings.

e There is too much ambient noise in the room and the measurements cannot be made accurately.

r The sound level that is output from the speakers and/or subwoofer is too low.

• Either turn off the power of the device that generated the noise during the measurements or move the device away.

• Try again at a time when it is quieter.

• Check the placement and orientation of the loudspeakers.

• Adjust the subwoofer’s output level.

t The measurement microphone is not connected, or all of speakers have not been detected.

• Connect the measurement microphone to the microphone connector.

• Check the speaker connection.

Playing a DVD with surround sound

1 Disconnect the microphone from the unit.

2 Select the input source to be played.

3 Select the play (surround) mode.

4 Start DVD playback.

5 Adjust the volume.

13


Cable indications

The hookup diagrams on the subsequent pages assume the use of the following optional connection cables (not supplied).

Audio cable

A Analog terminal (Stereo)

(White)

(Red)

L

R

Pin-plug cable

B Analog terminal (Monaural, for subwoofer)

L

R

Video cable

G Video terminal

(Yellow)

Video cable (75

Ω

/ohms video pin-plug cable)

H S-Video terminal

Pin-plug cable

C Digital terminal (Coaxial)

(Orange)

Coaxial cable (75

Ω

/ohm pin-plug cable)

D Digital terminal (Optical)

Optical cable (Optical fiber cable)

E DENON LINK terminal

I

S-Video cable

Component video terminal

(Green)

(Blue)

(Red)

Component video cable

Audio and Video cable

J HDMI terminal

(Y)

(P

B

/C

B

)

(P

R

/C

R

)

F Speaker terminal

DENON LINK cable

Speaker cable

Audio signal

Video signal

IN

IN

HDMI cable

Signal direction

OUT OUT

OUT OUT

IN

IN


NOTE:

• Do not plug in the power supply cord until all connections have been completed.

• When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the other components.

• Be sure to connect the left and right channels properly (left with left, right with right).

• Note that binding pin-plug cables together with power supply cords or placing them near a power transformer will result in hum or other noise.

NOTE:

• Connecting a LD (laser disc) player with a Dolby Digital

RF Output.

The AVR-4306 does not have a DD RF demodulator function.

Therefore, you need to use a commercially available outboard DD RF demodulator and connect its digital output to one of the AVR-4306 available digital inputs. Refer to the demodulator’s owner’s manual for further information.

14


The video conversion function

The AVR-4306 is equipped with a function for up and down converting video signals.

Because of this, the AVR-4306’s MONITOR OUT terminal can be connected to the monitor (TV) with a set of cables offering a higher quality connection, regardless of how the player and the

AVR-4306’s video input terminals are connected.

Generally speaking, analog video connections using the component video terminals offer the highest quality playback, followed by connections using the S-Video terminals, then connections using the regular video terminals (yellow).

NOTE:

• It is not possible to down-convert from HDMI input signals to the component, S-Video or composite video monitor output terminals.

• Video down conversion to the MAIN ZONE’s monitor output is only possible when the component video input resolution is 480i (interlaced standard definition video – NTSC format, for North America) or 576i (interlaced standard definition video – PAL format, for Europe and other countries).

• To set the video conversion function for the MAIN ZONE to

“OFF” ( page 72).

The flow of the video signals.

(HDMI terminal)

(Component Video terminals)

(S-Video terminal)

(HDMI terminal)

(Component Video terminals)

(S-Video terminal)

2

The analog video to HDMI conversion function:

• The AVR-4306’s video up-conversion function lets you output analog video input signals (component – 480i/576i, 480p/576p,

1080i or 720p; S-Video and composite video - 480i/576i) to the

HDMI monitor output terminal.

• With the AVR-4306, the resolution of the signal output to the

HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal can be selected ( page 72,

73). The resolutions with which the monitor is compatible can be checked using the STATUS button on the main unit or the ON

SCREEN button on the remote control unit.

(Video terminal)

This unit’s input terminals

(Video terminal)

This unit’s output terminals

: only MAIN ZONE 480i/576i

• If you do not want to use the function for converting analog video signals to HDMI signals, select “OFF” for “Analog to

HDMI Convert” at “Setting the HDMI Out Setup”(

73).

page 72,

In this case, the function for video up conversion to the component video terminal operates.

On screen display for component video outputs and HDMI output

• When viewing component video signals or HDMI signals via the AVR-4306, the on screen display is displayed on the monitor when the “System Setup” operations are performed and when the remote control unit’s ON SCREEN button is operated.

• To view the on screen display using an HDMI monitor, set “Analog to HDMI Convert” at “HDMI Out Setup” to “ON” (default).

• When only component video signals are input to the AVR-4306, the characters of the on screen display are not displayed over the picture.

15



Connecting equipment with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia

Interface) terminals [To convert analog video signals to HDMI signals]

• The AVR-4306 is equipped with a function for converting analog video signals into HDMI signals.

You can do this by either a component or a video or a S-Video connection.

• Audio signals are not output from the HDMI monitor output terminal, so also make analog or digital audio connections. To play sound using digital audio connections, assign the digital terminal

(coaxial or optical) at “Setting the Digital In Assignment” ( page 67).

I

J

G

Monitor (TV)

HDMI

IN

DVD player

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Y

P B

P

R

VIDEO

OUT


Connecting a TV tuner

• For best picture quality choose the component video connection to your TV tuner. S-Video and composite video outputs are also provided if your TV tuner does not have component video inputs.

• To connect the digital audio output from the TV tuner, you can choose from either the coaxial or the optical connections. If you choose to use the coaxial or the optical connection, it needs to be assigned. For more information about Digital Input Assignment ( page 67).

I

TV tuner

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Y

P

B

P

R

H

S VIDEO

OUT

G

A

L

R

L

AUDIO OUT

L

R R

VIDEO

OUT

H

S VIDEO

OUT

D

C

A

L

R

OPTICAL

OUT

COAXIAL

OUT

L

AUDIO OUT

L

R

R

NOTE:

• When “Through” is set at “Resolution” under “Setting the HDMI Out Setup”, use a monitor compatible with input resolutions of 480i/576i.

• If your monitor is not equipped with an HDMI terminal, connect the AVR-4306 to the monitor using the component video, S-Video, or composite video terminals.

16

Connecting a DBS tuner

• For best picture quality choose the component video connection to your DBS tuner. S-Video and composite video outputs are also provided.

• To connect the digital audio output from the DBS tuner, you can choose from either the coaxial or optical connections. If you choose to use the coaxial connection, it needs to be assigned. For more information about Digital Input Assignment ( page 67).

I

DBS / BS Tuner

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Y

P

B

P R

H

S VIDEO

OUT

G

A

L

R

D

L

AUDIO OUT

L

R R

VIDEO

OUT

OPTICAL

OUT


Connecting the external inputs (EXT. IN) terminals

• These terminals are for inputting multi-channel audio signals from an outboard decoder, or a component with a different type of multi-channel decoder, such as a DVD-Audio player, or a multichannel Super Audio CD player, or other future multi-channel sound format decoder.

• The video signal connection is the same as that for a DVD player ( page 8).

• For instructions on playback using the external input (EXT. IN) terminals ( page 67, 68).

A

L

R

B

DVD Audio-Video /

Super Audio CD Player /

External decoder

7.1ch AUDIO OUT

L

FRONT

L

R R

A

L

R

B

A

L

R

L

R

L

R

CENTER

SURROUND

BACK

L

R

SURROUND

L

R

SUB-

WOOFER


Connecting a CD player

To connect the digital audio output from the CD player, you can choose from either the coaxial or optical connections. If you choose to use the optical connection, it needs to be assigned. For more information about Digital Input Assignment ( page 67).

A

L

R

D

C

Connecting a turntable

You can connect the turntable (MM cartridge) to the PHONO terminals.

CD player

L

R

AUDIO OUT

L

R

OPTICAL

OUT

COAXIAL

OUT

Turntable

(MM cartridge)

• With discs on which special copyright protection measures have been taken, however, the digital signals may not be output from the DVD player. In this case, connect the DVD player’s analog multi-channel output to the AVR-4306’s EXT. IN terminals for playback. Also refer to your DVD player’s operating instructions.

A

L

R

AUDIO OUT

GND

Connecting a video camera component or video game

G

A

L

R

D

H

Video camera /

Video game

VIDEO

OUT

L

AUDIO OUT

L

R R

OPTICAL

OUT

S VIDEO

OUT

NOTE:

• The phono input can accept signals from moving magnet (MM) and high output moving coil

(MC) phono cartridges. If your turntable is equipped with a low output MC cartridge, you will need to use a separate MC head amplifier or step-up MC transformer.

• If humming or other noise is generated when the ground wire is connected to the SIGNAL

GND terminal, disconnect the ground wire.

17


Connecting a VCR

There are two sets of video deck (VCR) terminals, so two video decks can be connected for simultaneous recording or video copying.

G

H

H

G

A

L

R

A

L

R

Video deck

VIDEO

OUT

S VIDEO

OUT

S VIDEO

IN

L

R

AUDIO IN

L

R

L

AUDIO OUT

L

R R

VIDEO

IN

NOTE:

• When recording to a VCR, it is necessary that the type of cable used with the playback source equipment be the same type that is connected to the AVR-4306 VCR-1 (to 2) OUTPUT terminal.

Example: VCR-2 IN

→

S-Video cable : VCR-2 OUT

→

S-Video cable

VCR-2 IN

→

Video cable : VCR-2 OUT

→

Video cable


Connecting a DVD recorder

• For best picture quality choose the component video connection to your DVD recorder. S-Video and composite video outputs are also provided. If you choose to use the component video

( connection, it needs to be assigned. For more information about Component Input Assignment page 71, 72).

• If you wish to perform analog dubbing from a digital sources, such as a DVD recorder to an analog recorder such as a cassette deck, you will needs connect the analog inputs and outputs as shown below, in addition to the digital audio connections.

I

DVD recorder

COMPONENT VIDEO OUT

Y

P B

P

R

H

H

G

S VIDEO

OUT

S VIDEO

IN

VIDEO

IN

G

A

L

R

D

A

L

R

L

AUDIO OUT

L

R R

VIDEO

OUT

L

AUDIO IN

L

R R

OPTICAL

OUT

D

OPTICAL

IN

NOTE:

• When recording to a DVD recorder, it is necessary that the type of cable used with the playback source equipment be the same type that is connected to the AVR-4306 VCR-1 (to 2)

OUTPUT terminal.

Example: VCR-1 IN

→

S-Video cable : VCR-1 OUT

→

S-Video cable

VCR-1 IN

→

Video cable : VCR-1 OUT

→

Video cable

• Do not connect the output of the component connected to the OPTICAL 3 OUT terminal on the AVR-4306’s rear panel to any terminal other than the OPTICAL 3 IN terminal.

18


Connecting a CD recorder or MD recorder

If you wish to perform analog dubbing from a digital source, such as a CD or MD recorder to an analog recorder such as a cassette deck, you will need to connect the analog inputs and outputs as shown below, in addition to the digital audio connections.

A

L

R

D

A

L

R

CD recorder /

MD recorder

AUDIO OUT

L

L

R R

L

R

AUDIO IN

L

R


DENON LINK connection

• High quality digital sound with reduced digital signal transfer loss can be enjoyed by connecting a separately sold DENON LINK compatible DVD player.

• Digital transfer and multi-channel playback of DVD-Audio discs, Super Audio CDs and other multichannel sources are possible by connecting the AVR-4306 to a DENON DVD player equipped with a DENON LINK connector using the connection cable included with the DVD player. For instructions on playing Super Audio CDs ( page 63).

• When a DENON DVD player and the DENON LINK have been connected, be sure to make a setting to “DENON LINK” with “Setting the Digital In Assignment” ( page 67).

E

DVD player

DENON

LINK

D

OPTICAL

OUT

OPTICAL

IN

NOTE:

• Do not connect the output of the component connected to the OPTICAL 4 OUT terminal on the AVR-4306’s rear panel to any terminal other than the OPTICAL 4 IN terminal.

• With discs on which special copyright protection measures have been taken, however, the digital signals may not be output from the DVD player. In this case, connect the DVD player’s analog multi-channel output to the AVR-4306’s EXT. IN terminals for playback.

Also refer to your DVD player’s operating instructions.

Connecting a tape deck

A

L

R

A

L

R

Tape deck

L

R

AUDIO OUT

L

R

L

R

AUDIO IN

L

R

19


Connecting equipment with HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia

Interface) terminals

• A simple 1-cable connection (using a commercially available cable) with a device having an HDMI

(High-Definition Multimedia Interface) connector allows digital transfer of the digital images of

DVD video and other sources, and the multi-channel sound of DVD Audio and DVD Video.

• To provide audio output from AVR-4306’s audio output connector, select “Amp” at the System Setup.

To provide audio output from the TV, select “TV” at the System Setup. For details, see “Setting the HDMI In Assign” ( page 71).

J

Monitor TV

HDMI

IN


NOTE:

• The audio signals on the multi/stereo area of Super Audio CDs are not output. If the Super

Audio CD is a hybrid CD, only the audio signals in the CD area are output.

• Use a compatible player to play DVD-Audio discs that are copyright protected by CPPM.

• Among the devices that support HDMI, some devices can control other devices via the HDMI connector; however, the AVR-4306 cannot be controlled by another device via the HDMI connector.

• The audio signals from the HDMI connector (including the sampling frequency and bit length) may be limited by the equipment that is connected.

• The video signals are not output properly if a device not compatible with HDCP is used.

• When “Through” is set at “Resolution” under “Setting the HDMI Out Setup”, use a monitor compatible with input resolutions of 480i/576i.

• The video signals input from the HDMI input terminals are output to the HDMI monitor with their original resolution, so the image will not be displayed if the resolutions of the input signal and the monitor being used are not matched. In this case, change the setting of the resolution on the source device (player) to one which the monitor can handle.

• For stable signal transfer, we recommend using cables that are a maximum of 5 meters in length.

J

DVD player

HDMI

OUT

DVD Video

Input signals

LINEAR PCM

DVD Audio

CD

Dolby Digital

DTS

LINEAR PCM

PACKED PCM

(with CPPM / without CPPM)

LINEAR PCM

Super Audio

CD

Multi area

Stereo area

CD area

The AVR-4306 is HDMI Ver. 1.1 compatible.

2

Copyright Protection System

To play back the digital video and audio of DVD video and DVD audio through an HDMI/DVI-D connection, both the connected player and monitor are required to support a copyright protection system called HDCP (Highbandwidth Digital Content Protection System).

HDCP is copy protection technology that comprises data encryption and authentication of the partner equipment.

The AVR-4306 supports HDCP. Please see the user’s manual of your video display for more information about this.

• If your digital TV monitor or DVD player only supports DVI-D, please obtain and use an HDMI-DVI conversion cable or adaptor, available from your dealer.

2

Connections with an HDMI/DVI-D conversion cable (adapter)

• The HDMI video stream signals (video signals) are theoretically compatible with DVI-D. When connecting to a monitor, etc., equipped with DVI-D terminals, it is possible to connect using an

HDMI/DVI-D conversion cable, but depending on the combination of devices used the image might not be output.

• When using an HDMI/DVI-D conversion adapter, the image may not be output properly due to poor contact with the connected cable, etc..

20


Connecting the antenna terminals

An F-type FM antenna cable plug can be connected directly.

Direction of broadcasting station

AM loop antenna

(Supplied)

FM antenna

75

Ω

/ohms

Coaxial cable

FM indoor antenna

(Supplied)


Connecting the XM terminal

• AVR-4306 is the XM Ready® receiver. You can receive XM Satellite Radio® by connecting to the

XM Connect-and-Play TM (sold separately) and subscribing the XM service.

• Plug the XM Connect-and-Play antenna into XM terminal on the rear panel.

• Position the XM Connect-and-Play antenna near a south-facing window to receive the best signal.

For details, see “XM Satellite Radio” ( page 42).

When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the XM Connect-and-Play antenna.

XM Connect-and

-Play Antenna

XM

AM outdoor antenna

GROUND

2

AM loop antenna assembly

1 2

Connect to the AM antenna terminals.

3

Connection of AM antennas

1. Push the lever.

2. Insert the conductor.

3. Return the lever.

4

Remove the vinyl tie and take out the connection line.

a. With the antenna on top any stable surface.

Mount

Bend in the reverse direction.

b. With the antenna attached to a wall.

Installation hole Mount on wall, etc.

NOTE:

• Do not connect two FM antennas simultaneously.

• Even if an external AM antenna is used, do not disconnect the AM loop antenna.

• Make sure the AM loop antenna lead terminals do not touch metal parts of the panel.

Note to CATV system installer:

This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC which provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical.

21

NOTE:

• Keep the power supply cord unplugged until the XM Connect-and-Play antenna connection have been completed.


Connecting the RS-232C terminal

Connecting the TRIGGER OUT terminals

Connecting the MULTI ZONE terminals

For instructions on operations using the MULTI ZONE functions (

Connecting Other Sources page 60 ~ 62).

This terminal is used for an external controller only (Do not connect to computers.).

Perform the following operation before using an external controller connected to the RS-232C terminal:

1. Press the ON/STANDBY button on the main unit and set the unit to the operating mode.

2. Perform the operation to turn off the power from the external control.

3. Check that the product has been set to the standby mode.

After checking the above, check the connections of the external controller. Operation is possible.

Turn the DC 12V voltage on and off for the individual functions and surround modes.

For details, see “Setting the Trigger

Out” ( page 77, 78).

ZONE2 (or ZONE3) pre-out connections

• If another power amplifier or pre-main (integrated) amplifier is connected, the ZONE2 (or ZONE3) pre-out (variable or fixed level) terminals can be used to play a different program source in ZONE2

(or ZONE3) the same time ( page 60).

• The ZONE2 video out is only for the ZONE2.

• When a sold separately room-to-room remote control unit (DENON RC-616, 617 or 618) is wired and connected between the MAIN ZONE and ZONE2 (ZONE3), the remote-controllable devices in the MAIN ZONE can be controlled from ZONE2 (ZONE3) using the remote control unit.

Extension terminal for future use.

INPUT

+

OUTPUT

+

AUX OUT

H

RC-616

INFRARED RETRANSMITTER

RC-617

INFRARED

SENSOR

Monitor TV

(ZONE2)

S VIDEO

IN

G

VIDEO

IN

A

L

R

Power amplifier

(ZONE2 or ZONE3)

L

R

L

R

IN

NOTE:

• For the AUDIO output, use high quality pin-plug cables and wire in such a way that there is no humming or noise.

• For instructions on installation and operation of separately sold devices, refer to the devices’ operating instructions.

22


ZONE2 / ZONE3 speaker out connections

• When the surround back’s power amplifier is assigned to the ZONE2 or ZONE3 output channel at “Power Amp Assign” in the “System Setup Menu”, the surround back speaker terminals can be used as the ZONE2 or ZONE3 speaker out terminals ( page 61).

• The connections diagram below is an example for when the surround back speaker is assigned to the ZONE2 stereo 2 channel.

In this case, surround back speaker out can not be used for MAIN ZONE.

Subwoofer Center speaker

Surround speaker systems (A)

Surround speaker systems (B)

IN

Connection terminal for subwoofer with built-in amplifier

(subwoofer), etc.

> <

>

(L)

< >

(R)

< >

(L)

< >

(R)

<


Connecting the pre-out terminals

• Use these terminals if you wish to connect external power amplifier(s) to increase the power of the front, center, surround and surround back sound channels, or for connection to powered loudspeakers.

• When using only one surround back speaker, connect it to the left channel.

B

A

L

R

A

L

R

B

Power amplifier

L

R

CENTER

SURROUND

BACK

L

R

L

R

SURROUND

L

R

A

L

R

L

R

SUB-

WOOFER

FRONT

L

R

Connecting the power supply cord

Power supply cord

(Supplied)

AC outlets

(wall)

AC 120 V, 60 Hz

>

(L)

< >

(R)

<


>

(L)

< >

(R)

<

ZONE2 Front speaker systems

ZONE2

NOTE:

• Only use the AC OUTLETS for audio equipment. Never use it for hair driers, TVs or other electrical appliances.

• Insert the plugs securely. Incomplete connections will result in the generation of noise.

AC OUTLETS

• SWITCHED (total capacity – 120 W (1 A.))

The power to the outlet is turned on and off in conjunction with the POWER switch on the main unit, and when the power is switched between on and standby from the remote control unit.

No power is supplied from this outlet when this unit’s power is at standby. Never connect equipment whose total power consumption exceeds 120 W (1 A.).

23

Basic Operation

Playback

Operating the remote control unit

The RC-1024 remote control has a backlit EL display whose contents change according to the mode or function selected, with the appropriate remote commands for that mode or function.

The EL display switches as shown below with respect to the selected mode.

2

AMP mode

To operate the MAIN ZONE function.

2

ZONE3 mode

To operate the ZONE3 function.

2

Operate the this unit

The AMP button is the main mode for controlling the

AVR-4306 in the main room (MAIN ZONE).

2

SYSTEM CALL mode

To operate the “System call” function.

Basic Operation

The function switches as shown below each time one of the

AMP button is pressed.

AMP ZONE 2

SYSTEM CALL

ZONE 3

2

ZONE2 mode

To operate the ZONE2 function.

• This function provides the ability to program a series of individual remote control codes into a macro stored under one of the number pad’s numeric choices ( page 57).

24

Basic Operation

VIDEO SELECT STANDARD

FUNCTION ROOM EQ VOLUME

SOURCE INPUT MODE EXT.IN

PHONES ANALOG

Playing the input source

1 Select the input source to be played.

Example: CD

Basic Operation

2

To choose the surround sound mode

Example: Dolby Digital

Press the STANDARD button.

For more information about the surround modes (

31, 32).

page

(Main unit) (Remote control unit)

To select the input source when ZONE2/3/REC SELECT,

VIDEO SELECT or TUNING PRESET is selected, press the

SOURCE button on the main unit then operate the FUNCTION knob.

Start playback on the selected component.

2

For operating instructions, refer to the component’s manual.

3 Adjust the volume.

2

To select the Room EQ function

Press the ROOM EQ button.

For more information about the Room EQ function ( page 28).

INPUT MODE

STANDARD

ROOM EQ

VIDEO SELECT

SPEAKER


M.VOL. -80.0dB

VOLUME

MUTING

FUNCTION

The volume level is displayed on the master volume level display.

The volume can be adjusted within the range of –80 to +18 dB, in steps of 0.5 dB. However, when the channel level is set ( page 39 or 77), if the volume for any channel is set at +0.5 dB or greater, the volume cannot be adjusted up to

18 dB. (In this case the maximum volume adjustment range is “18 dB — (Maximum value of channel level)”.)

Also, you may not be able to adjust the volume to the maximum of 18 dB when internal volume compensation control is activated due to the combination of the surround mode and parameters, downmixing from multi-channel audio signals into two channels, etc.

25

Basic Operation

Playback using the external input (EXT. IN) terminals

Press the EXT. IN button on the main unit or INPUT

MODE button on the remote control unit to switch the external input.

When operating the remote control unit:

Turning the sound off temporarily (MUTING)

Use this to mute the audio output temporarily.

Press the MUTING button.

• You can adjust the muting level ( page 77).

Basic Operation

2

Operate the video select from the remote control unit

Press the VIDEO SELECT button until the desired image appears.

(Remote control unit)

The mode switches as shown below each time the INPUT

MODE button is pressed:

AUTO

EXT.IN

PCM DTS

ANALOG

• Cancelling MUTING mode:

Press the MUTING button again, or press the VOLUME button on the remote control, or adjust the volume up or down via the front panel VOLUME knob.

• Cancelling simulcast playback:

Select “SOURCE” pressing the VIDEO SELECT button.

• It is not possible to select HDMI input signals.

• When playing HDMI video input signals, the analog video signal of another function cannot be selected for the HDMI video output.

Listening over headphones

Connect the headphones to the PHONES jack.

• The pre-out output (including the speaker output) is automatically turned off when headphones are connected.

• Cancelling the external input mode:

Press the INPUT MODE or ANALOG button to switch to the desired input mode ( page 27, 28).

• The external input mode can be set for any input source. To watch video while listening to sound, select the input source to which the video signal is connected, then set this mode.

• If the subwoofer output level seems too high, set the “SW

ATT” surround parameter to “ON”.

NOTE:

• To prevent hearing loss, be careful not to raise the volume level excessively when using headphones.

Switching the surround speakers

Press the SPEAKER button.

The surround speakers switch as shown below each time the SPEAKER button is pressed.

SURROUND A SURROUND B

SURROUND A+B

This operation is possible when the setting for using both surround speakers A and B is made at “Setting the type of speakers” ( page 82).

NOTE:

• When the input mode is set to the external input (EXT. IN), the surround mode (DIRECT, STEREO, STANDARD, 7CH

STEREO, WIDE SCREEN or DSP SIMULATION) cannot be set.

• In play modes other than the external input mode, the signals connected to these terminals cannot be played. In addition, signals cannot be output from channels not connected to the input terminals.

Combining the currently playing sound with the desired image (VIDEO SELECT)

2

Operate the video select from the main unit

Press the VIDEO SELECT button, turn the FUNCTION knob until the desired image appears on the display.

• When using the pre-out terminals, set to either “A” or “B”.

(Main unit)

D V D

V I D E O S O U R C E

The video source selected with the video select function is stored in the memory for the different input sources.

26

Basic Operation

ROOM EQ

INPUT MODE

ANALOG

STATUS

INPUT MODE

ROOM EQ

ON SCREEN

Checking the currently playing program source, etc.

2

On screen display

Press the ON SCREEN button.

Each time an operation is performed, a description of that operation appears on the display connected to AVR-4306’s

VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal. Also, the unit’s operating status can be checked during playback.

Such information as the position of the input selector and the surround settings is output in sequence.

Basic Operation

2

Selecting the AUTO, PCM and DTS modes

Press the INPUT MODE button.


MODE button on the main unit is pressed:

AUTO PCM DTS

When operating the remote control unit:

2

Front panel display

Press the STATUS button.

Descriptions of the unit’s operations are also displayed on the front panel display. In addition, the display can be switched to check the unit’s operating status while playing a source.

Input mode

The AVR-4306 has an AUTO signal detection mode that automatically identifies the type of incoming audio signals, but is also equipped with a manual mode that can be switched according to the type of input audio signals.



MODE button on the remote control unit is pressed:

AUTO

EXT.IN

PCM DTS

ANALOG

AUTO (All auto mode):

In this mode, the types of signals being input to the digital and analog input terminals for the selected input source are detected and the program in the AVR-4306’s surround decoder is selected automatically upon playback. This mode can be selected for all input sources other than PHONO and

TUNER.

The presence or absence of digital signals is detected, the signals input to the digital input terminals are identified and decoding and playback are performed automatically in DTS,

Dolby Digital or PCM (2 channel stereo) format. If no digital signal is being input, the analog input terminals are selected.

Use this mode to play Dolby Digital signals.

PCM (exclusive PCM signal playback mode):

Decoding and playback are only performed when PCM signals are being input.

Note that noise may be generated when using this mode to play signals other than PCM signals.

DTS (exclusive DTS signal playback mode):

Decoding and playback are only performed when DTS signals are being input.

27

Basic Operation

2

Selecting the analog mode

Press the ANALOG button on the main unit or INPUT

MODE button on the remote control unit to switch to the analog input.

ANALOG (exclusive analog audio signal playback mode):

The signals input to the analog input terminals are decoded and played.

NOTE:

• Input mode when playing DTS sources:

Noise will be output if DTS-compatible CDs or LDs are played in the “ANALOG” or “PCM” mode.

When playing DTS-compatible sources, be sure to connect the source component to the digital input terminals

(OPTICAL/COAXIAL) and set the input mode to “DTS”.

2

Input mode display

Depending on the input signal.

• In the AUTO mode

• In the DIGITAL PCM mode

• In the DIGITAL DTS mode

• In the ANALOG mode

• In the EXT.IN mode

Basic Operation

2

Input signal display

• DOLBY DIGITAL

• DTS

Depending on the input signal.

• The “DSD” indicator lights when the

DENON LINK have been connected and the DSD signals have been input ( page 19).

Room EQ function

The AVR-4306’s Auto Setup / Room EQ function offers three correction curves: “Audyssey”, “Front”, “Flat”. The timbre of the speakers can also be adjusted manually using a graphic equalizer.

Details of the different correction curves are described below.

• PCM Depending on the input signal.

• The “HDCD” indicator lights when digital signals are being input with a player that supports HDCD playback.

Press the ROOM EQ button.

• The “Audyssey” is selected, the MultEQ XT indicator lights green.

• The “Front” or “Flat” is selected, the MultEQ XT indicator lights red.

The MultEQ XT indicator also lights red if the “Speaker

Configuration”, “Distance”, “Channel Level” or “Crossover

Frequency” is set manually after conducting the Auto Setup procedure.

The “DIG.” indicator lights when digital signals are being input properly. If the “DIG.” indicator does not light, check whether the “Digital In Assign” ( page 67) and connections are correct and whether the component’s power is turned on.

AL24 processing is activated when PCM signals are played while the surround mode is set to PURE DIRECT, DIRECT,

STEREO, MULTI CH PURE DIRECT, MULTI CH DIRECT or

MULTI CH IN.

NOTE:

• The “DIG.” indicator will light when playing CD-ROMs containing data other than audio signals, but no sound will be heard.

The Room EQ switches as follows each time the ROOM EQ button is pressed.

OFF Audyssey Front Flat Manual

Audyssey:

This adjusts the frequency response of all speakers to correct the effects of room acoustics.

Front:

This adjusts the characteristics of each speaker to the characteristics of the front speakers.

Flat:

This the frequency response of all speakers flat.

This is suitable for multi-channel music reproduction, from discrete music sources such as Dolby Digital 5.1, DTS, DVD-

Audio and Super Audio CD.

Manual:

Selects the setting value that was set in the Manual EQ

Setup.

For details of the “Setting the Manual EQ Setup” (

75).

page

• The “Audyssey”, “Front” and “Flat” Room EQ curves can be selected after performing the Auto Setup procedure.

28

Basic Operation

Surround

Playing modes for different sources

The AVR-4306 is equipped with many surround modes. We recommend using the surround modes as described below in order to achieve the maximum effect for the specific signal source.

mode.

is a 6.1-channel/7.1-channel surround

Sources recorded in Dolby Digital EX

DOLBY DIGITAL EX / +PL II x* 1

( page 31)

• This mode is optimized for playing sources recorded in Dolby Digital EX.

Dolby Digital or DTS Surround (5.1 ch sources)

2 ch sources recorded in Dolby

Surround

WIDE SCREEN ( page 36 ~ 38)

• Effective for 2-channel sources recorded in Dolby Surround or for

7.1-channel playback with 5.1channel sources.

DOLBY DIGITAL /

DOLBY DIGITAL+PL II x* 1 /

DTS SURROUND / DTS 96/24 /

DTS+PL II x* 1 / DTS+NEO:6

( page 31)

• This mode is optimized for playing

5.1-channel or 7.1-channel music.

• For Dolby Surround recording sources, Dolby Pro Logic II playback is conducted.

Sources recorded in DTS-ES

DTS-ES DSCRT 6.1 / MTRX 6.1,

+PL II x* 1

( page 31)

• This is the optimum mode for playing sources recorded in DTS-ES.

Basic Operation

Sources recorded in stereo

Sources recorded in monaural

PURE DIRECT ( page 30)

• By suspending all circuits and processes not required, analog input music playback can be played with optimum quality.

DIRECT / STEREO ( page 30)

• Effective for achieving pure playback.

• If there is no need for tone control or distribution of the low frequencies in function of the speaker configuration, select the DIRECT mode to achieve the best sound quality.

DENON Original Surround Modes

( page 36 ~ 38)

• Select these for 7.1-channel playback with sources recorded in stereo or monaural.

• The effects are different for each of the surround modes. Select the one most suited for the source being used.

DTS NEO:6 ( page 35)

• This is a surround mode for playing

6.1- or 7.1-channel stereo sources developed by Digital Theater

Systems.

• One of two playing modes, MUSIC

(for music sources) or CINEMA (for movie sources), can be selected according to your preferences.

DOLBY PRO LOGIC II x* 1

( page 33, 34)

• Developed by Dolby Laboratories, this surround mode provides 7.1

channel surround sound with conventional stereo (2-channel) sources.

• Select CINEMA mode for movie surround soundtracks, MUSIC for music sources, and GAME for 2channel game box audio sources.

• Though we recommend selecting the surround mode as described above, other surround modes can also be selected.

NOTE:

• Surround modes marked with an asterisk

(*1) cannot be used when the surround back speaker is set to “NONE”.

• The “+PL II x Cinema” mode cannot be selected when only one surround back speaker is being used.

29

Basic Operation

PURE DIRECT DIRECT/STEREO

PURE DIRECT

DIRECT/STEREO

Playing audio sources (CDs and DVDs)

2-channel playback modes

• The AVR-4306 is equipped with three 2-channel playback modes exclusively for music.

• Select the mode to suit your tastes.

2

PURE DIRECT mode

This mode reproduces the sound with extremely high quality.

When this mode is set, all circuits and processes not required for the selected input source (FL tube, video circuit and tone control, as well as digital circuitry and other unnecessary circuits for analog audio inputs) are automatically turned off so the music signals can be reproduced with high sound quality.

Basic Operation

2

STEREO mode

Use this mode to adjust the tone and achieve the desired sound.

• The system setup function cannot be used when the PURE

DIRECT mode is set. To use the system setup function, cancel the PURE DIRECT mode.

• If the HDMI input terminal is selected, video outputs are outputted in the PURE DIRECT mode.

• The channel level and surround parameters in the PURE

DIRECT mode are the same as in the DIRECT mode.

Press the PURE DIRECT button to select the PURE

DIRECT mode.

Press the DIRECT/STEREO button to select the

STEREO mode.

2

DIRECT mode

Use this mode to achieve good quality 2-channel sound. In this mode, the audio signals bypass such circuits as the tone circuit and are transmitted directly, resulting in good quality sound.

Press the DIRECT/STEREO button to select the

DIRECT mode.

The mode switches as shown below each time the

DIRECT/STEREO button is pressed.

DIRECT STEREO

30

Basic Operation

SURROUND PARAMETER

STANDARD ENTER

NIGHT CURSOR

STANDARD

CURSOR

SURROUND

PARAMETER

NIGHT

ENTER

ON SCREEN

Basic Operation

Dolby Digital mode and DTS Surround (only with digital input)

1 Press the STANDARD button to select

“STANDARD (Dolby/DTS Surround)” mode.

2 Play a program source with the

, mark.

• The Dolby Digital indicator lights when playing Dolby Digital sources.

• The DTS indicator lights when playing DTS sources.

lights lights

3 Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button.

• The surround parameter menu is displayed.

pressed, “CINEMA EQ.” and “D.COMP.” are automatically turned off, “LFE” is reset, and “TONE” is set to the default value.

2

Dialogue Normalization

The dialogue normalization function is activated automatically when playing Dolby Digital program sources.

Dialogue normalization is a basic function of Dolby Digital which automatically normalizes the dialog level (standard level) of the signals which are recorded at different levels for different program sources, such as DVD, DTV and other future formats that will use Dolby Digital.

When this function is activated, the following message appears on the main unit’s display:

Display

D i a l . N o r m

O f f s e t - 4 d B

The number indicates the normalization level when the currently playing program is normalized to the standard level.

The surround back channel can be switched on and off from the surround parameter menu.

When the surround back channel is set to “ON”, the surround back channel’s output display lights.

Set to “1spkr” Set to “2spkrs” lights lights

4 Press the parameter.

CURSOR D D or H button to select the

5 Press the setting.

CURSOR F or G button to select the

6 Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete the setting.

Night mode

When listening at night or at lower volumes, the night mode improves listenability.

Press the NIGHT button to enter the night mode.

• The NIGHT indicator lights.

• Canceling night mode:

Press the NIGHT button again.

• The night mode only works when playing program sources recorded in Dolby Digital.

• When the night mode is set to “ON”, the “D.COMP” surround parameter can not be selected.

31

Basic Operation

2

Checking the input signal

The input signal can be checked by pressing the remote control unit’s ON SCREEN button ( page 5).

SIGNAL:

Displays the type of signal (DTS, DOLBY DIGITAL, PCM, etc.).

fs:

Displays the input signal’s sampling frequency.

FORMAT:

Displays the input signal’s number of channels.

“Number of front channels / Number of surround channels /

LFE on/off”

“SURROUND” is displayed for 2-channel signal sources recorded in Dolby Surround.

OFFSET:

Displays the dialog normalization offset value.

FLAG:

Displays the special identification signal recorded in the input signal.

“MATRIX” is displayed when matrix processing is conducted on the surround back channel, “DISCRETE” is displayed when discrete processing is conducted.

Not displayed when no identification signal is recorded.

• In addition, screen information is displayed in the following order when the ON SCREEN button is pressed repeatedly:

OSD-1

OSD-2

Audio input signal

Monitor information

OSD-3

OSD-4

OSD-5

OSD-6

OSD-7

OSD-8~14

Input/output

Auto surround mode

USER MODE 1

USER MODE 2

USER MODE 3

Tuner preset stations

NOTE:

• OSD-2:

The monitor’s resolution is displayed when an HDMI monitor is connected to the AVR-4306.

• OSD-4:

This is displayed when the auto surround mode is set to

“ON” ( page 75) and the input mode is set to “AUTO”.

It is not displayed when the input mode is set to “ANALOG” or “EXT. IN”.

2

Surround parameters q

CINEMA EQ. (Cinema Equalizer):

The Cinema EQ function gently decreases the level of the extreme high frequencies, compensating for overly-bright sounding motion picture soundtracks. Select this function if the sound from the front speakers is too bright.

This function only works in the Dolby Pro Logic II x, Dolby Pro

Logic, Dolby Digital, DTS Surround, DTS NEO:6 and WIDE

SCREEN modes.

D.COMP. (Dynamic Range Compression):

Motion picture soundtracks have tremendous dynamic range

(the contrast between very soft and very loud sounds). For listening late at night, or whenever the maximum sound level is lower than usual, the Dynamic Range Compression allows you to hear all of the sounds in the soundtrack (but with reduced dynamic range). (This only works when playing program sources recorded in Dolby Digital or DTS.) Select one of the four parameters (“OFF”, “LOW”, “MID” (middle) or “HI”

(high)). Set to OFF for normal listening.

This parameter is displayed only when playing compatible sources in DTS mode.

LFE (Low Frequency Effect):

This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effect) sounds included in the source when playing program sources recorded in Dolby Digital, DTS, DVD-Audio or Super Audio CD.

Program source and adjustment range:

–10 dB to 0 dB

When DTS encoded movie software is played, it is recommended that the LFE LEVEL be set to 0 dB for correct DTS playback.

When DTS encoded music software is played, it is recommended that the LFE LEVEL be set to –10 dB for correct DTS playback.

Basic Operation

TONE:

This adjusts the tone control ( page 38).

This can be set individually for the separate surround mode other than PURE DIRECT and DIRECT mode.

MODE/SB CH OUT:

Select the surround back channel playback method or mode.

(1) Multi channel source

• NON MTRX:

The same signals as those of the surround channels are output from the surround back channels.

• MTRX ON:

The surround channel signals undergo digital matrix processing and are output from the surround back channels.

• SB OFF (OFF):

No signal is played from the surround back channels.

• ES MTRX:

When playing DTS signals, the surround back signals undergo digital matrix processing for playback.

• ES DSCRT:

When a signal identifying the source as a discrete 6.1-channel source is included in the DTS signals, the surround back signals included in the source are played.

• PL II x Cinema:

Processing is performed with the Cinema mode of the PL II x decoder and the Surround Back channel is reproduced.

• PL II x Music:

Processing is performed with the Music mode of the PL II x decoder and the Surround Back channel is reproduced.

(2) 2ch source

• OFF:

Playback is conducted without using the surround back speaker.

• ON:

Playback is conducted using the surround back speaker.

32

Basic Operation

AFDM (Auto Flag Detect Mode):

• ON:

This function only works with software on which a special identification signal is recorded. This software is scheduled to go on sale in the future.

This is a function for automatically playing in the 6.1-channel mode using the surround back speaker(s) if the software is recorded in Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES or in the normal 5.1channel mode without using the surround back speaker(s) when the software is not recorded in Dolby Digital EX or DTS-

ES.

When AFDM is set to “ON” and the EX/ES flag is detected automatically, the surround mode is fixed according to the playing program source.

In this case, the “MODE/SB CH OUT” parameter can not be selected on the surround parameter screen.

• OFF:

When the identification signal is detected automatically and you would like to select the surround mode freely, set AFDM to “OFF”.

In this case the “MODE/SB CH OUT” parameter can be selected on the surround parameter screen regardless of the playing program source.

Example:When playing software that has a Dolby Digital EX flag q When AFDM is set to

“ON”, the surround mode is automatically set to the

“DOLBY DIGITAL + PL II x

CINEMA” mode. The surround parameter screen will be displayed.

w When you would like to play back with the “Dolby Digital

EX” mode, set AFDM to

“OFF” and select “MTRX

ON” with “SB CH OUT”.

Some discs recorded in Dolby Digital EX do not include EX flag. If the playing mode does not switch automatically when the AFDM turns “ON” during playback, manually set “SB CH

OUT” to “PL II x Cinema” or “MTRX ON”.

When the surround back speaker is set to “1spkr” at

“Speaker Configuration”, set “SB CH OUT” to “MTRX ON”.

STANDARD ENTER

STANDARD

CURSOR

SURROUND

PARAMETER


CURSOR

ENTER

ON SCREEN

Basic Operation

Dolby Pro Logic

II

x (Pro Logic

II

) mode

• To play in the PL II x mode, set “Sp.Back” at the Speaker

Configuration setting to “1spkr” or “2spkrs”.

• To play in the PL II x mode, set “Surround Back” at the Power

Amp Assign setting.

1 Press the STANDARD button to select “Dolby

Pro Logic II x” mode.


STANDARD button is pressed.

DOLBY PL II x DTS NEO:6

2 Play a program source with the mark.

For operating instructions, refer to the manuals of the respective components.

3

Press the SURROUND PARAMETER button.


33

Basic Operation

4 Press the play mode.


When the “SB CH OUT” parameter is set to “ON”. (Set

“Sp.Back” at the System Setup to “1spkr” or “2spkrs”).

Display

(Pro Logic II x Cinema mode)

* S u r r P a r a m e t e r

M O D E : P L x C


M O D E : P L x M

(Pro Logic II x Music mode)


M O D E : P L x G

(Pro Logic II x Game mode)

When the “SB CH OUT” parameter is set to “OFF”. (Set

“Sp.Back” at the System Setup to “None”).

Display


M O D E : P L C

(Pro Logic II Cinema mode)


M O D E : P L M

(Pro Logic II Music mode)


M O D E : P L G

(Pro Logic II Game mode)

5 Press the CURSOR D or H various surround parameters.

Example: DOLBY PL II x Music mode screen

When set with the on screen display using the remote control unit while in the MUSIC mode, set the “ ” mark to “OPTIONS

0

” pressing the CURSOR D H button, then

Press the ENTER button to return to the previous screen.

6 Press the CURSOR F or G button to adjust the parameters setting.

DEFAULT setting:

Press the F button to select “Default

Yes 0 ”, then parameters set to default setting.

Basic Operation

2

Surround parameters w

Pro Logic II x and Pro Logic II Mode:

Select one of the modes (“Cinema”, “Music”, “Pro Logic” or

“Game”).

The Cinema mode is for use with stereo television shows and all programs encoded in Dolby Surround.

The Music mode is recommended for stereo music and surround-encoded stereo music sources.

The Pro Logic mode emulates Dolby Laboratories’ original

Dolby Pro Logic surround decoding, and may provide better results with older, legacy surround-encoded program material.

The Game mode is optimized for computer and/or dedicated game box consoles, that feature stereo analog or digital outputs. It can only be used with 2-channel stereo sources.

PANORAMA:

This mode extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for an exciting “wraparound” effect with side wall imaging.

Select “OFF” or “ON”.

DIMENSION:

This control gradually adjust the soundfield either towards the front or towards the rear.

The control can be set in 7 steps from 0 to 6.

CENTER WIDTH:

This control adjust the center image so it may be heard only from the center speaker; only from the left/right speakers as a phantom image; or from all three front speakers to varying degrees.

The control can be set in 8 steps from 0 to 7.


M O D E : D O L B Y P L

(Dolby Pro Logic mode)


• There are four Dolby Surround Pro Logic modes (NORMAL,

PHANTOM, WIDE and 3 STEREO). The AVR-4306 sets the mode automatically according to the types of speakers set during the system setup process ( page 82).

34

Basic Operation


STANDARD ENTER

STANDARD

CURSOR

SURROUND

PARAMETER

CURSOR USER MODE

USER MODE

ENTER

DTS NEO:6 mode

Surround playback can be performed for the analog input and digital input 2-channel signals.

1 Press the STANDARD button to select “DTS

NEO:6” mode.


STANDARD button is pressed.

DOLBY PL II x DTS NEO:6

Basic Operation

5 Press the CURSOR D or H various surround parameters.

6 Press the CURSOR F or G parameters setting.


2 Play a program source.



4 Press the CURSOR F play mode.

F or G button to select the pressed, “MODE” and “TONE” are automatically reset to the default values and “CINEMA EQ.” is set to “OFF”.

• When playing PCM digital signals or analog signals in the

DOLBY PRO LOGIC II , DOLBY PRO LOGIC II x, DTS NEO:6 modes and the input signal switches to a digital signal encoded in Dolby Digital, the Dolby surround mode switches automatically. When the input signal switches to a DTS signal, the mode automatically switches to DTS surround.

2

Surround parameters e

DTS NEO:6 Mode:

• Cinema:

This mode is optimum for playing movies. Decoding is performed with emphasis on separation performance to achieve the same atmosphere with 2-channel sources as with

6.1-channel sources.

This mode is effective for playing sources recorded in conventional surround formats as well, because the in-phase component is assigned mainly to the center channel (C) and the reversed phase component to the surround (SL, SR and SB channels).

• Music:

This mode is suited mainly for playing music. The front channel

(FL and FR) signals bypass the decoder and are played directly so there is no loss of sound quality, and the effect of the surround signals output from the center (C) and surround (SL,

SR and SB) channels add a natural sense of expansion to the sound field.

CENTER IMAGE (0.0 to 1.0: default 0.3):

The center image parameter for adjusting the expansion of the center channel in the DTS NEO:6 MUSIC mode has been added.

35

Basic Operation

Memory and call-out functions (USER MODE function)

• The AVR-4306 is equipped with a function for storing the selected input source, the auto surround mode and input mode in the memory and selecting these settings when you want to use them.

• Three patterns of settings can be stored in the memory pressing the USER MODE buttons.

Basic Operation

DENON original surround modes

The AVR-4306 is equipped with a high performance DSP (Digital Signal Processor) which uses digital signal processing to synthetically recreate the sound field. One of ten preset surround modes can be selected according to the program source and the parameters can be adjusted according to the conditions in the listening room to achieve a more realistic, powerful sound.

Surround modes and their features

2

Storing the settings in the memory

1 7CH STEREO

The front left channel signals are output to the surround and surround back left channels, the front right channel signals are output to the surround and surround back right channels, and the in-phase component of the left and right channels is output to the center channel. Use this mode to enjoy stereo sound.

1 The following are stored in the memory:

2 Press and hold the USER MODE button for at least three seconds which you want to store the settings.

In this case, press the button and hold it in until the indicator of the selected USER MODE button lights.

2

Calling the settings out

2 WIDE SCREEN

3 SUPER STADIUM

4

5

ROCK ARENA

JAZZ CLUB

Select this to achieve an atmosphere like that of a movie theater with a large screen. In this mode, all signal sources are played in the 7.1-channel mode, including Dolby Surround and Dolby Digital 5.1-channel sources. Effects simulating the multi surround speakers of movie theaters are added to the surround channels.

Select this when watching baseball or soccer programs to achieve a sound as if you were actually at the stadium. This mode provides the longest reverberation signals.

Use this mode to achieve the feeling of a live concert in an arena with reflected sounds coming from all directions.

This mode creates the sound field of a live house with a low ceiling and hard walls. This mode gives jazz a very vivid realism.

6 CLASSIC CONCERT Select this for the sound of a concert hall rich in reverberations.

Press the USER MODE button at which the settings you want to call out are stored.

• The indicator for the selected USER MODE button lights.

7

MONO MOVIE

(NOTE)

8 VIDEO GAME

Select this when watching monaural movies for a greater sense of expansion.

Use this to enjoy video game sources.

In this case, press the button and hold it in until the indicator of the selected USER MODE button lights.

9 MATRIX

10 VIRTUAL

Select this to emphasize the sense of expansion for music sources recorded in stereo. Signals consisting of the component difference of the input signals (the component that provides the sense of expansion) processed for delay are output from the surround channel.

Select this mode to enjoy a virtual sound field, produced from the front 2-channel speakers or headphones.

Depending on the program source being played, the effect may not be very noticeable.

In this case, try other surround modes, without worrying about their names, to create a sound field suited to your tastes.

NOTE: When playing sources recorded in monaural, the sound will be one-sided if signals are only input to one channel (left or right), so input signals to both channels. If you have a source component with only one audio output (monophonic camcorder, etc.) obtain a “Y” adapter cable to split the mono output to two outputs, and connect to the L and R inputs.

2

Personal memory plus

This set is equipped with a personal memorize function that automatically memorizes the surround modes and input modes selected for the different sources. When the input source is switched, the modes set for that source last time it was used are automatically recalled.

The surround parameters, tone control settings and playback level balance for the different output channels are memorized for each surround mode.

36

Basic Operation


DSP SIMULATION ENTER

DSP SIMULATION

CURSOR

SURROUND

PARAMETER

CURSOR

Basic Operation

DSP surround simulation

1 Press the DSP SIMULATION button to select the surround mode for the input channel.

The surround mode switches in the following order each time the DSP SIMULATION button is pressed:

7CH STEREO WIDE SCREEN SUPER STADIUM

VIRTUAL

MATRIX

ROCK ARENA

JAZZ CLUB

VIDEO GAME MONO MOVIE CLASSIC CONCERT

The 7CH STEREO mode can be selected directly by pressing the 7CH STEREO button on the remote control unit.



• The “7CH STEREO” display changes as shown below according to the surround back speaker setting.

SURROUND

BACK SPEAKER

ON

OFF

DISPLAY

7CH STEREO

5CH STEREO pressed, “CINEMA EQ.” and “D.COMP.” are automatically turned off, “ROOM SIZE” is set to “medium”, “EFFECT

LEVEL” to “10”, “DELAY TIME” to “30 ms” and “LFE” to “0 dB”.

• The “ROOM SIZE” expresses the expansion effect for the different surround modes in terms of the size of the sound field, not the actual size of the listening room.

7CH STEREO

ENTER

The screen for the selected surround mode appears.

3 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the various surround parameters.

4 Press the CURSOR F or G button to adjust the parameter settings.


37

Basic Operation

2

Surround parameters r

EFFECT:

This parameter turns the effect signals with multi surround mode speaker effects on and off in the WIDE SCREEN mode.

When this parameter is turned off, the SBL and SBR channel signals are equivalent to the SL and SR channels, respectively.

LEVEL:

This parameter sets the strength of the effect signals in the

WIDE SCREEN mode. It can be set in 15 steps, from “1” to

“15”. Set this to a low level if the positioning or phase of the surround signals sounds unnatural.

SB CH OUT

• ON:

Playback is conducted using the surround back speaker.

• OFF:

Playback is conducted without using the surround back speaker.

ROOM SIZE:

This sets the size of the sound field.

There are five settings: “small”, “med.s” (medium-small),

“medium”, “med.l” (medium-large) and “large”. “small” recreates a small sound field, “large” a large sound field.

EFFECT LEVEL:

This sets the strength of the surround effect.

The level can be set in 15 steps from 1 to 15. Lower the level if the sound seems distorted.

DELAY TIME:

The delay time can be set within the range of 0 to 300 ms only in the matrix mode.

SW ATT:

This is the parameter for reducing the level of the subwoofer channel when playing in the EXT. IN input mode. Depending on the player you are using, the subwoofer channel’s playback level may seem too high. If so, set “SW ATT” to “ON”.

For DENON players, use with the default settings (“OFF”).

Subwoofer ON/OFF:

The subwoofer output can be controlled directly.

Tone control setting

• Use the tone control setting to adjust the bass and treble as desired.

• The tone control function will not work in the PURE DIRECT or

DIRECT mode.

2

Adjusting the tone

1

2

3

Press the


The screen selected surround mode appears.

Press the

“TONE”.

Press the


CURSOR F button.

• Switch to the “Tone Control” screen.

button.

CURSOR D or H button to select

Basic Operation

4 Press the G button to select “Tone

Defeat OFF”.


“Bass” or “Treble”.

6 Press the CURSOR F or G button to set the level.

To increase the bass or treble:

The bass or treble sound can be increased up to +6 dB in steps of 1 dB.

To decrease the bass or treble:

The bass or treble sound can be decreased down to –6 dB in steps of 1 dB.

7

8


• The surround parameter menu screen reappears.

Press the ENTER or SURROUND PARAMETER button to complete the setting.

2

Tone defeat mode

If you do not want the bass and treble to be adjusted, turn on the tone defeat mode.

The signals do not pass through the bass and treble adjustment circuits, providing higher quality sound.

The screen selected surround mode appears.

38

Basic Operation

CH SEL/ENTER

CURSOR

CURSOR

CH SEL/ENTER

Channel level

You can adjust the channel level either according to the playback sources or to suit your tastes, as described below.

1


• The “Channel Vol.” screen is displayed.

Basic Operation

Fader function

This function makes it possible to lower the volume of the front channels (FL, C and FR) or the rear channels (SL, SR, SBL and

SBR) together. Use it for example to adjust the balance of the sound from each position when multi-channel music sources are played.

1


• The “Channel Vol.” screen is displayed.

2 Press the CURSOR D , H or ENTER button, then select “Fader”.

Channels which is not used are not displayed.

2 Press the CURSOR D , H or ENTER button to select the speaker.

The channel switches as shown below each time the ENTER button is pressed.

FL C FR SW SR

FADER SL SBL SBR

The channel switches in the order shown below each time the ENTER button is pressed.

FL C FR SW SR

FADER SL SBL SBR

3 Press the level.

CURSOR F F or G button to adjust the

The adjustment range for the different channels is +12 dB to –12 dB in step of 0.5 dB.

The sound from the subwoofer can be completely cut by lowering the SW (subwoofer) setting one additional from

–12 dB (setting it to “OFF”).

3 Press the CURSOR F button to reduce the volume of the front channels, the G button to reduce the volume of the rear channels.

Example: When “FRONT” is selected

• When the surround back speaker setting is set to “1spkr” for

“Speaker Configuration” ( page 82), this is set to “SB”.

The fader function does not affect the subwoofer channel

• The channel whose channel level is adjusted lowest can be faded to –12 dB using the fader function.

• If the channel levels are adjusted separately after adjusting the fader, the fader adjustment values are cleared, so adjust the fader again.

39

Basic Operation

FUNCTION

TU

BAND

TUNING

MODE

TUNER

Basic Operation

Listening to the radio

Check that the remote control unit is set to AMP or TUNER.

Auto tuning

1 Set the input source to “TUNER”.

(Main unit) (Remote control unit in the AMP mode)

2 Press the

TU

(TUNER) button to select the TUNER mode.


3 Watching the display, press the BAND button to select the desired band (AM, FM or XM).

When listening to the XM Satellite Radio ( page 42).

4 Press the mode.

MODE button to set the auto tuning

• “AUTO” indicator appears on the display.

5 Press the TUNING button.

• Automatic searching begins, then stops when a station is tuned in.

Manual tuning

1 Set the input source to “TUNER”.

2 Press the

TU

(TUNER) button to select the

TUNER mode.

3 Watching the display, press the BAND button to select the desired band (AM, FM or XM).

When listening to the XM Satellite Radio ( page 42).

4 Press the MODE button to set the manual tuning mode.

Check that the display’s “AUTO” indicator turns off.

5 Press the TUNING button to tune in the desired station.

The frequency changes continuously when the button is held in.

• If tuning does not stop at the desired station, use to the

“Manual tuning” operation.

• When in the auto tuning mode on the FM band, the “STEREO” indicator lights on the display when a stereo broadcast is tuned in. At open frequencies, the noise is muted and the “TUNED” and “STEREO” indicators turn off.

• When the manual tuning mode is set, FM stereo broadcasts are received in monaural and the “STEREO” indicator turns off.

40

Basic Operation

FUNCTION

TUNING PRESET CURSOR STATUS

TU

MEMORY BLOCK

BAND

CURSOR

CHANNEL

SHIFT

TUNING

MEMORY

ON SCREEN

TUNER

NUMBER

Preset memory

1 Use the “Auto tuning” or “Manual tuning” operation to tune in the station to be preset in the memory.

Basic Operation

Checking the preset stations

The preset (broadcast) stations can be checked on the on screen display.

2 Press the

TU

TUNER mode.


3 Press the MEMORY button.

Press the ON SCREEN button (in the AMP mode) repeatedly until the “Tuner Preset Stations” screen appears on the OSD.

4 Press the MEMORY BLOCK (A to G) button.

The memory block can also be selected by pressing the

SHIFT button.

5 Press the CHANNEL button or NUMBER (1 to 8) button to select the desired preset channel.

Recalling preset stations

2

Recalling preset stations from the remote control unit

1 Select the memory block (A to G).

6

Press the MEMORY button again.

• Store the station in the preset memory.

2 Watching the display, press the CHANNEL button or NUMBER (1 to 8) button to select the desired preset channel.

• To preset other channels, repeat steps 3 to 6.

A total of 56 broadcast stations can be preset — 8 stations

(channels 1 to 8) in each of blocks A to G.

2

Recalling preset stations from the main unit’s panel

1 Press the TUNING PRESET button.

2 Turn the FUNCTION knob and select the desired preset channel.

41

Basic Operation

XM Satellite Radio

AVR-4306 is the XM Ready® receiver. You can receive XM Satellite Radio® by connecting to the XM Connect-and-Play TM (sold separately) and subscribing the XM service.

2

Introducing XM Satellite Radio

There’s a world of audio listening pleasure beyond AM and FM.

XM Satellite Radio. Select from over 150 channels of music, news, sports, comedy, talk, and entertainment. Coast-to-coast coverage. Digital quality sound. With all music channels 100% commercial free.

Questions?: Visit www.xmradio.com.

1

Checking the XM signal strength and Radio ID

Set the input source to “TUNER”.

2

How to Subscribe

Listeners can subscribe by visiting XM on the Web at www.xmradio.com or by calling XM’s Listener Care at (800) 967-

2346.

Customers should have their Radio ID and credit card ready. The

Radio ID can be found by selecting channel 0 on the radio.

2

A Warning Against Reverse Engineering

It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, or manipulate any technology incorporated in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio system.

Furthermore, the AMBE® voice compression software included in this product is protected by intellectual property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital

Voice Systems, Inc. The user of this or any other software contained in an XM Radio is explicitly prohibited from attempting to copy, decompile, reverse engineer, or disassemble the object code, or in any other way convert the object code into human-readable form. The software is licensed solely for use within this product.

2

(Main unit)

Press the

TU

TUNER mode.

receiving condition.

(Remote control unit in the AMP mode)


3 Watching the display, press the select the XM mode.

BAND button to

4 Press the STATUS button on the main unit until

“SIGNAL” is displayed.

• The display changes as shown below according to the

Display

GOOD

Condition

Signal strength is good

MARGINAL Signal strength is marginal

WEAK

NO

Signal strength is poor

Loss of the signal

Hardware and required basic monthly subscription sold separately. Premium Channel available at additional monthly cost.

Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a onetime activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only.

All fees and programming subject to change. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at xmradio.com.

Only available in the 48 contiguous United States. ©2005 XM

Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

5

6

7

Adjust the antenna location until

“SIGNAL:GOOD” is displayed.

Press the

(ex.XM001) is displayed.

Press the

(XM000).

STATUS button until the XM channel

TUNING ª

• The Radio ID is displayed.

button to select channel 0

Channel selection

1

Set the input source to “TUNER”.

2 Press the TU (TUNER) button to select the

TUNER mode.

3

Watching the display, press the select the XM mode.

BAND button to

Channel number

X M 0 4 0 D e e p T r k s Channel name

Song title/Artist name

4 Press the TUNING • desired channel.

or ª button to reach the

The channel changes continuously when you press and hold the TUNING button.

When the artist name and song title are received, they are displayed.

Category search

1

Press the CURSOR F

or G button in the XM

mode.

• The current category name is displayed.

X M 0 4 0 D e e p T r k s

C A T E G O R Y S E A R C H


C A T : R o c k

Basic Operation

Channel Category

2 Press the CURSOR F category, and press the CURSOR D to select the channel within the selected category.

X M 0 0 0 R A D I O I D

Radio ID

42

Basic Operation

FUNCTION ENTER

SEARCH

NUMBER

STATUS

ENTER

Basic Operation

Direct access of channels

1 Press the SEARCH button in the

XM mode.

2 Press the channel.

NUMBER buttons to enter the desired

For example, if you want to access channel 123 (ex.XM123) press the Number buttons as shown below.

• “LOADING” is displayed while receiving the channel or information.


L O A D I N G

• “UPDATING” is displayed while updating encryption code.

X M 0 0 1

D I R E C T S E A R C H


U P D A T I N G

• When the selected channel is not available, “XM– – –” is displayed.

X M - - -

X M 0 1 2


X M 1 2 3



3 Once all number have been input, press the

ENTER button to change the channel.

If the next NUMBER button is not pressed within several seconds, the channel automatically switches to the channel number that was input.

• Information on the artist name, song title, category and signal level can be checked using the STATUS button on the main unit.

• The XM Satellite Radio channels can be preset in the same way as AM/FM band.

Please refer to “Preset memory” and “Recalling preset stations” ( page 41).

AUX

43

Basic Operation

Playing the iPod

®

Music stored on an iPod can be played when the iPod is connected to the AVR-4306’s iPod connector. The iPod can be controlled using the buttons on the main unit and the remote control unit.

iPod is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.

With the iPod, non-copyrighted contents and contents that may be legally reproduced or played may be reproduced and played by individuals for their personal use. Violating copyrights is prohibited by law.

Connecting the iPod

iPod

1 Connect the AVR-4306 and iPod using the iPod cable.

2 Select the input source to “AUX/iPod”.

• The iPod music menu screen is displayed.

(Main unit) (Remote control unit in the AMP mode) iPod

P l a y l i s t s

A r t i s t s

Display (iPod screen)

If the screens above are not displayed, the iPod may not be properly connected. Try connecting again.

NOTE:

• The AVR-4306 is equipped with two iPod connectors, one each on the front and rear panels. It is not possible to use the set with iPods connected to both the connectors at the same time. Only connect one iPod at a time.

• DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for loss or damage of data on an iPod occurring when the iPod is used connected to the AVR-4306.

• The maximum battery charge output from the iPod connector is 8 W.

• Connect the iPod cable (sold separately) directly to the iPod.

(To connect via an iPod Dock, see “Setting the iPod Assign”

( page 68)).

• Some of the functions may not operate, depending on the type of iPod and the software version.

44

Basic Operation

Basic Operation

FUNCTION

TU

MODE

CURSOR

FUNCTION

ENTER

ON/STANDBY CURSOR

MEMORY

ENTER

Basic Operation

Listening to music

1 Press the or

CURSOR D or H button to select the music file you want to play, then press the ENTER

CURSOR G button.

screen.

2

Press the ENTER

• Playback starts.

or CURSOR G button.

Pause:

Press the ENTER button during playback.

Press again to resume.

Manual search:

• D

• H

Track search:

• D

• H

Stop:

Press the ENTER button for at least 2 seconds during playback.

Repeat play:

Press the TU (TUNER) button, then press the MODE button.

The mode switches as follows each time the MODE button is pressed.

• RPT One: Single track repeat

• RPT ALL: All track repeat

Shuffle play:

Press the TU (TUNER) button, then press the MEMORY button.

The mode switches as follows each time the MEMORY button is pressed.

• SFL Songs : Single track shuffle

• SFL Albums: Album shuffle

The mode switches between the Browse mode and the

Remote mode if the MODE button is pressed for at least 2 seconds after pressing the TU (TUNER) button.

In the Remote mode, only the CURSOR buttons and the

ENTER button can be used.

• When the STATUS button is pressed during playback, the front panel display switches between the title name, artist name and album name.

pressed for more than two seconds while in the Remote mode.

When the backlight is on, it can be turned off by pressing the

• Depending on the iPod’s software version, it may not be possible to operate the iPod from the AVR-4306. Use the latest version of the software. Information on the latest version of the software can be obtained on the Apple Computer website.

• If you do not want the OSD to be displayed while playing the iPod, set “Function/Mode Status” at “Setting the On Screen

Display” to “OFF” ( page 73).

• With the AVR-4306 it is possible to display folder names and file names on the screen like titles. The AVR-4306 can display up to

64 characters, consisting of numbers, capital letters and small letters. A “?” mark is displayed in place of non-compatible characters.

Viewing still pictures (only for iPods equipped with the slideshow function)

Use this procedure to view photo data stored on the iPod on a TV monitor.

1 Press the TU (TUNER) button, then press the

MODE button for at least 2 seconds to switch from the Browse mode to the Remote mode.

• “Remote iPod” is displayed on the AVR-4306’s display.

2 Watching the iPod’s screen, press the or H button to select “Photos”, then press the

ENTER or CURSOR G button.

• The iPod’s photo data is displayed on the TV monitor.

Disconnecting the iPod

We recommend either pressing the ON/STANDBY button to set the AVR-4306’s power to the standby mode, or turning the FUNCTION knob on the AVR-

4306 or pressing the FUNCTION button on the remote control unit to set the input source to something other than “AUX/iPod”.

45

Basic Operation

Using the Network Audio Function

Basic Operation

2

Ethernet cable (CAT-5)

The AVR-4306 does not come with an Ethernet cable. Purchase one of the required length.

The AVR-4306 can be connected to a network by cable to listen to Internet radio or music files stored on computers.

Internet radio function System requirements

Internet radio refers to radio programs broadcast over the

Internet.

There are many stations throughout the world broadcasting

Internet radio programs. These stations are of all sizes and types, some run by individuals, others by ground wave broadcast stations.

While ground wave radio stations can only be listened to within the range in which the waves reach, Internet radio can be listened to anywhere in the world.

The AVR-4306 is equipped with the following Internet radio functions:

• Stations can be selected by genre and region.

• Up to 56 Internet radio stations can be preset.

• MP3 format Internet radio programs can be listened to.

• Your favorite radio stations can be registered by accessing the exclusive DENON Internet radio URL using a computer’s browser. (The AV amplifier automatically downloads the registration settings (approximately once every other day).)

(This is managed separately for each unit, so a MAC address or e-mail address must be registered.) ( page 81)

Exclusive URL : http://www.RadioDenon.com

The preparations described below must be made in order to use the Internet radio and music server functions.

2

Broadband Internet connection

A broadband connection to the Internet is necessary in order to use the AVR-4306’s Internet radio function.

NOTE:

• You must have a contract with an Internet Service

Provider (ISP) in order to connect to the Internet. For instructions on connecting to the Internet, contact your ISP or a computer store.

If you already have a broadband Internet connection there is no need to take out another contract.

2

Modem

A modem is a device for exchanging signals over the Internet using a broadband connection. Some are integrated into routers.

For instructions on connecting to the Internet, contact your ISP or a computer store.

2

vTuner

The AVR-4306’s Internet radio station list uses “vTuner”, a radio station database service. This database service is edited and prepared for the AVR-4306.

Music server function

The AVR-4306 is equipped with a network audio playback function allowing music files stored on a computer to be played via a LAN (Local Area Network).

The AVR-4306’s network audio playback function connects to servers using the following technologies:

• Windows Media Connect

• The Designed to DLNA Guideline

• Windows Media DRM 10 (for network devices)

2

Router

A router is a device for connecting multiple pieces of equipment

(computers, the AVR-4306, etc.) to the Internet simultaneously.

When using the AVR-4306, we recommend a router equipped with the following functions:

• Built-in DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server.

Function for automatically assigning the device’s IP address on the LAN.

• Built-in 100BASE-TX switch

When connecting multiple devices, it is recommended to have a built-in switching hub with a speed of 100 Mbps or greater.

NOTE:

• The type of router that can be used differs for different

ISPs. For details, contact your ISP or a computer store.

2

Personal Computer

Install “Windows Media Connect” on your computer.

The required system for forming a music server is as described below.

1) OS (Operating System):

Windows® XP Service pack2

2) Processor:

Intel Pentium II or AMD processor, etc..

We recommend 1 GHz or greater.

3) RAM:

Min. 128 MB, we recommend 256 MB or greater.

4) Software:

.NET Framework 1.1

5) Internet browser:

Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.01 or later

• LAN port required

• 300 MB or greater free hard disc space required

Extra free space is necessary to store music files.

The following table gives an approximate estimate of the required free space.

Format

MP3 / WMA

WAV (LPCM)

Bit rate

0 128 kbps

0 192 kbps

0 256 kbps

0 392 kbps

1400 kbps

Per one minute

0.

1 MB

1.5 MB

0.

2 MB

0.

3 MB

.

10 MB

Per one hour

0 60 MB

0 90 MB

120 MB

180 MB

600 MB

2

Others

• When the contract with your provider is of the type by which the network settings are made manually, you must make the

“Network Setup” ( page 80, 81).

• The AVR-4306 is not compatible with PPPoE. If your contract is of the PPPoE setting type, you need a PPPoE-compatible router.

• For some ISPs (Internet Service Providers), you may have to make proxy server settings in order to use the Internet radio function. If proxy server settings for connecting to the Internet have been made on the computer, make the same settings on the AVR-4306.

• The AVR-4306 is designed to make the network settings automatically using the DHCP and Auto IP functions.

46

Basic Operation

FUNCTION CURSOR ENTER

2

DTU (Digital tuner) system buttons

The digital tuner system buttons shown on the diagram below are used for Network Audio operations.

Basic Operation

2

Connections

Connect one side of the Ethernet cable (CAT-5) to the ETHERNET terminal on the AVR-4306’s rear panel, the other side to the router.

Listening to Internet radio

The required system connections and settings must be made in order to listen to Internet radio.

“Update?” appears on the display when connecting to an

Internet radio station for the first time.

1 Select the input source to “AUX/Net”.

• The “Network Audio” menu screen appears.

Internet radio (Main unit) (Remote control unit in the AMP mode)

A ~ G

• , ª

MODE

MEMO

: Preset memory blocks

: Character search

: Configuration mode selection

: Preset and favorite registration

• , ª , 0 , 1 : Cursor up, down, left and right

ENTER

CH +, –

1 ~ 8

: Enter settings

: Preset channel selection

: Preset numbers

Modem

To WAN side

To LAN side port

To LAN side port


“Internet Radio”, then press the


ENTER or

• The initial screen when not connected to the Internet is displayed.

Router

LAN port/Ethernet port

Computer

2

Network settings

When using a broadband router (DHCP function), the network settings are made automatically, so there is no need to make the settings from the setup menu.

If the broadband router’s DHCP function is turned off, make the

“Network Setup” ( page 80, 81).

3 Connecting to an Internet radio station for the first time:

Press the ENTER or G button.

• The update screen appears.

47

Basic Operation

4 Press the again.

ENTER or CURSOR G button once

• The latest list of radio stations is downloaded from the vTuner site. (Several minutes are required for this download.)

5 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the desired setting item, then press the


ENTER or

Presetting (registering) Internet radio stations

Basic Operation

Registering Internet radio stations in your favorites

There are two ways to register stations: by presetting them or by storing them in your favorites.

Stations that are preset can be tuned in directly from the remote control unit.

1 Press the MEMORY button while playing the

Internet radio station you want to register.

• The registration menu screen appears.

Your favorites are listed at the top of the menu screen, so registered stations can be tuned in easily.

1 Press the MEMORY button while playing the

Internet radio station you want to register.

• The registration menu screen appears.

Finally, the list of Internet radio stations is displayed and those that can be played are indicated by the “

∗

” mark in front of them.


“Preset”, then press the ENTER or G button.

• The preset registration screen appears.

6 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the desired radio station, then press the ENTER or


• Connection starts, and the station starts playing once the buffer reaches “100%”.

During playback, press the ENTER button once to pause playback, then press ENTER button again to resume playback.

If the ENTER button is pressed and held in for more than two seconds when in the play or pause mode, playback stops and the previous menu window reappears.

3 Press a MEMORY BLOCK (A ~ G) button, then press a NUMBER (1 ~ 8) button to register the station at the desired preset channel.

• This completes registration.

If no button is operated for approximately ten seconds, the regular display reappears.

Registered presettings can be checked on the on screen display.

The presettings can only be displayed with the on screen display when the “AUX/Net” function is selected.

NOTE:

• Registered presettings are deleted when they are overwritten.

• There are many Internet radio stations on the Internet. The programs they broadcast and their bit rates vary widely.

Generally, the higher the bit rate, the higher the sound quality, but streamed music or sound may be broken if the communication lines or servers are busy. Inversely, programs with low bit rates have lower sound quality but tend to be more stable.

• “Server Full” or “Connection Down” is displayed if the station is congested or if it is not broadcasting.

• If you do not want the OSD to be displayed while playing

Network Audio (internet radio, music server or USB), set

“Function/Mode Status” at “Setting the On Screen Display” to

“OFF” ( page 73).

2

Listening to preset Internet radio stations

When the “AUX/Net” function is selected, press a

MEMORY BLOCK (A ~ G) button, then press a

NUMBER (1 ~ 8) button.

• The connection is made automatically and playback starts.

48

2 Press the

“Favorites”, then press the

G button.


ENTER or CURSOR

• The favorites registration screen appears.

3 Press the station.

CURSOR F button to register the

2

Listening to Internet radio stations registered in your favorites

1 When the “AUX/Net” function is selected, press the CURSOR D or H button to select “Favorites”, then press the ENTER or G button.

• The Internet radio stations registered in your favorites are displayed.

2 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the desired radio station, then press the


ENTER or

• Playback starts.

Basic Operation

FUNCTION CURSOR ENTER

Character search function (searching by first letter)

The character search function (searching by first letter) can be used to select the desired item from the menu screen displaying the list of Internet radio stations or music files stored on the computer.

1 While the menu screen is displayed, press the

TUNING

•

or

ª

button.

• The character search screen appears.

Basic Operation

3

-1

When “Automatic Update” is selected:

Press the ENTER or CURSOR G button to select

“Yes”.

• The list of radio stations is updated approximately once every other day.

3

-2

When “Manual Update” is selected:

Press the ENTER or G button.

• The list of radio stations is updated this one time.

CURSOR

TUNING

MEMORY

MODE

ENTER

AUX

2

Deleting radio stations from your favorites

1 At the screen on which the Internet radio stations registered in your favorites are displayed, press the CURSOR D or H button to choose the radio station you want to delete, then press the MEMORY button.

• The delete screen appears.

2 Press the TUNING

•

or

ª

button to select the first letter of the item you want to search for.

• After several seconds, the menu screen is displayed with the cursor set to the item starting with the letter selected in step 2.

If there is more than one item starting with the letter selected in step 2, the items are displayed in alphabetical order.

Updating the list of radio stations

1 Press the MODE button to select the configuration mode, then press the ENTER or


• The settings screen appears.

• When “Yes” is set for “Automatic Update”, set “Power

Saving” in the “Network Setup” to “OFF”( page 81).

When used with “Power Saving” set to “ON”, we recommend performing the “Manual Update” procedure periodically (about once a week).

Playing music files stored on the computer

(music server)

The necessary system connections and settings must be made in order to play music files.

This procedure is used to play music files (in WMA, MP3 and

WAV format) stored on computers (music servers) connected to the AVR-4306 via the network.

The computer’s server program must be launched before using this function. For details, refer to the server program’s operating instructions.

1

Select the input source to “AUX/Net”.

• The “Network Audio” menu screen appears.

(Main unit) (Remote control unit in the AMP mode)

2 Press the CURSOR F button to delete the station.


“Automatic Update” or “Manual Update”, then press the ENTER or G button.

• The update screen appears.

Select “Radio List Version” to display the current version.

49

The host names of the computer(s) (music server(s)) on the network are displayed.

Basic Operation

2

3

4

Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the host name of the computer (music server) on which the music file you want to play is located, then press the ENTER or G button.

Press the of them.

CURSOR D or H button to select the search item or the desired folder, then press the

ENTER or CURSOR G button.

Playable music files are indicated by the “

∗

” mark in front

Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the music file, then press the ENTER or CURSOR G button.

• Connection starts, and playback starts once the buffer reaches “100%”.

During playback, press the ENTER button once to pause playback, then press the ENTER button again to resume playback.

If the ENTER button is pressed and held in for more than 2 seconds when in the play or pause mode, playback stops and the previous menu screen reappears.

2

Playing music files that have been preset or registered in your favorites

The same operations as for Internet radio stations can be used to preset music files or register them in your favorites and play them.

NOTE:

• Registered presettings are deleted when they are overwritten.

• When the operations describe below are performed, the music server database is updated and it may no longer be possible to play the music files that have been preset or registered in your favorites:

• When the music server is stopped and restarted.

• When music files are deleted from or added to the music server.

• When using an ESCIENT server, place “ESCIENT” before the server name.

Basic Operation

Operating the AVR-4306 using a browser

Internet Explorer can be used on the computer connected to the

AVR-4306 over the network to operate the AVR-4306.

Check the AVR-4306’s IP address ( page 80) beforehand and input this IP address in Internet Explorer to display the AVR-

4306’s control panel.

Operate in the same way as with normal Internet browsing to control the AVR-4306.

Playing the USB (mass storage) device

Music files (WMA, MP3 and WAV) stored on a USB device can be played by connecting the USB device to the AVR-4306.

An operation method is the same as “Playing music files stored on the computer (music server)”.

REPEAT MODE:

When the MODE button is pressed while playing a USB device, the repeat mode switches as shown below.

ONE ALL OFF

USB device

USB

• AVR-4306 corresponds to playing the USB device of mass storage class.

• Compatible with USB devices in FAT16 or FAT32 format.

• If the USB device is divided into multiple partitions, only the files on the drive with the lowest drive number on that partition are selected.

• The AVR-4306 is compatible with the “MPEG-1 Audio Layer 3” standards (sampling frequency of 32, 44.1 or 48 kHz). It is not compatible with such other standards as “MPEG-2 Audio Layer

3”, “MPEG-2.5 Audio Layer 3”, MP1, MP2, etc. WMA

(Windows Media) files recorded with a sampling frequency (fs) of 32, 44.1, and 48 kHz are supported.

• Applicable bit rates: 32 to 320 kbps for MP3 files, 48 to 192 kbps for WMA (Windows Media) files.

• With the AVR-4306 it is possible to display folder names and file names on the screen like titles. The AVR-4306 can display up to

95 characters, consisting of numbers, capital letters and small letters. A “?” mark is displayed in place of non-compatible characters.

• With the AVR-4306, only music files that are not copyright protected* can be played.

*: Contents downloaded from pay distribution sites on the

Internet are copyright protected. Also, when CDs or other media are ripped on a computer and encoded in WMA format, they may be copyright protected, depending on the computer’s settings.

• When the STATUS button is pressed during playback, the front panel display switches between the title name, artist name and album name.

• The MP3 ID3-Tag (Ver. 2) function is compatible with title and artist names.

• The WMA meta tag function is compatible with title, artist and album names.

• The audio signals are not output from the digital output terminal.

RANDOM MODE:

When the MEMORY button is pressed, the random mode switches as shown below.

ON OFF

When the SEARCH button is pressed while a USB device or folder is selected, playback of all the files on the USB device or in the folder begins.

NOTE:

• DENON will accept no responsibility whatsoever for loss or damage of data occurring on a USB device when the USB device is used connected to the AVR-4306.

• USB devices does not operate when connected via a USB hub.

• Please note that operation of and power supply to all USB devices is not guaranteed.

• It is not possible to connect the AVR-4306 to a computer using a USB cable.

• The AVR-4306 is not compatible with iPod shuffle.

50

Select “ZONE3” mode.




MODE

SELECTOR

Example:

Select “AMP” mode.

AMP/LAST

Operating DENON audio components

1 Press the MODE SELECTOR buttons to select the component you want to operate.

• The icon for the selected mode flashes.

: AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3 or SYSTEM CALL

: TUNER

: DIGITAL TUNER

: SATELLITE or CABLE

: CD or CDR

: DVD or DVDR

: VCR or TAPE

: TV

This function switches as shown below each time one of the AMP button is pressed.

Select “ZONE2” mode.

51

Select “SYSTEM CALL” mode.

2 Operate the audio component.

For details, refer to the component’s operating instructions.

It may not be possible to operate some models.

• When a remote control code is sent, the icon for the mode of the device to which that code belongs flashes.

• When the AMP/LAST button is pressed, it is possible to switch between the AMP mode (AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3 or SYSTEM

CALL) and the last selected non-amplifier universal mode (TU,

DTU, SAT/CBL, CD, DVD, VCR or TV).

Default state is to toggle AMP to SAT/CBL mode.


1. CD player (CD), CD recorder (CDR) system buttons 2. Tape deck (TAPE) system buttons 3. Tuner system buttons


6 , 7 : Manual search (forward and reverse)

2

1

: Stop

: Play

8 , 9 : Auto search (to beginning of track)

3 : Pause

0 ~ 9, +10 : Number

Default setting = CD

The preset codes of a CDR can be recorded in the CD mode so that the CD recorder can be operated ( page 53).

It is only possible to set the preset memory for either the CD or CDR.

To operate a DENON CDR player, preset “30626” or

“31868”. To return to operation of a DENON CD player, preset “31867”.

6

,

7

: Manual search (forward and reverse)

2

1

: Stop

: Play

8

,

9

: Auto search (to beginning of track)

3

: Pause

0 ~ 9, +10 : Number

Default setting = VCR ( page 55)

The preset codes of a TAPE can be recorded in the VCR mode so that the tape deck can be operated ( page 53).

It is only possible to set the preset memory for either the

VCR or TAPE.

To operate a DENON TAPE, preset “21471”.

52

• , ª

BAND

MODE

MEMO

SRCH

SFT

CH +, –

A ~ G

1 ~ 8

SRCH

0 ~ 9

: Tuning up/down

: Switch between AM, FM and XM bands

: Switch between AUTO and MANUAL

: Preset memory

: Search

: Switch preset channel range

: Preset channel up/down

: Preset channel range

: Preset channel

: XM channel direct search

: XM channel


MODE SELECTOR

IR segment 3 Referring to the included List of Preset Codes

( End of this manual), press the

NUMBER button to input the preset code (a 5-digit number) for the manufacturer of the component whose signals you want to store in the memory.

• The top IR segment blinks once after each button press.

• If the remote recognizes the manufacturer’s code, the

IR segment blinks twice.

You have 10 seconds to press each digit. If it takes longer than that, the remote “times out” and you must begin again.


Operating a component stored in the preset memory

1 Press the MODE SELECTOR button for the component you want to operate.

Operate the component.

2

For details, refer to the component’s operating instructions.

Some models cannot be operated with this remote control unit.

NOTE:

• Depending on the model and year of manufacture, this function cannot be used for some models, even if the your device is listed on the included list of preset codes.

• Some manufacturers use more than one type of remote control code. Refer to the included list of preset codes to change the number and check it out.

NUMBER

SETUP

Preset memory

The included remote control unit (RC-1024) can be used to operate devices of different brands by registering the preset number corresponding to the brand of your device.

For some models the remote control unit or the device may not operate properly. In this case, use the learning function ( page 56) to store your device’s remote control signals in the included remote control unit.

1

2

Press the MODE SELECTOR component you want to preset.

button for the

Presetting is not possible for the AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3,

TUNER and SYSTEM CALL modes.

Press and hold the three seconds.

SETUP

• The top IR segment blinks twice.

button for at least

2

The preset codes are as follows upon shipment from the factory and after resetting:

• TV, VCR .........................................HITACHI

• CD, DVD ........................................DENON

• SAT ................................................RCA

DVD-555

DVD-755

DVD-900

DVD-910

DVD-955

DVD-1000

DVD-1200

DVD-1500

DVD-1710

DVD-1910

DVD-2200

DVD-2800

DVD-2800 II

DVD-2900

DVD preset codes

41470 (default)

DVD-2910

DVD-3800

DVD-3910

DVD-5900

DVD-5910

DVD-9000

DVM-715

DVM-1800

DVM-1805

DVM-1815

DVM-2815

DVM-4800

40490

DVD-800

DVD-1600

DVD-2000

DVD-2500

DVD-3000

DVD-3300

• For the DVD player remote control buttons, function names may differ according to manufacturer. Compare with the remote control operation of the various components.

53


1. DVD player (DVD), DVD recorder (DVDR) system buttons

2. Satellite (SAT) tuner, cable (CABLE) system buttons



2

1

: Stop

: Play

8 , 9 : Auto search (cue)

3 : Pause

Default setting = SAT

The preset codes of a CABLE can be recorded in the SAT/CBL mode so that the cable device can be operated.


SAT or CBL.

SRC ON : Power on

SRC OFF : Power off


2

1

: Stop

: Play


3

SETUP

MENU

• , ª, 0 , 1

: Pause

: Setup

: Menu

: Cursor up, down, left and right

ENTER

DISP

: Enter

: Display

CH +, – : Switch channels +, –

0 ~ 9, +10 : Number

Default setting = DVD

The preset codes of a DVDR can be recorded in the DVD mode so that the DVD recorder can be operated.


DVD or DVDR.

SRC ON : Power on

SRC OFF : Power off

SETUP

DISP

: Setup

: Guide

MENU

• , ª, 0 , 1

: Menu


ENTER

CH +, –

: Enter

: Switch channels +, –

0 ~ 9, +10 : Number

When there are codes usable for the preset device, those codes are sent when the buttons below are pressed. If not, by default the DVD codes are punched through. If the punch through setting is made after the preset memory is set, the codes are sent with priority.

54


3. Video deck (VCR) system buttons 4. Monitor TV (TV), system buttons


When there are codes usable for the preset device, those codes are sent when the buttons below are pressed. If not, by default the DVD codes are punched through. If the punch through setting is made after the preset memory is set, the codes are sent with priority.


2

1

: Stop

: Play

8 , 9 : Auto search (cue)

3 : Pause

SRC ON : Power on

SRC OFF : Power off


2

1

: Stop

: Play


3

SETUP

MENU

• , ª, 0 , 1

: Pause

: Setup

: Menu


ENTER

DISP

: Enter

: Guide

CH +, – : Switch channels +, –

0 ~ 9, +10 : Number

SRC ON : Power on

SRC OFF : Power off

SETUP

MENU

: Setup

: Menu

• , ª, 0

DISP

,

ENTER

CH +, –

1 : Cursor up, down, left and right

: Enter

: Guide

: Switch channels +, –

0 ~ 9, +10 : Number

TV/VCR : Switch between TV and video player

55


MODE SELECTOR

IR segment

AMP/LAST

NUMBER

SETUP

3 Press the MODE SELECTOR button for the component you want to learned.

Learning is not possible for the AMP, ZONE2, ZONE3 and

SYSTEM CALL modes.

4 Press the button that you wish to be learned.

• The display will go off and the unit will enter the learning standby mode.

If a button that cannot be “learned” is pressed, the IR segment lights and the learning setup mode is cancelled.

The AMP/LAST button cannot be “learned”.

5 Point the remote control units directly at each other and press and hold in the button on the other remote control unit which you want to

“learn”.

• The display turns on again and the IR segment blinks twice to indicate that the code is successfully captured.

Other remote control unit

Learning function

If an AV component is not a DENON product, or if it cannot be operated via codes provided in the AVR-4306 remote control’s internal preset memory, or if its codes cannot be successfully learned by the AVR-4306 remote control, then you should use the remote control that was supplied with that AV component to operate the component.

1 Press and hold the three seconds.

SETUP button for at least

• The IR segment blinks twice.

2 Press the 9, 7, 5 button (9

→

7

→

5) to select

Learning setup.

• The IR segment blinks twice, indicating the remote is in

Learning set up mode.

Other buttons can be “learned” by repeating steps 4 and 5.

The mode can be switched by pressing a MODE SELECTOR button.

If the IR segment displays one long flash, a leaning error has occurred. Try repeating this step again until a successful capture occurs.

6 Press and hold the SETUP button for at least three seconds to exit programming.

• To cancel the learning setup mode, press the SETUP button for at least three seconds.

• Do not try to learn anything to the SETUP button.

56



AMP

MODE SELECTOR

SYSTEM CALL

CHANNEL

IR segment

ON

NUMBER

SETUP

System call

The accessorius remote control unit is equipped with “system call” function allowing a series of remote control signals to be transmitted by pressing a single button.

This function can be used for example to turn on the amplifier’s power, select the input source, turn on the monitor or TV’s power, turn on the source component’s power and set the source to the play mode, all at the touch of a single button.

2

Storing system call signals

1 Press and hole the three seconds.




→

7

→

8) to select system call setting.



Punch through

Buttons used in the CD, DVD, and VCR modes can be assigned to the buttons which are not normally used in the TV and

SAT/CBL modes.

For example, when the DVD mode is set to the punch through mode in the TV mode, the DVD mode’s PLAY (1), STOP (2),

MANUAL SEARCH (6, 7), AUTO SEARCH (8, 9) and PAUSE (3) button’s signals are sent in the TV mode. — ( )

1 Press and hole the SET UP button for at least

3 Press the SYSTEM CALL button (1 to 3) you want to register the system call.

4 Press the button you want to register.

• The IR segment blinks once after each button press.

The mode can be switched by pressing a MODE SELECTOR button.


→ → to select a

5

6

Repeat steps 4 to register the desired buttons.

Up to 32 signals each can be stored at the SYSTEM CALL 1

~ 3.

Press and hold the SETUP button for at least three seconds to register the system call.


NOTE:

• The remote control signals of the buttons pressed while registering the system call signals are emitted, so be careful not to operate the components accidentally (cover the remote sensors, for example).

2

System call buttons

• Up to 32 signals each can be stored at the SYSTEM CALL 1 ~ 3 buttons.

• The System Call function can be used in the SYSTEM CALL mode.

2

Using the system call function

1 Press the mode.

AMP button to select SYSTEM CALL

2 Press the SYSTEM CALL button (1 to 3) at which the system call signals have been stored.

• The stored signals are transmitted successively.

3 Select the MODE SELECTOR button (CD, DVD or VCR) you want to punch through.

4 Press the button you want to punch through (

2 , 6 , 7 , 8 , 9 or 3 ).

1 ,

5 Repeat step 4.

6 Press the MODE SELECTOR button (TV or

SAT/CBL) for which you want to set the punch through.




57


Setting the back light’s lighting time



→ → to select a

3 Press the NUMBER button (1 to 5) you want to adjust the lighting time (5 sec ~ 25 sec).

1 : 5 sec

2 : 10 sec (factory default)

3 : 15 sec

4 : 20 sec

5 : 25 sec

• The IR segment blinks twice as confirmation.

Setting the ambient light sensor

The included remote control unit (RC-1024) has the ambient light sensor which allows the EL display brightness to automatically adjust depending on how light or dark the amount of incandescent light in the room is. Default state of the ambient light sensor is “OFF” (disable).


2 Press the button (9


→ →

9).

to select a

3 Press the ON button.

• The IR segment blinks two or four times.

Two blinks indicates that ambient light feature was disabled, and is now enabled. Four blinks indicates that ambient light feature was enabled, and is now disabled.


Setting the brightness

• The brightness of the display can be adjusted in 5 levels.

• The default brightness setting is level 3 (level 5 = brightest).




2

-1

For 1 brightness step increase:

Press the CHANNEL + button.

2

-2

3

For 1 brightness step decrease:

Press the CHANNEL – button.

Press and hold the programming.

SETUP button to exit

• The IR segment twice as confirmation.

• If you want to set the brightness of the display manually, set to

“OFF” (default).

58


MODE SELECTOR

SYSTEM CALL

IR segment

NUMBER

SETUP

Resetting

2 Resetting the single learned button




→ →

6).

to select a

3 Press the MODE SELECTOR button.

4 Press the learned button you want to reset twice.


Other key can be deleted by repeating steps 1 to 4.

2 Resetting all learned buttons


2

3

Press the button (9


→ →

6).

to select a

Press the MODE SELECTOR button you want to reset twice.



2 Resetting the punch through setting

1 Press the SET UP button for at least






9, 8, 4 button (9

→

8

→

4) to select a


2 Resetting the system call buttons


4 Press and hold the SETUP button for at least three seconds to reset the punch through setting.




→ →

8).

to select a

3 Press the to reset.

SYSTEM CALL button (1 to 3) you want

4 Press and hold the SETUP button for at least three seconds to clear the system call.


2 All reset function



→

1).

to select a remote control unit to the factory default settings.

Only use this if you wish to clear all customized settings and memories and restore the unit to its out-of-the-box factory default settings.

59


Multi zone music entertainment system

• When the outputs of the “ZONE2 (ZONE3)” OUT terminals are wired and connected to power amplifiers installed in other rooms, different sources can be played in rooms other than the MAIN ZONE in which this unit and the playback devices are installed. (Refer to ZONE2 (ZONE3) on the diagram below.)

• Settings can be made at “Power Amp Assign” in the “System Setup Menu” so that the same source as the ZONE2 (ZONE3) preout terminals can be played from the speakers connected to the ZONE2 (ZONE3) speaker terminals ( page 76).

• When a sold separately room-to-room remote control unit (DENON RC-616, 617 or 618) is wired and connected between the MAIN

ZONE and ZONE2 (ZONE3), the remote-controllable devices in the MAIN ZONE can be controlled from ZONE2 (ZONE3) using the remote control unit.

To control playback devices other than the ones above, either use that device’s remote control unit or preset a separately sold programmable remote control unit.

• For instructions on installation and operation of separately sold devices, refer to the devices’ operating instructions.

Multi-zone playback using the ZONE2 and ZONE3 PREOUT terminals

2

When using the power amplifier as the MAIN ZONE output

• The AVR-4306 is equipped with pre-out terminals for which the volume is adjustable and video output terminals (composite and S-

Video) as the ZONE2 output terminals, and variable output level as the ZONE3 output terminals.

[System configuration and connections example]

Using external amplifier.

MAIN ZONE 7.1-channel system

Monitor

ZONE 2

Monitor

ZONE 3

FL FR

DVD player

C

AVR-4306

SW

Input

SL

RC-616

SB

L

SYSTEM REMOTE

CONTROL UNIT RC-1024

ZONE2 AUDIO OUT

(VARIABLE OUT)

SR

SB

R

ZONE2

VIDEO OUT

Power

Amplifer

B

PROGRAMMABLE

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

RC-617 RC-617

Power

Amplifer

B

PROGRAMMABLE

REMOTE

CONTROL UNIT

ZONE3 AUDIO OUT (VARIABLE OUT)

: MULTI SOURCE VIDEO signal cable

: MULTI SOURCE AUDIO signal cable

: ROOM-TO-ROOM REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM

(separately sold) control line

Refer to “Connections” ( page 22).

60



Multi-zone playback using the SPEAKER terminals

2

When using the SURROUND BACK amplifier as the ZONE2/ZONE3 output

• When the surround back’s power amplifier is assigned to the ZONE2 or ZONE3 output channel at “Power Amp Assign” in the

“System Setup Menu”, the surround back speaker terminals can be used as the ZONE2 or ZONE3 speaker out terminals (

76).

page


Using external amplifier as the ZONE2 and using this AVR-

4306 internal amplifier as the ZONE3.


Using external amplifier as the ZONE3 and using this AVR-

4306 internal amplifier as the ZONE2.

MAIN ZONE 5.1-channel systems

Monitor

MAIN ZONE 5.1-channel systems

Monitor

FL

B

DVD player

Input

C

AVR-4306

SL

ZONE2

RC-616

AUDIO OUT (VARIABLE OUT)

ZONE2

VIDEO OUT

FR

SW

SR

SYSTEM REMOTE


MULTI ZONE

SPEAKER OUT

FL

B

DVD player

Input

C

AVR-4306

FR

SW

SL SR

RC-616

MULTI ZONE

SPEAKER OUT

ZONE2 VIDEO OUT

SYSTEM REMOTE


ZONE3

AUDIO OUT (VARIABLE OUT)

Monitor

RC-617

B

Power Amplifier

PROGRAMMABLE

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

ZONE 2

RC-617

PROGRAMMABLE

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

ZONE 3

RC-617

Monitor

PROGRAMMABLE

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

ZONE 2

RC-617

B

Power Amplifier

PROGRAMMABLE

REMOTE CONTROL UNIT

ZONE 3


: MULTI SOURCE VIDEO signal cable

: MULTI SOURCE AUDIO signal cable

: ROOM-TO-ROOM REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM

(separately sold) control line

: SPEAKER cable

Refer to “Connections” ( page 23).

61


FUNCTION

ZONE2/3/REC SELECT

AMP

ZONE2 ON/OFF

CHANNEL

MUTING

ZONE3 ON/OFF

VOLUME

Outputting a program source to amplifier, etc., in the ZONE2 (or ZONE3) room

(ZONE2 or ZONE3 SELECT mode)


Remote control unit operations during multisource playback

1 Press the ZONE2/3/REC SELECT button to display the “ZONE2 SOURCE” or “ZONE3

SOURCE” on the display.

• If the “ZONE2 SOURCE” is selected, the MULTI indicator lights.

1 Select the zone which you want to operate pressing the AMP button.

2 Press the ZONE2 (ZONE3) ON button to turn on the zone power.

Press the OFF button to turn off the zone power.

The display switches as follows each time the button is pressed.

ZONE2

(RECOUT)

ZONE3

Select the input source you wish to output.

3

When the input source is set to TUNER, the preset channel can be selected using the CHANNEL + and – buttons on the remote control unit.

2 With “ZONE2 SOURCE” or “ZONE3

SOURCE” displayed, turn the FUNCTION knob to select the source you want to output appears on the display.

Start playing the source to be output.

3

For operating instructions, refer to the manuals of the respective components.

4 The volume of the outputs of the different zones can be adjusted with the VOLUME button on the remote control unit.

The output level can be controlled only if the zone volume level is set “variable” at “Volume Control” in the “System

Setup Menu” ( page 77).

DEFAULT VOLUME SETTING

ZONE2 : –40 dB

ZONE3 : –40 dB

The zone volume can be adjusted within the range of –70 to

18 dB, in steps of 1 dB.

• If and only if the digital signal being input from the digital input terminal (optical/coaxial) is a PCM signal, it is output from the

ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output terminals.

• When certain digital signals are being input, noise may be output from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output terminals.

• When “DENON LINK” is assigned at “Digital In Assign”, it is not possible to output the PCM signal and Network Audio signals (Internet radio, music server, USB) being input from the digital audio input terminal from the ZONE2 and ZONE3 audio output terminals ( page 67).

• The signals of the source selected in the ZONE2 mode are also output from the VCR-1, VCR-2 and CDR/TAPE recording output terminals.

• About the MULTI ZONE connections ( page 60, 61).

• Press the MUTING button to mute the audio temporarily.

The muting level is same as set with “Volume Control”.

• Cancelling muting mode:

Press the MUTING button again, or press the VOLUME button on the remote control unit.

62


Other function

POWER

FUNCTION

SURROUND MODE

ROOM EQ

Playing Super Audio CDs with DENON LINK

1 Select the input source to which DENON LINK was assigned at the “Digital In Assign” ( page

67) in the system setup.

Example: DVD


When playing DSD signals in the DIRECT or PURE DIRECT mode, the DSD signals are converted into analog signals.

When playing in other surround modes, the DSD signals are first converted into PCM signals. The input signal and playing status can be checked by pressing the ON SCREEN button on the remote control unit.

Example:

When DSD multi-channel signals are played in the DIRECT mode

NIGHT DIRECT/STEREO

ZONE2/3/REC SELECT

ROOM EQ

DVD


• The DENON LINK indicator lights.

lights

2 Select the surround mode.

Example: DIRECT

Example:

When DSD multi-channel signals are played in the 7CH

STEREO mode

SURROUND MODE

DIRECT/STEREO

ON SCREEN


3 Start playback on the selected component.

• The DSD indicator lights.

lights

For operating instructions, refer to the component’s manual.

“DSD DIRECT” is shown on the display when playing DSD

2-channel signals in the DIRECT mode. “DSD MULTI

DIRECT” is displayed when playing DSD multi-channel signals in the DIRECT mode (SB CH OUT “OFF”).

63


Multi-source recording / playback

2

Playing one source while recording another

(REC OUT mode)

1 Press the ZONE2/3/REC SELECT button until

“ZONE2 SOURCE” appears on the display.

2

3

With “ZONE2 SOURCE” displayed, turn the

FUNCTION knob until “RECOUT SOURCE” appears on the display.

• The REC indicator lights.

D V D

R E C O U T S O U R C E

The function switches as shown below when the FUNCTION knob is turned.

ZONE2 SOURCE ZONE2 TUNER ···· ZONE2 V.AUX

RECOUT V.AUX

RECOUT VCR-2 ···· RECOUT SOURCE

With “RECOUT SOURCE” displayed, turn the

FUNCTION knob to select the source you wish to record.

4 Set the recording mode.

For operating instructions, refer to the manual of the component on which you want to record.

Last function memory

• This unit is equipped with a last function memory which stores the input and output setting conditions as they were immediately before the power is switched off.

This function eliminates the need to perform complicated resetting when the power is switched on.

• The unit is also equipped with a back-up memory. This function provides approximately one week of memory storage from when the main unit’s power switch is off and with the power supply cord disconnected.


Initialization of the microprocessor

• In very rare instances, the AVR-4306 internal microprocessor might lock up, or otherwise cause mis-operation. This might be caused due to an AC line surge or line spike noise, or by static electric discharge on or nearby the unit, or to connected components. If the condition cannot be corrected by powering off the unit, including disconnection of the power supply cord for a period of ten minutes and subsequent re-connection, then the unit may have to be re-initialized. Doing so will restore the microprocessor to its original out-of-the-box state, with all custom memories and settings erased, and the original factory default settings restored. Only use this procedure if you are sure that the microprocessor requires re-initialization.

1 Switch off the unit using the main unit’s switch.

POWER

2 Hold the following ROOM EQ button and NIGHT button, and turn the main unit’s POWER switch on.

3 Check that the entire display is flashing with an interval of about 1 second, and release your fingers from the 2 buttons.

• The microprocessor will be initialized.

• If step 3 does not work, start over from step 1.

• If the microprocessor has been reset, all the settings are reset to the default values (the values set upon shipment from the factory).

• To cancel, turn the FUNCTION knob and select “SOURCE”.

• Recording sources other than digital inputs selected in the REC

OUT mode are also output from the ZONE2 preout terminals.

• If and only if the digital signal being input from the digital input terminal (optical/coaxial) is a PCM signal, it is output from the analog REC OUT terminals.

• When “DENON LINK” is assigned at “Digital In Assign”, it is not possible to output the PCM signal and Network Audio signals (Internet radio music server, USB) being input from the digital audio input terminal from the analog REC OUT terminals

( page 67).

• When the REC OUT mode is selected, the ZONE2 button on the remote control unit cannot be operated.

• Network Audio (Internet radio, music server or USB) signals are not output from the OPTICAL 3 OUT and OPTICAL 4 OUT terminals.

64



You can customize a variety of system setup so that it may be fitting for your listening environment.

For the contents of a system menu and the initial setting of this unit ( page 89 ~ 91).

Navigating through the System Setup Menu

You can change setting using the buttons on the front panel or remote control unit.

CURSOR D

CURSOR F ENTER

1 Press the unit.

AMP button on the remote control

2 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button to display

“System Setup Menu”.

Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the menu, then press the ENTER button.

SYSTEM SETUP CURSOR H CURSOR G

AMP

3 Press the menu.

ENTER button to enter the selected

4 To change a setting, first select it press the

CURSOR D or H button, and then change the setting press the CURSOR F or G button.

4

3

2

[ On screen display ]

5 Press the ENTER button to set the new settings.

6 Press the SYSTEM SETUP button to return

“System Setup Menu”, and again to return the main screen.

6

SYSTEM SETUP

CURSOR

F

CURSOR

CURSOR

ENTER

CURSOR

F

[ Display ]

* S y s t e m S e t u p

A u d i o I n S e t u p

* A u d i o I n S e t u p

D i g i t a l I n

* D i g i t a l I n

C D : C O A X 1


E x i t

65


On screen display and front display

The AVR-4306 is equipped with an intuitive and easy-to-understand on screen display, and is equipped with an alpha-numeric front panel display tube that can also be used to check and adjust settings. We recommend that you use the on screen display when you make system adjustments.

Some representative front panel and on screen display examples are shown below.

[ On screen display ]

Top menu

[ Front display ]

Top menu


A u t o S e t / R o o m E Q

No.

Screen title

Sub-menu title

Main menu

* A u d i o I n S e t u p

D i g i t a l I n

* A u t o S e t u p

S t a r t


S p e a k e r S e t u p

To select a menu, press

* D i g i t a l I n

C D : C O A X 1

No.

Screen title

Sub-menu title button to execute.

Currently selected line

Current setting

The settings are changed button.

Currently selected line


Main menu

* D i s t a n c e

M e t e r s : F e e t

Select either one pressing

R e n a m e D V D

D e f a u l t : Y e s to select “Default”.

66



Make the audio-related settings.

Setting the Digital In Assignment

This setting assigns the digital input terminals of the AVR-4306 for the different input sources.


“Audio Input Setup” at the “System Setup

Menu”, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Audio Input Setup” menu screen appears.

4

Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.

• The “Audio Input Setup” menu reappears.

2 Press the button.


“Digital In Assign”, then press the

• The “Digital In Assign” menu screen appears.

ENTER


“DLINK” setting, then press the

G button to select the input signal (ANALOG or

EXT. IN).


• The OPTICAL 3 and 4 terminals on the AVR-4306’s rear panel are equipped with an optical digital output terminal for recording digital audio signals to a CD recorder, MD recorder, or other digital audio recording deck. Use this for digital recording between a digital audio source (stereo – 2 channel) and a digital audio recorder.

• “PHONO” and “TUNER” cannot be selected on the “Digital In

Assign” screen.

• When “DENON LINK” is assigned, PCM signals and Network

Audio signals (Internet radio, music server or USB) input from the digital audio input terminal cannot be output from the analog REC OUT terminals or ZONE2 / ZONE3 audio output terminal ( page 60, 61 or 64).

• It is not possible to make the “Digital In Assign” settings for the function assigned at “iPod Assign”.

Select the input for the playback of signals that cannot be transferred by DENON LINK.

Setting the EXT. IN Setup

• Set the method of playback of the analog input signal connected to the EXT. IN (8CH) terminals.

• Refer to “Connecting the external inputs (EXT. IN) terminals”

( page 17).

2

Setting the DENON LINK

• When a DENON DVD player and the DENON LINK have been connected, be sure to make a setting to “DENON LINK” with

“Setting the Digital In Assignment”.

• When the input mode is AUTO and the signals are not be able to transferred by DENON LINK, the unit automatically changes over the input to the selected signals (ANALOG or EXT. IN ).

• Refer to “DENON LINK connections” ( page 19).

CURSOR F or

1 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select “EXT.

IN Setup” at the “Audio Input Setup” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “EXT. IN Setup” screen appears.

3 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the input source, then press the CURSOR F or G button to select the digital input terminal.

Select from among COAX 1 to 2, OPT 1 to 5.

If the same digital input terminal is selected, the setting for the input source that was previously assigned switches to

“OFF”.

The HDMI input terminal is displayed when it is assigned to the input source at “HDMI In Assign” ( page 71).

When “Yes” is selected for “Default”, the settings are automatically reset to the default values.

1 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the input source, then press the CURSOR F or G button to select “DLINK”.

2 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the item to be set, then press the CURSOR F or G button to select the parameter.

67


Surr. Sp:

Presets the surround speakers that are used in the EXT. IN mode. Select according to the specifications of the player being used. Also refer to the player’s operating instructions.

• Surr. A:

Select when using surround speakers A.

• Surr. B:

Select when using surround speakers B.

• Surr. A+B:

Select when using both surround speakers A and B.

SW Level:

Sets the playback level of the analog signal that was input to the EXT. IN subwoofer terminal.

Select according to the specifications of the player being used. Also refer to the player’s operating instructions.

+15dB (default) recommended. (0, +5, +10 and +15 can be selected.)

2 Press the CURSOR F or G button to select the input function to be assigned, then press the

ENTER button.

Aux:

This is the factory default setting.

Connection using a iPod Dock is not possible.

CD, CDR/TAPE:

When using a iPod Dock, it is possible to connect with the audio input terminal of the assigned function.

DVD, VDP, DBS, TV, VCR-1, VCR-2, V.Aux:

When using a iPod Dock, it is possible to connect with the audio and video input terminals of the assigned function.


Setting the Input Function Level

• Correct the playback level of the different input sources.

• Adjust the playback levels of the devices connected to the different input sources to the same level to eliminate the need for adjusting the main volume each time the input source is switched.


“Input Function Lev.” at the “Audio Input

Setup” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Input Function Lev.” screen appears.

3 button to enter the setting.

Setting the iPod Assignment

When connecting the iPod via a iPod Dock, it is possible to assign the iPod Dock’s audio and video signals to any input terminals on the AVR-4306 and play them.

1

Press the


iPod

Press the

ENTER

CURSOR D or H button to select “iPod

Assign” at the “Audio Input Setup” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “iPod Assign” screen appears.

AVR-4306

3 Press the CURSOR H button to select “iPod

Dock”, then press the CURSOR D or H button to select “NotUsed” or “Used” and press the ENTER button.

Example: When “CD” is selected for “iPod Function” and

“iPod Dock” is set to “Used”

NotUsed:

This is the factory default setting. Select this when not using a iPod Dock.

Connect the iPod cable directly to the iPod.

Used:

Select this when using a iPod Dock.

Connect the iPod Dock’s audio and video output connectors to the audio and video input terminals of the function set at

“iPod Function”.

“Aux1” is setting of “AUX/Net”, and “Aux2” is setting of

“AUX/iPod”.

2 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the input source, then press the button to adjust the level.

CURSOR F or G

The level can be adjusted between –12 dB and +12 dB in units of 1 dB.


3



• After completing this setting, check that the playback levels for the different sources are the same.

• When “AUX” is assigned to “iPod Function”, the mode switches between “AUX/Net” and “AUX/iPod” each time the

AUX button is pressed.

• When a function other than “AUX” is assigned to “iPod

Function” and “iPod Dock” is set to “NotUsed”, remote control operation is possible using the remote control codes of the assigned function.

68


Setting the Function Rename

The names of the input sources displayed on the front display and on the on screen display can be changed. The names or brands of the devices connected to the input sources can be input.

4 Repeat step 3 to input the input source name.

To reset the input source name to the default value, press

When “Yes” is selected for “Default”, then press the 1 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select

“Function Rename” at the “Audio Input Setup” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Function Rename” screen appears.


Tuner Presets

2

Auto Preset Memory

Use this to automatically search for FM broadcasts and store up to 56 stations at preset channels A1 to 8, B1 to 8, C1 to 8, D1 to

8, E1 to 8, F1 to 8 and G1 to 8.


“Tuner Presets” at the “Audio Input Setup” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Tuner Presets” screen appears.

2 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the input source whose name you want to change, then press the CURSOR F or G button.

• The screen switches to the character input screen.

5 Once all the characters have been input, press the ENTER button.

• The “Function Rename” screen reappears.

Use the same procedure to change other input source names as well.

6




Preset Memory”, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Auto Preset Memory” screen appears.

3 Press the CURSOR F or G button to move the cursor (

2 ) to the character, number, symbol or punctuation mark you wish to input, and press the CURSOR D or H button to select that character.

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9

! ” # % & ’ ( ) * + , – . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)

Up to 8 characters can be input.

• “Aux1” is setting of “AUX/Net”, and “Aux2” is setting of

“AUX/iPod”.

• When the input source is selected, the display is as shown below.

Example: When the name has been changed to “DVD-5910”

3 Press the CURSOR F button to select “Yes”.

• “Search” flashes on the screen and searching begins.

• “Completed” appears once searching is completed.

• The display automatically switches to the “Tuner

Presets” screen.

• If an FM station cannot be preset automatically due to poor reception, use the “Manual tuning” operation ( page 40) to tune in the station, then preset it using the manual “Preset memory” operation ( page 41).

69


2

Preset Skip

When selecting preset channels pressing the CHANNEL + or – button, it is possible to skip specific preset channels.

1 Press the

“Preset Skip” at the “Tuner Presets” screen, then press the


ENTER button.

• The “Preset Skip ”screen appears.

• Direct tuning is not possible when “Preset Skip” is set to

“OFF”.


4 Repeat step 3 to input the preset channel name.

To reset the preset channel name to the default value, press

2

Preset Name

It is possible to input station names , etc., for preset channels

(except the XM channel). These names are displayed on the front display and on the on screen display.


“Preset Name” at the “Tuner Presets” screen, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Preset Name” screen appears.

When “Yes” is selected for “Default”, the setting are automatically reset to the default name.

2 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the preset channel you want to skip, then press the

CURSOR F or G button to select “ON” or

“OFF”.

3 When the CURSOR H button is pressed at the very bottom of the screen.

• The screen for the next preset memory block appears.

2 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the preset channel whose name you want to change, then press the CURSOR F or G button.


5

Once all the characters have been input, press the ENTER

button.

• The “Preset Name” screen reappears.

Use the same procedure to change other input source names as well.

6 When the CURSOR H H button is pressed at the very bottom of the screen.

• The screen for the next preset memory block appears.

button is pressed

It is also possible to select the desired preset memory block button.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3.

5


• The “Tuner Presets” screen reappears.

3 Press the cursor ( 2

CURSOR F or G button to move the

) to the character, number, symbol or punctuation mark you wish to input, and press the CURSOR D or H button to select that character.

A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y

Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

! ” # % & ’ ( ) * + , – . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] (space)

Up to 8 characters can be input.

70

It is also possible to select the desired preset memory block button.

7


• The “Tuner Presets” screen reappears.

8 Press the ENTER button to enter the setting.


Advanced Setup – Part 1 Advanced Setup – Part 1

Video Setup

Make the video-related settings.

Setting the HDMI In Assignment

• This setting assigns the HDMI input terminals for different input sources.

• Set the method for playing the audio signals included in the

HDMI input signal.

4 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the method for playing the audio signals included in the HDMI input signal, then press the CURSOR

F or G button to select “AMP” or “TV”.


“Video Setup” at the “System Setup Menu”, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Video Setup” menu screen appears.

AMP:

Play the audio signals on speakers connected to the AVR-

4306.

TV:

Play the audio signals on a TV connected to the AVR-4306.

• If a monitor is connected with an HDMI cable but the monitor is not compatible with HDMI audio signal playback, only the video signals are output to the monitor from the AVR-4306 (DVI mode).

Press the STATUS button to check which mode is set for outputting HDMI signals from the AVR-4306 (HDMI and DVI modes).

• Audio signals input from the analog and digital terminals are not output to the TV.

• With HDMI, the video and audio signals are transferred simultaneously. When HDMI is assigned to an input source, the digital audio input assignment switches to HDMI along with the video input.

When this setting is made for input sources to which a digital audio input (DENON LINK, OPTICAL etc.) is previously assigned, the digital audio assignment is set to HDMI.

In this case, reassign the digital input using the procedure described at “Digital In Assign” ( page 67) .

• It is not possible to make the “HDMI In Assign” settings for the function assigned at “iPod Assign”.

2 Press the

“HDMI In Assign”, then press the button.


ENTER

• The “HDMI In Assign” screen appears.

5 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the input for the playback of signals when the audio signal of HDMI can not be reproduced, then press the CURSOR F or G button to select the input signal (ANALOG or EXT. IN).

Setting the Component In Assignment

This setting assigns the component video input terminal of the

AVR-4306 for the different input sources.


“Component In Assign” at the “Video Setup” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Component In Assign” screen appears.

3 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the input source, then press the CURSOR F or G button to select the input terminal.

Select from among HDMI1 to 3.

If the same HDMI input terminal is selected, the setting for the input source that was previously assigned switches to

“NONE”.

When the audio signal of HDMI has become unlocked, the unit automatically changes over to the set connector

(ANALOG or EXT. IN).

1~3 correspond to each HDMI 1~3 input terminal.

6


• The “Video Setup” menu reappears.

71


2 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the input source, then press the CURSOR F or G button to select the component video input terminal.

Select from among 1-RCA to 3-RCA.

If the same component video input terminal is selected, the setting for the input source that was previously assigned switches to “NONE”.

When “Yes” is selected for “Default”, the settings are reset to the default values.



Setting the Video Convert

Set whether or not to use the video conversion function.


“Video Convert” at the “Video Setup” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Video Convert” screen appears.

2 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the input source, then press the CURSOR F or G button to select “ON” or “OFF”.

ON:

The convert function operates.

When there are multiple input signals, the input signals are detected and the input signal to be output from the video monitor output terminal is selected automatically in the following order: component video, S-Video, composite video.


OFF:

The convert function does not operate.

The video signal input from the video input terminal is only output to the video monitor out terminal.

The S-Video signal input from the S-Video input terminal is only output to the S-Video monitor out terminal.

The component input signal input from the component input terminals is only output to the component monitor output terminals.

3



• Down-converting from the component video signal to the S-

Video and composite video signal is possible only when the resolution of a component video signal is 480i / 576i.

• When a non-standard video signal from a game machine or some other source is input, the video conversion function might not operate. If this happens, please set the conversion mode to OFF.

• When the video conversion function has been used, information such as that of text broadcasts which has been added to the video signal might not be output. If this happens, please set the conversion mode to OFF.

Setting the HDMI Out Setup

• Set whether to use the analog video signals to HDMI conversion function.

• When using this conversion function, set the color format and video range of the signals output from the HDMI terminal.


“HDMI Out Setup” at the “Video Setup” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “HDMI Out Setup” screen appears.

2 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the setting, then press the CURSOR F or G button to select the parameter.

Analog to HDMI Convert:

• ON:

Setting for converting analog video signals into HDMI signals.

• OFF:

Setting for not converting analog video signals into HDMI signals.

Aspect:

• FULL:

The video is output while maintaining the aspect ratio of the input video.

This mode is suited for playing back 16:9 video.

• NORMAL:

A black band is added to the left and right of the input video and the video is output.

This mode is suited for playing back 4:3 video.

Resolution:

• 480p/576p:

When the video signal being input is a video, S-Video or

480i/576i component video signal, the resolution is converted to 480p/576p and the signal is output from the HDMI

MONITOR OUT terminal.

• 1080i:


480i/576i/480p/576p component video signal, the resolution is converted to 1080i and the signal is output from the HDMI


• 720p:


480i/576i/480p/576p component video signal, the resolution is converted to 720p and the signal is output from the HDMI


• Through:

The video signal being input is output as such from the HDMI

MONITOR OUT terminal without being converted.

72


Color Space:

• Y Cb Cr:

The Y Cb Cr format video signals is output via the HDMI output connector.

• RGB:

The RGB format video signals is output via the HDMI output connector.

RGB Mode Setup:

• Normal:

Signals are output via the HDMI output connector with a digital RGB video range (data range) of 16 (black) to 235

(white).

• Enhanced:

Signals are output via the HDMI output connector with a digital RGB video range (data range) of 0 (black) to 255 (white).

When the HDMI connectors are connected, the black may seem to stand out, depending on the TV or the monitor. In this case, set this to “Enhanced”.

When “Y Cb Cr” is selected under “Color Space”, “RGB

Mode Setup” will have no effect.

The aspect ratio setting is valid when the resolution is set to

1080i or 720p. To output with other resolutions, set the aspect ratio on the TV.

When “Through” is set, the signal is output with the same resolution as input from the video, S-Video and component video terminals.

The OSD, however, is output with a resolution of 480i, so use a monitor compatible with this resolution.

3



Setting the Audio Delay

• When watching a DVD or other video source, the picture on the monitor may seem delayed with respect to the sound. In this case, adjust the audio delay to delay the sound and synchronize it with the picture.

• The audio delay setting is stored separately for each input source.

1

2

3

Press the

Press the


“Audio Delay” at the “Video Setup” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Audio Delay” screen appears.

Press the CURSOR F or G button to set the delay time (0 ms ~ 200 ms).

With a movie source, for example, adjust so that the movement of the actors’ lips is synchronized with the sound.

ENTER button to enter the setting.


• “Aspect”, “Resolution”, “Color Space” and “RGB Mode

Setup” are only displayed when “Analog to HDMI Convert” is set to “ON”.

• When connecting to an HDCP compatible monitor equipped with DVI-D terminal using an HDMI/DVI-D converter cable, the signals are output in RGB format, regardless of the “Color

Space” setting.

• To view the on screen display using an HDMI monitor, set

“Analog to HDMI Convert” at “HDMI Out Setup” to “ON”

(default).

• The audio delay setting does not apply when playing in the EXT.

IN mode or in the analog input direct mode or stereo mode

(Front speaker setting “Large”, TONE DEFEAT “ON” and

Room EQ “OFF”).

• By default, this menu is not displayed when no digital signals are being input.


Setting the On Screen Display (OSD)

• Use this to turn the on screen display (messages other than the menu screens) on or off.

• Sets the on screen display’s display mode.

1 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select “On

Screen Display” at the “Video Setup” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “On Screen Display” screen appears.

2 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the item to be set, then press the CURSOR F or G button to select the parameter.

Function/Mode Status:

Set whether or not to turn on the on screen display of the input source name and input mode when an input source is selected.signals.

Master Volume Status:

Set whether or not to turn on the on screen display of the main volume level when the main volume is operated.

Display Mode:

• Mode 1:

Flickering is not prevented.

• Mode 2:

Prevents flickering of the on screen display when there is no video signal.

Use this mode if the on screen display does not appear in the

Mode 1, as may happen according to the TV being used.

3



73



Makes more detailed audio playback settings.

Setting the 2ch Direct/Stereo

Set this when you want to change the speaker settings when the surround mode is set to the 2-channel Direct or Stereo mode.


“Advanced Playback” at the “System Setup

Menu”, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Advanced Playback” menu screen appears.

3 Press the

“Custom”.

CURSOR F or G button to select


Setting the Dolby Digital Setup

Sets the down-mixing method when not using a center speaker or surround speakers.


“Dolby Digital Setup” at the “Advanced

Playback” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Dolby Digital Setup” screen appears.

2 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select “2ch

Direct / Stereo”, then press the ENTER button.

• The “2ch Direct / Stereo” screen appears.

Example: This screen is displayed in function of the settings made at “Speaker Configuration”,

“Subwoofer Setup”, “Distance” and

“Crossover Frequency”

4 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the setting, then press the CURSOR F or G button to select the parameter.


• The “Advanced Playback” menu reappears.

2

Setting the front B speakers when the surround mode is set to the 2-channel Direct or Stereo

When “Front B” is selected at “Power Amp Assign” and

“Custom” is selected at this setting, the “Front B” setting is displayed.

To play signals from the Front B speaker when in the 2channel Direct or Stereo mode, set “Used”.

2 Press the CURSOR F or G button to select “ON” if you want to use the Compression, “OFF” if you do not want to use it.

ON:

The dynamic range is compressed automatically according to the combination of speakers being used.

OFF:

The dynamic range is not compressed.

Set “Compression” to “ON” if it seems that sound is distorted because the input level exceeds the allowable input for the front speakers.

When a center speaker or surround speakers are not connected, the sounds in those channels are directed to the front speakers.

3



74


Setting the Auto Surround Mode

The surround mode used at last for the four types of input signals shown below is stored in the memory, and the signal is automatically played with that surround mode the next time it is input.

Note that the surround mode setting is also stored separately for the different input sources.

q Analog and PCM 2-channel signals (STEREO) w 2-channel signals of Dolby Digital, DTS or other multichannel format (DOLBY PL II x Cinema) e Multi-channel signals of Dolby Digital, DTS or other multichannel format (DOLBY/DTS SURROUND) r PCM and DSD multi-channel signals other than Dolby

Digital and DTS (MULTI CH IN)

Default settings are indicated in ( ).

During playback in the PURE DIRECT mode, the surround mode does not change even if the input signal is changed.

Setting the Manual EQ Setup

Allows you to adjust the tonal quality of the various speakers

(except the subwoofer) while listening to a music source.


“Manual EQ Setup” at the “Advanced

Playback” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Manual EQ” screen appears.


Surround Mode” at the “Advanced Playback” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Auto Surround Mode” screen appears.

2 Press the CURSOR F or G button to select the adjustment mode, then press the ENTER button.

All CH:

All channels can be adjusted simultaneously.

L/R CH:

The left and right channels of the pair of speakers can be adjusted simultaneously.

Each CH:

The channels can be adjusted separately.

2 Press the CURSOR F or G button to select “ON” if you want to use the auto surround mode,

“OFF” if you do not want to use it.

3 Press the CURSOR F or G button to select the speaker to be set.


Example: When “L/R CH” is selected.

Advanced Setup – Part 1 w Select “Each CH”

FL FR C SLA SRA SLB

SBR SBL SR A+B

SB

1spkr

SL A+B SRB

When the surround back speaker setting is set to “1spkr” at

“Speaker Configuration”, this is set to “SB”.

e Select “All CH”

In this case, speaker selection is not performed.

If a value is already set for the FL channel, the data stored for the FL channel is displayed.

4 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the frequency, then press the CURSOR F or G button to adjust the gain level.

Each frequency can be adjusted the range from –20 dB to

+6 dB in 0.5 dB step.


• The “Manual EQ” screen reappears.


“Exit”, then press the ENTER button.


3



• The various settings applied in the auto surround mode can be checked via the on screen display. Simply press the ON

SCREEN button.

The display changes as follows.

q Select “L/R CH”

FL/FR

SBL/SBR

C

SL/SR A+B

SLA/SRA

SLB/SRB

• “Base Curve Copy” is displayed after performing the

Auto Setup.

• To restore the settings to their defaults, select “Default Yes

0 ”, then press the CURSOR F button.

75

Advanced Setup – Part 1 Advanced Setup – Part 1

Procedure for copying the “Flat” correction curve

1 Press the CURSOR D button to select “Base

Curve Copy”, then press the CURSOR F button.

Option Setup

Setting the Power Amplifier Assignment

If no Surround back speakers are used in the main room, their amplifier channels can be assigned for multi–zone use or the front speaker‘s bi-amp connection.


“Option Setup” at the “System Setup Menu”, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Option Setup” screen appears.

ZONE2:

This mode assigns the surround back amplifier channels to provide ZONE2 speaker-level outputs from the surround back speaker terminals.

ZONE3:

This mode assigns the surround back amplifier channels to provide ZONE3 speaker-level outputs from the surround back speaker terminals.


• The “Option Setup” menu reappears.

2 Press the CURSOR F button to select “Yes”.

Front Bi-Amp connections

Certain loudspeakers are equipped with two sets of input terminals, for bi-amplification. The AVR-4306 Amp Assign mode allows you to power bi-amp-capable speakers with two amplifier channels. Be sure to consult the owner’s manual of your bi-amp-capable speakers for further information before proceeding.

AVR-4306 3


• The “Manual EQ” screen reappears.


“Power Amp Assign”, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Power Amp Assign” screen appears.

The type of the copied correction curve is displayed in the upper right of this screen.

• If the “Auto Setup” procedure has not been performed, this item is not displayed.

3 Press the CURSOR F or G button to select which channel to assign the surround back power amplifier to.

S. Back:

The Surround back speakers are used in MAIN ZONE.

Front:

This provides a bi-amp mode for the two main front speakers, replicating the front left and front right amplifier channel’s outputs.

Front B:

Both surround back power amplifier channels can be used to provide a second set of stereo outputs that match the front left and right speakers, providing a Front B option for stereo sound in another location ( page 74).

SPEAKER

NOTE:

• When making bi-amp connections, be sure to remove the short-circuiting bar included with the speaker.

76


Setting the Volume Control

Set the upper limit for the volume, the volume level when the power is turned on, and the volume level when the mute mode is set for the different zones.


“Volume Control” at the “Option Setup” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Volume Control” screen appears.

2 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the desired setting, then press the button to select the parameter.

CURSOR F or G

Volume Limit:

Set the upper limit for the volume for the different zones.

• –20 dB, –10 dB, 0 dB:

The volume cannot be increased above the selected levels.

• OFF:

If you do not want to set a volume limit, select “OFF”.

In this case, the volume can be set to the AVR-4306’s maximum volume (output) level of +18 dB, which is extremely loud.

Power On Level:

Set the volume that is set when the power is turned on for the different zones.

You can adjust the MAIN ZONE volume level within the range of –80 dB to +18 dB and ZONE2 (or ZONE3) volume level within the range of –70 dB to +18 dB in steps of 1.0 dB.

• – – – (Mute)

The volume is always muted when the power is turned on.

• LAST

The volume set when the AVR-4306 was last used is stored in the memory and set when the power is turned on.

Mute Level:

Set the volume attenuation level when the mute mode is set for the different zones.

• FULL

The volume is fully muted.

• –40 dB

The volume is lowered 40 dB from the current level.

• –20 dB

The volume is lowered 20 dB from the current level.

Volume Level:

Set whether to fix the output level for the different zones or make it variable.

• Variable

The level can be adjusted freely using buttons on the remote control unit.

• –40 dB, 0 dB

The output level is fixed at the set level and the volume can no longer be adjusted.

3



• For ZONE2 and ZONE3, the “Volume Limit” and “Power On

Level” can be set when “Variable” is selected for “Volume

Level”.

• When the power amplifier is assigned to either of the ZONE2 and ZONE3 channels at “Power Amp Assign”, “–VAR–” (only variable) is displayed and the fixed level cannot be set.


Setting the Trigger Out

• Two 12 V DC Trigger Outputs on the rear panel can be used to control other devices with compatible trigger inputs, such as motorized screens, motorized screen masking, motorized drapes, and other trigger-controlled devices.

• Set the DC output supplied from the trigger out terminals for the various input sources to “ON” or “OFF”.

1 Press the

“Trigger Out” at the “Option Setup” menu, then press the


ENTER button.

• The “Trigger Out” screen appears.

2 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the trigger out terminal you want to set, then press the ENTER button.

• The setting screen appears.

Example: When “Trigger Out 1” is selected

“Aux1” is setting of “AUX/Net”, and “Aux2” is setting of

“AUX/iPod”.

3 Press the CURSOR F or G button to select the zone (MAIN ZONE, ZONE2 and ZONE3).

The power supplied from the trigger out terminal turns on and off when the power for the set zone is turned on and off.

77


4 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the input source, then press the CURSOR F or G button to select “ON” or “OFF”.

ON:

When that input source is selected, the power supplied from the trigger out terminal turns on.

OFF:

When that input source is selected, the power supplied from the trigger out terminal turns off.

5 When “MAIN” was selected at step 3:

Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the surround mode, then press the CURSOR F or G button to select “ON” or “OFF”.

Setting the Display

The brightness of the AVR-4306’s display can be adjusted in three steps.


“Display” at the “Option Setup” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Display” screen appears.


Setting the Remote Control

Set this when you want to select the Network Audio, USB and iPod functions directly from multi zone with the remote control unit.

When this setting is made, the remote control unit’s DTU mode’s

G1 to G8 normally used for Network Audio presetting are used, so they can no longer be used for Network Audio presetting.


“Remote Control” at the “Option Setup” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Remote Control” screen appears.

2 Press the brightness.


0: Normal (default setting)

1: Dim

2: Dark

3 (Display Off): Off

2 Press the CURSOR F or G button to select “Net

Audio / USB / iPod Control”.

ON:

If “ON” is selected when an input source set to “ON” is selected, the power supplied from the trigger out terminal turns on.

OFF:

If “OFF” is selected when an input source set to “ON” is selected, the power supplied from the trigger out terminal turns off.

6 Press the ENTER button.

• The “Trigger Out” screen reappears.

Use the same procedure to make the settings for Trigger

Out 2.




When “Yes” is selected for “Default”, the setting are automatically reset to the default values.



When “Net Audio/USB/iPod Control” is selected, DTU mode G1 to G8 cannot be used as Network Audio preset channels.



78


2

Operation on the remote control unit

1

Press the DTU button to select the DTU mode.

2 Press the G button, then press the corresponding

NUMBER button (1 ~ 8) within five seconds.

1: Switch the ZONE2 input function to “iPod” and start playback.

2: Switch the ZONE3 input function to “iPod” and start playback.

3: iPod playback/pause

4: Switch the ZONE2 input function to “USB” and start playback.

5: Switch the ZONE3 input function to “USB” and start playback.

6: Network Audio playback/pause

7: Set the ZONE2 input function to “AUX/Net”.

8: Set the ZONE3 input function to “AUX/Net”.

When no music file is selected, playback starts from the first music file.

Setting the iPod Charge

It is possible to charge your iPod while it is connected to the AVR-

4306. You can even set the AVR-4306 to charge your iPod while the AVR-4306 is in the standby mode.


Setup Lock

The system setup settings can be locked so that they cannot be changed easily.

1 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select “iPod

Charge” at the “Option Setup” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “iPod Charge” screen appears.


“Setup Lock” at the “Option Setup” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Setup Lock” screen appears.

2 Press the or

CURSOR D or H button to select the desired setting item, then press the F

G button to select “ON” or “OFF”.

Power On:

Set whether or not to charge the iPod when it is connected with the AVR-4306’s power on.

• ON : The iPod is charged.

• OFF : The iPod is not charged.

Standby:

Set whether or not to charge the iPod when it is connected with the AVR-4306’s power standby.

• ON : The iPod is charged.

• OFF : The iPod is not charged.

3



2 Press the CURSOR F button to select “ON”, to lock the system setup settings, then press the

ENTER button.


• When the setup lock function is activated, the settings listed below cannot be changed, and “SETUP LOCKED!” is displayed when related buttons are operated.

• System setup settings

• Surround parameter settings

• Tone control settings

• Channel level settings (including test tones)

• RoomEQ

• To unlock, press the SYSTEM SETUP button again and display the

“Setup Lock” screen, then select “OFF” and press the ENTER button.

• Depending on the connection status between the AVR-4306 and the iPod, the quality of the playback signals may be affected when playing audio or video signals during charging. If this happens, set the “iPod Charge” setting to “OFF”.

79


Network Setup

If you are using a broadband router (DHCP function), there is no need to make the settings at “Network Setup”, since the DHCP function is set to “ON” in the AVR-4306’s default settings.

If the AVR-4306 is being used connected to a network without the DHCP function, the network settings must be made. In this case, some knowledge of networks is required.


Setting the Proxy

Make this setting when connecting to the Internet via a proxy server.


“Proxy” at the “Network Setup” screen, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Proxy” screen appears.

Setting the IP Address

Set this when “OFF” is set for “DHCP”.

Set the IP address within the ranges shown below. The Network

Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses are set.


“Network Setup” at the “System Setup Menu”, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Network Setup” screen appears.

2 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select “IP

Address”, then press the ENTER button.

• The “IP Address” screen appears.

4 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the desired setting item, then press the G button and CURSOR D or H button to input the address.

IP Address:

Set the IP address within the ranges shown below. The

Network Audio function cannot be used if other IP addresses are set.

CLASS A: 10.0.0.0 ~ 10.255.255.255

CLASS B: 172.16.0.0 ~ 172.31.255.255

CLASS C: 192.168.0.0 ~ 192.168.255.255

Subnet Mask:

When connecting an xDSL modem or terminal adapter directly to the AVR-4306, input the subnet mask indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider. Normally input

255.255.255.0.

Gateway:

When connected to a gateway (router), input its IP address.

Primary DNS / Secondary DNS:

If there is only one DNS address indicated in the documentation supplied by your provider, input it at “e. 1st”.

If there are two or more DNS addresses, input the first one at

“f. 2nd”.


• The “IP Address” menu reappears.

2

3

Press the CURSOR F or G

• The proxy server is enabled.

Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the desired setting item, then press the button and CURSOR D or H button to input the character or number.

Proxy:

Input the proxy server domain name or address.

Port:

Input the proxy server port number.

button to select “ON”.

3 Press the

“OFF”.


• The DHCP function is disabled.

4


• The “Network Setup” menu reappears.

• DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol):

These are systems by which the IP address and other network settings are automatically set for the AVR-4306, computer, broadband router and network devices.

• DNS (Domain Name System):

This is a system for converting the domain names used when browsing Internet sites (for example, “www.jp”) into the IP addresses actually used for communications (for example,

“202.221.192.106”).

80


Setting the Network Option

When not using the AVR-4306 connected in a network, set “ON” to reduce the power consumption when in the standby mode.

2

Setting the PC Language

Select according to the language of the computer being used.

The languages are indicated with three letters conforming to

ISO639-2.

2

Setting the Power Saving


“Network Option” at the “Network Setup” screen, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Network Option” screen appears.

1 Press the CURSOR F or G button to select the

PC language.

2



2 Press the

“OFF”.


2

Setting the MAC Address

The AVR-4306’s MAC address is displayed.

The MAC address differs for each set.

Set “OFF” when using the AVR-4306 connected in a network.



81



This Speaker Setup section describes the procedures to make speaker settings manually (without using the Auto Setup function), as well as to make manual changes to settings that have already been made by the Auto Setup function.

Speaker Setup

• If the “Auto Setup” procedure has already been performed, there is no need to make this setting.

• Perform this setting if you wish to make the settings for your speaker systems manually.


3 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the speaker, then press the CURSOR F or G button to select the parameter.

Center Sp.

Front Sp.

Subwoofer

Surround Sp. A

Surround back Sp.

Surround Sp. B ENTER

Setting the type of speakers

The composition of the signals output to each channels and the frequency response are adjusted according to the combination of speakers actually being used.


“Speaker Setup” at the “System Setup Menu”, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Speaker Setup” menu screen appears.


• The “Speaker Setup” menu reappears.

SYSTEM SETUP CURSOR

SYSTEM SETUP

CURSOR

ENTER


“Speaker Config.”, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Speaker Config.” screen appears.

• Select “Large” or “Small” not according to the actual size of the speaker but according to the speaker’s capacity for playing low frequency (bass sound below the frequency set for the

Crossover Frequency) signals. If you do not know, try comparing the sound at both settings (setting the volume to a level low enough so as not to damage the speakers) to determine the proper setting.

2

Parameters

Large:

Select this when using speakers that can fully reproduce deep bass well below the frequency set for the Crossover Frequency mode.

Small:

Select this when using speakers that are not capable of handling deep bass well below the frequency set for the

Crossover Frequency mode. Deep bass content in any channel with a SMALL speaker is routed to the subwoofer(s).

None:

Select this when no speakers are installed.

Yes / No:

Select “Yes” when a subwoofer is installed, “No” when a subwoofer is not installed.

2spkrs / 1spkr:

Select the number of speakers to be used for the surround back channel.

82


A subwoofer with sufficient low frequency playback capability can better handle deep bass than most main and surround speakers, and the system’s overall performance will be greatly enhanced when SMALL is set for the main (front) and surround speakers.

When “Front” is set to “Small”, “Subwoofer” is automatically set to “Yes”, and when “Subwoofer” is set to “No”, “Front” is automatically set to “Large”.

2

Assignment of low frequency signal range

• The only signals produced from the subwoofer channel are

LFE signals (during playback of Dolby Digital or DTS signals) and the low frequency signal range of channels set to “Small” in the setup menu. The low frequency signal range of channels set to “Large” are produced from those channels.

Setting the low frequency distribution

• Set the subwoofer mode according to the speaker system being used.

• Select the play mode that provides bass reproduction with body.

2

Subwoofer Setup

• The subwoofer mode setting is only valid when and “Yes” is

( set for the subwoofer in the “Speaker Configuration” settings page 82).

• When the input signal is analog or a PCM signal not including

LFE signals, if “LFE” is selected, the low frequency component is not output from the subwoofer. To output the subwoofer channel, select “LFE+Main”.


“Subwoofer Setup” at the “Speaker Setup” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Subwoofer Setup” screen appears.

Setting the Distance

Input the distance between the listening position and the different speakers to set the delay time for the surround mode.


1 Press the

“Distance” at the “Speaker Setup” menu, then press the


ENTER button.

• The “Distance” screen appears.

2 Press the CURSOR F or G button to select the desired unit, “Meters” or “Feet”.

• The “Distance” screen appears automatically.

Example: When “Feet” is selected

Preparations:

Measure the distances between the listening position and the speakers (L1 to L10 on the diagram at the below).

FL C FR



LFE:

For any channel(s) that are set to LARGE, low frequencies in that channel’s corresponding source are directed to that loudspeaker only. Low frequencies that are directed to the subwoofer(s) are from the program source LFE channel, and from other channels where the speakers are set to SMALL.

LFE+Main:

Low frequencies from speaker channels that have been set to

LARGE are reproduced from those speakers as well as from the subwoofer(s). Depending upon the characteristics of the

LARGE main speakers, this mode may provide a more even low frequency response throughout the listening room.

3



SW

SLA

SLB

.... L1

.... L2

.... L3

.... L4

L4

L1 L3 L2

Listening position

L5

L7

L9

L6

L10

L8

SRA

SRB

SBL SBR

.... L5

.... L6

.... L7

.... L8

.... L9

.... L10

3 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the speaker to be set.

83


4 Press the CURSORF or G button to set the distance between the center speaker and listening position.

Example: When the distance is set to 10 feet for the center speaker

The distance changes in units of 1 foot (0.1 meters) or 0.1

foot (0.01 meters) each time the button is pressed. Select the value closest to the measured distance.

When “Step” is selected, you can select the unit of “1 ft

(0.1 m)” or “0.1 ft (0.01 m)”.


Please note that the difference of distance for every speaker should be 20 ft (6.0 m) or less. If you set an invalid distance, a CAUTION notice, such as screen right will appear. In this case, please relocate the blinking speaker(s) so that its distance is no larger than the value shown in highlighted line.

5



The AVR-4306 automatically sets the optimum surround delay time for the listening room.


Setting the Channel Level

• Use this setting to adjust so that the playback level between the different channels is equal.

• From the listening position, listen to the test tones produced from the speakers to adjust the level.


“Channel Level” at the “Speaker Setup” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Channel Level” screen appears.

Surr. Sp. : A

Adjusts the balance of the playback level between the channels when using surround speaker A.

Surr. Sp. : B

Adjusts the balance of the playback level between the channels when using surround speaker B.

Surr. Sp. : A + B

Adjusts the balance of the playback level between the channels when using surround speakers A and B at the same time.

The “Surr. Sp.” can only be selected when both surround speakers A and B have been selected at the System Setup

Menu (when both A and B have been set to “Large” or

“Small”).

4 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select “Test

Tone Start”, then press the F button to select “Yes”.

2 Press the CURSOR F or G button to select

“Auto” or “Manual”.

Auto:

Adjust the level while listening to the test tones produced automatically from each speaker.

Test tones are automatically emitted from each speaker.

Manual:

Select the speaker from which you want to produce the test tone to adjust the level.

Example: When the “Auto” mode is selected

3 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select “Surr.

Sp.”, then press the CURSOR F or G button to select the surround speaker(s) from which you want to produce the test tone (A, B or A+B).

5

-1

When “Auto” mode is selected:

Press the CURSOR F or G button to adjust all the speakers to the same volume.

• The test tones are emitted from each speaker in the following order, at 4-second intervals during the first and second time, and at the 2-second intervals during the third and subsequent cycles:

FL C

SW SL

FR SR

2spkrs

SBL SBR

SB

1spkr

When the surround back speaker setting is set to “1spkr” for “Speaker Configuration”, this is set to “SB”.

84


Example: When the volume is set to –11.5 dB while the test tone is being produced from the Front Lch speaker

The volume can be adjusted between –12 dB and +12 dB in units of 0.5 dB.

5

-2

When “Manual” mode is selected:

Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the speaker, then press the CURSOR F or G button to adjust all the speakers to the same volume.

Example: “Manual” mode is selected.

• When adjusting the level of an active subwoofer system, you may also need to adjust the subwoofer’s own volume control.

• When you adjust the channel levels while in the system setup channel level mode, the channel level adjustments mode will affect all surround modes. Consider this mode a master channel level adjustment mode.

• After you have completed the system setup channel level adjustments, you can then activate the individual surround modes and adjust channel levels that will be remembered for each of those modes. Then, whenever you activate a particular surround sound mode, your preferred channel level adjustments for just that mode will be recalled. Check the instructions for adjusting channel levels within each surround mode ( page 39).

• You can adjust the channel levels for each of the following surround modes: PURE DIRECT/DIRECT, STEREO,

DOLBY/DTS SURROUND, 7CH STEREO, WIDE SCREEN,

SUPER STADIUM, ROCK ARENA, JAZZ CLUB, CLASSIC

CONCERT, MONO MOVIE, VIDEO GAME, MATRIX and

VIRTUAL.

• When using either surround speakers A or B, or when using surround speakers A and B at the same time, be sure to adjust the balance of playback levels between each channel for the various selections of “A”, “B” and “A + B”.


Setting the Crossover Frequency

• Set the crossover frequency according to the low frequency response characteristics of the various (front, center, surround and surround back) speaker systems.

• If a connected main or surround loudspeaker has a specified –3 dB low frequency response rolloff, adjust the crossover frequency for that speaker to match the specified low frequency response limit – e.g. 80 Hz.

• When a speaker is set to “SMALL”, low frequencies in that channel that are below the crossover frequency are directed to the system’s subwoofer(s), or to speakers that are set to

“LARGE”, for systems with no connected subwoofer(s).


“Crossover Frequency” at the “Speaker Setup” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Crossover Frequency” screen appears.

6


• The “Channel Level” screen reappears.

2

Adjusting the test tone using the remote control unit

• As described below, this adjustment can be accomplished via the with remote control unit.

• Adjusting with the remote control unit using the test tones is only possible in the “Auto” mode and only effective in the

STANDARD (DOLBY/DTS SURROUND) mode. The adjusted levels for the different modes are automatically stored in the memory.

“Level Clear” and “Yes” on the “Channel Level” screen, then make the settings again.

1

Press the TEST TONE button.

• Test tones are output from the different speakers.

2 Press the CURSOR F or G button to adjust the channel level so that the volume of the test tones is the same for all the speakers.

2 Press the frequency.


40, 60, 80, 90, 100, 110, 120, 150, 200, 250 Hz:

Set as desired according to your speakers’ bass playback ability.

Advanced:

The crossover frequency can be set individually for the different speakers.

3



3 After completing the adjustment, press the

TONE button again.

TEST

85


• If “LFE+Main” is set at “Subwoofer Setup”, “SW:LFE+Main”

( page 83) is displayed at the top right of the screen.

• We recommend using with the crossover frequency set to

“80Hz”, but depending on the speaker, setting it to a different frequency may improve frequency response near the crossover frequency.

• The crossover frequency mode is valid only when subwoofer is set to “ON”, and when one or more speakers are set to

“SMALL”, as described in section “Speaker Configuration” settings ( page 82).

3 Press the frequency.



2 Press the CURSOR D surround mode, then press the CURSOR F button to select the surround speaker.

A:

When surround speakers A is used.

B:

When surround speakers B is used.

A + B:

When both surround speakers A and B are used.

4



3



• If “LFE” is selected at “Subwoofer Setup”, the frequencies can only be selected for speakers set to “Small” at “Speaker

Configuration”.

• For the “WIDE SCREEN” and “7CH STEREO” DSP simulation modes, the surround speakers can be set separately.

Setting the crossover frequency individually for the different channels

1 Press the CURSOR F or G button to select

“Advanced” at the “Crossover Frequency” screen.

2

About Speaker type setting when using both surround speakers A and B

• If “Small” is set for either surround speakers A or B, the output is the same as when “Small” is set for both A and B.

• If “LFE+Main” is set at “Subwoofer Setup”, the frequencies can be selected regardless of the speaker size setting.

2 Press the CURSOR D speaker to be set.

Selecting the Surround Speakers for the different surround modes

• This menu is displayed when both surround speakers A and B are used.

• At this screen preset the surround speakers to be used in each surround modes.


“Surround Sp Setup” at the “Speaker Setup” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Surround Sp Setup” screen appears.

86


Others Setup

Setting the Room EQ Setup

Select the setting of an Equalizer that has been set with Auto

Setup or Manual EQ.


“Room EQ Setup” at the “Auto Setup / Room

EQ” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Room EQ Setup” screen appears.

Front:

Adjusts the frequency response of the surround speakers to match the characteristics of the front channel speakers.

Flat:

Adjusts the frequency response of all speakers to the flattest response. This mode is suitable for multi-channel music surround sound sources.

Manual:

Selects the setting value that was set in the Manual EQ

Setup.

For details of the “Manual EQ Setup” ( page 75, 76).


Setting the Direct Mode Setup

Perform the ON/OFF setting of Room EQ when the surround mode is “DIRECT” or “PURE DIRECT”.


“Direct Mode Setup” at the “Auto Setup / Room


• The “Direct Mode Setup” screen appears.

2 Press the or “Assign”.

All:

Sets the Equalizer for all surround modes.

Assign:

Sets the Equalizer individually for each surround mode.

3

-1

CURSOR F

When “All” is selected:

ENTER button.

• The “Room EQ” screen appears.

CURSOR F equalizer setting.

OFF:

The Equalizer is not used.

Audyssey:

Adjusts the frequency response of all speakers to correct the effects of room acoustics.

3

-2

When “Assign” is selected:

After completing system setup, select the desired equalizer setting pressing the ROOM EQ button.

• Equalizer settings for the individual surround modes can be stored in the memory.

Whenever the ROOM EQ button is pressed, the display switches as shown below.

Front OFF Audyssey

Manual Flat

2

3

Press the or “OFF”.

Press the

CURSOR F

ENTER button to enter the setting.

• The “Auto Setup / Room EQ” menu reappears.

4



Setting the MIC Input Select

Sets whether the setup microphone is connected to the PIN

JACK (V.AUX L channel) connector or the MINI JACK (SETUP

MIC) connector.

• The Equalizer setting of “Audyssey”, “Front” and “Flat” can be selected after performing the Auto Setup.

• When the speaker set as “None” with the Auto Setup is changed to on manually, the equalizer of “Audyssey”, “Front” and “Flat” cannot be used.

• The Equalizer setting can be selected directly by ROOM EQ button.

• When headphones are connected, the Room EQ cannot be used.

1 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select “Mic

Input Select” at the “Auto Setup / Room EQ” menu, then press the ENTER button.

• The “Mic Input Select” screen appears.

87

2 Press the CURSOR F or “V.Aux L”.

3




Check the parameter

• The results of the measured items can be checked.

• The EQ parameters that were set in Auto Setup can be checked.

• This item is displayed, after the measurement result of the

“Auto Setup / Room EQ” is decided.


“Parameter Check” at the “Auto Setup / Room


• The “Parameter Check” screen appears.

4 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the

Equalizer curve, then press the ENTER button.

• The “EQ Check” screen appears.

The display is only an approximate picture of the response and that correction is happening at all frequencies.

2 Press the CURSOR D or H button to select the items, then press the ENTER button.

• The verification screen appears.

For instructions on checking the results of each item ( page 12, 13).

5 Press the CURSOR F speaker channel.

6 If the check ends, pressing the button.

CURSOR D or H button to select “Exit”, then press the ENTER

• The “EQ Parameter Check” screen reappears.

8


The results of the “Auto Setup” procedure can be reset even if the settings have been changed after performing the “Auto Setup” procedure:

Press the CURSOR D or H button to select

CURSOR F button.




3 Press the

Parameter Check”, then press the button.

CURSOR D or H button to select “EQ

ENTER

• The “EQ Parameter Check” screen appears.



• The “Parameter Check” screen reappears.

88


System setup items and default values (set upon shipment from the factory)

1.

Auto Setup/Room EQ

1 Auto Setup

Auto Setup / Room EQ

This unit performs an analysis of the speaker system and measures the acoustic characteristics of your room to permit an appropriate automatic setting.

2 Room EQ Setup Set the Room EQ setting with All or Assign for each surround mode.

3

Direct Mode

Setup

4 Mic Input Select

Set the ON/OFF setting of Room EQ, in the case of the surround mode is in “Direct” or “Pure Direct”.

Set this to switch the Mic Input jack for use for Mic or V.AUX L-channel input terminal.

Default settings

–

All, Room EQ = OFF

OFF

Mic

2.

Speaker Setup

1

Speaker

Configuration

Speaker Setup

Input the combination of speakers in your system and their corresponding sizes (SMALL for regular speakers, LARGE for full-size, full-range) to automatically set the composition of the signals output from the speakers and the frequency response.

Front Sp.

Large

Center Sp.

Small


Subwoofer

Surround Sp.

A / B

Yes Small

Surround Back

Sp.

Small / 2spkrs

Page

82

2

3

4

5

Subwoofer

Setup

Distance

Channel Level

Crossover

Frequency

6

Surround

Speaker Setup

This selects the subwoofer for playing deep bass signals.

This parameter is for optimizing the timing with which the audio signals are produced from the speakers and subwoofer according to the listening position.

This adjusts the volume of the signals output from the speakers and subwoofer for the different channels in order to obtain optimum effects.

LFE

Front

L & R

Center

12 ft (3.6 m) 12 ft (3.6 m)

Front L

0 dB

Front R

0 dB

Subwoofer

Center

0 dB

12 ft (3.6 m)

Surround

L

0 dB

Surround

L & R (A)

Surround

L & R (B)

10 ft (3.0 m)

Surround

R

0 dB

Surround

Back L

0 dB

10 ft (3.0 m)

Surround

Back R

0 dB

Surround

Back

10 ft (3.0 m)

Subwoofer

0 dB

80 Hz

Set the frequency (Hz) below which the bass sound of the various speakers is to be output from the subwoofer.

Use this function when using multiple surround speaker combinations for more ideal surround sound. Once the combinations of surround speakers to be used for the different surround modes are preset, the surround speakers are selected automatically according to the surround mode.

Surround mode

Surround speaker

DOLBY/

DTS CINEMA

DOLBY/

DTS MUSIC

A A

DOLBY

GAME

A

WIDE

SCREEN

A

7 CH

STEREO

A

DSP

SIMULATION

A

MULTI CH

MODE

A

83

83, 84

84, 85

85, 86

86

Page

9~13

87

87

87


89


3.


1 Digital In Assign

2

3

4

5

6

EXT.IN Setup iPod Assign

Input Function

Lev.

Function

Rename

Tuner Presets sources.


This assigns the digital input terminals for the different input

Set the Ext.In terminals playback method.

Input source

Digital

Inputs

CD

COAX 1

DVD

COAX 2

VDP

OPT 1


TV DBS VCR-1

OFF OPT 2 OPT 3

Surr.Sp = Surr.A

SW Level = +15dB

VCR-2

OFF

CDR /

TAPE

OPT 4

V.AUX

OPT 5

When connecting the iPod via a iPod Dock, it is possible to assign the iPod Dock’s audio and video signals to any input connectors on the AVR-

4306 and play them.

iPod Function = Aux iPod Dock = NotUsed

The playback level is corrected individually for the different input sources.

The names of the different input source can be changed as desired and displayed on the display.

Auto

Preset

Memory

FM stations are received automatically and stored in the memory.

TUNER PHONO CD

CDR /

TAPE

DVD VDP TV

0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB 0 dB

TUNER PHONO CD

CDR /

TAPE

DVD VDP TV

A1 ~ A8

B1 ~ B8

C1 ~ C8

D1 ~ D8

E1 ~ E8

F1 ~ F8

G1 ~ G8

DBS

0 dB

DBS

87.5/89.1/98.1/107.9/90.1/90.1/90.1/90.1 MHz

VCR-1

0 dB

VCR-1

520/600/1000/1400/1500/1710 kHz, 90.1/90.1 MHz

90.1 MHz

90.1 MHz

90.1 MHz

90.1 MHz

90.1 MHz

Preset

Skip

Preset

Name

Preset channels that are not used often can be skipped.

The preset channels can be given the names you want.

All preset channels = ON

–

VCR-2

0 dB

VCR-2

V.AUX

AUX1

0 dB 0 dB

V.AUX

AUX2

0 dB

AUX1 AUX2

Page

67

67, 68

68

68

69

69, 70

4.

Video Setup

Video Setup

1 HDMI In Assign

The HDMI input terminals are assigned for the different input sources.

Select the HDMI audio signal playback method.

2

3

Component In

Assign

Video Convert

4 HDMI Out Setup

5

6

Audio Delay

On Screen

Display

This assigns the component video input terminals for the different input sources.

This sets whether or not to use the video conversion function.

This sets whether or not to use the function for converting analog video

(composite video, S-Video or component video) signals into HDMI signals.

When using this conversion function, set the aspect ratio, set the resolution, set the color format and video range of the signals output from the HDMI terminal.

Set the audio delay timing to synchronize the sound and video.

This sets whether or not to display the on screen display that appears on the monitor screen when the controls on the remote control unit or main unit are operated.

DVD

NONE

DVD

1-RCA

VDP

NONE

VDP

NONE

TV


DBS VCR-1

NONE

TV

2-RCA

NONE

DBS

3-RCA

ON

NONE

VCR-1

NONE

Convert = ON

Aspect = Full

Resolution = 480p/576p

Color Space = Y Cb Cr

RGB Mode = Normal

0 ms

Function/Mode = ON

Master Volume = ON

Mode = Mode 1

VCR-2

NONE

VCR-2

NONE

V.AUX

NONE

V.AUX

NONE

Page

71

71, 72

72

72, 73

73

73

90



5.


1

2

3

4

2ch

Direct/Stereo

Dolby Digital

Setup

Auto Surround

Mode

Manual EQ

Setup


The speaker settings can be changed specifically for playing in the 2channel direct or stereo mode.

Turn the audio compression on or off when down-mixing Dolby Digital signals.

Set the Auto surround mode function.

This parameter is for optimizing the Room EQ with which the audio signals are produced from the speakers.


Basic

OFF

Auto Surround Mode = ON

All Channels and Frequency = 0 dB

6.

Option Setup

1

2 Volume Control

3

4

5

6

7

Power Amp

Assign

Trigger Out

Setup

Display

Remote Control iPod Charge

Setup Lock

Option Setup

To suit your preference, a surround back channel’s power amplifier can be assigned to the front channel for bi-amp playback, ZONE2 or ZONE3.


S. Back

This sets the volume level of each zone output.

Volume Limit:

This sets the upper limit for the master volume.

Power On Level:

This sets the volume level upon switching on the power of each zone.

Mute Level:

This sets the amount of attenuation of the audio output when each zone is muted.

Volume Level:

This sets whether the output level of ZONE2 is fixed or variable.

Main

Zone2

Zone3

Vol.Limit = OFF

P. On Lev. = LAST

Mute Lev. = FULL

Vol.Lev. = VAR

Vol.Limit = OFF

P. On Lev. = LAST

Mute Lev. = FULL

This sets the Trigger Out output for the different input sources.

If “ZONE = MAIN” is selected, settings can be made for the individual surround modes.

Trigger

Out 1

Trigger

Out 2

The brightness of the AVR-4306’s display can be adjusted

Set this when you want to select the Network Audio, USB and iPod functions directly from multizone with the remote control unit.

Use this to set iPod charging when the AVR-4306 and iPod are connected.

This sets whether or not to lock the system setup settings so that they cannot be changed.

ZONE = MAIN, All Surround Modes = ON

TUNER PHONO CD

CDR /

TAPE

DVD VDP TV DBS

OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON

ZONE = 2

ON

VCR-1

ON

VCR-2

ON

TUNER

ON

PHONO

ON

CD

ON

CDR /

TAPE

ON

DVD

ON

VDP

ON

TV

ON

DBS

ON

VCR-1

ON

VCR-2

ON

Dimmer = 0

Net Audio Preset Ch

Power On = ON

Setup Lock = OFF

7.

Network Setup

1

2

IP Address

Proxy

3 Network Option

Network Setup

The IP address-related settings are made here.

The proxy-related settings can be changed here.

Power saving

Set whether or not to accept control from the network in the standby mode.

PC

Language

Select the language of the computer’s OS.


ON

OFF

ON eng

V.AUX

ON

AUX1 AUX2

ON ON

V.AUX

ON

AUX1 AUX2

ON ON

Page

74

74

75

75, 76

Page

76

77

77, 78

78

78, 79

79

79

Page

80

80

81

91


Additional Information

Optimum surround sound for different sources

There are currently various types of multi-channel signals (signals or formats with more than two channels).

2

Types of multi-channel signals

Dolby Digital (including Dolby Digital EX), DTS (including DTS-

ES), DVD-Audio, and Super Audio CD.

Note on the above: MUSE 3.1 and MPEG multi-channel audio are not available to North American consumers – same is true for

Dolby’s AAC.

“Source” here does not refer to the type of signal (format) but the recorded content. Sources can be divided into two major categories.

2

Types of sources

• Movie audio:

Signals created to be played in movie theaters. In general sound is recorded to be played in movie theaters equipped with multiple surround speakers, regardless of the format

(Dolby Digital, DTS, etc.).

Movie theater sound field

FL SW C FR

SL SR

Listening room sound field

FL SW C FR

SL SR

• Other types of audio:

These signals are designed to recreate a 360° sound field using three to five speakers.

FL SW C FR

SL SR

In this case the speakers should surround the listener from all sides to create a uniform sound field from 360°. Ideally the surround speakers should function as “point” sound sources in the same way as the front speakers.

These two types of sources thus have different properties, and different speaker settings, particularly for the surround speakers, are required in order to achieve the ideal sound.

The AVR-4306’s surround speaker selection function makes it possible to change the settings according to the combination of surround speakers being used and the surrounding environment in order to achieve the ideal surround sound for all sources. This means that you can connect a pair of bipolar or dipolar surround speakers (mounted on either side of the prime listening position), as well as a separate pair of direct radiating (monopolar) speakers placed at the rear corners of the listening room.


Surround back speakers

A 6.1-channel system is a conventional 5.1-channel system to which the “surround back” (SB) channel has been added. This makes it easy to achieve sound positioned directly behind the listener, something that was previously difficult with sources designed for conventional multi surround speakers. In addition, the acoustic image extending between the sides and the rear is narrowed, thus greatly improving the expression of the surround signals for sounds moving from the sides to the back and from the front to the point directly behind the listening position.

Change of positioning and acoustic image with 5.1-channel systems

FL SW C FR

SL ch SR ch

Movement of acoustic image from SR to SL

Change of positioning and acoustic image with 6.1-channel systems

FL SW C FR

SB

SL ch SR ch

SB

Multiple surround speakers

In this case it is important to achieve the same sense of expansion as in a movie theater with the surround channels.

To do so, in some cases the number of surround speakers is increased (to four or eight) or speakers with bipolar or dipolar properties are used.

SL : Surround L channel

SR : Surround R channel

SB : Surround B (back) channel

SB ch

Movement of acoustic image from SR to SB to SL

92


With this set, speaker(s) for 1 or 2 channels are required to achieve a 6.1-channel system (DTS-ES, etc.). Adding these speakers, however, increases the surround effect not only with sources recorded in 6.1 channels but also with conventional 2- to

5.1-channel sources. The WIDE SCREEN mode is a mode for achieving surround sound with up to 7.1 channels using surround back speakers, for sources recorded in conventional Dolby

Surround as well as Dolby Digital 5.1-channel and DTS Surround

5.1-channel sources. Furthermore, all the DENON original surround modes ( page 37) are compatible with 7.1-channel playback, so you can enjoy 7.1-channel sound with any signal source.

2

Number of surround back speakers

Though the surround back channel only consists of 1 channel of playback signals for 6.1-channel sources (DTS-ES, etc.), we recommend using two speakers. When using speakers with dipolar characteristics in particular, it is essential to use two speakers.

Using two speakers results in a smoother blend with the sound of the surround channels and better sound positioning of the surround back channel when listening from a position other than the center.

Speaker setting examples

Here we describe a number of speaker settings for different purposes. Use these examples as guides to set up your system according to the type of speakers used and the main usage purpose.

[1] DTS-ES compatible system (using surround back speakers)

q Basic setting for primarily watching movies

This is recommended when mainly playing movies and using regular single way or 2-way speakers for the surround speakers.

Front speakers

Center speaker

Monitor

Subwoofer

60°

Surround speakers


• When using two surround back speakers, place them at the back facing the front at a narrower distance than the front left and right speakers. When using one surround back speaker, place it at the rear center facing the front at a slightly higher position (0 to 20 cm) than the surround speakers.

• We recommend installing the surround back speaker(s) at a slightly downward facing angle. This effectively prevents the surround back channel signals from reflecting off the monitor or screen at the front center, resulting in interference and making the sense of movement from the front to the back less sharp.

• Connect the surround speakers to the surround speaker A terminals on the AVR-4306 and set all settings on the setup menu to “A” (This is the factory default setting ( page 89)).

w

Setting for primarily watching movies using diffusion type speakers for the surround speakers

For the greatest sense of surround sound envelopment, diffuse radiation speakers such as bipolar types, or dipolar types, provide a wider dispersion than is possible to obtain from a direct radiating speaker (monopolar). Place these speakers at either side of the prime listening position, mounted above ear level.

Path of the surround sound from the speakers to the listening position

2

Placement of the surround left and right channels when using surround back speakers

Using surround back speakers greatly improves the positioning of the sound at the rear. Because of this, the surround left and right channels play an important role in achieving a smooth transition of the acoustic image from the front to the back. As shown on the diagram above, in a movie theater the surround signals are also produced from diagonally in front of the listeners, creating an acoustic image as if the sound were floating in space.

To achieve these effects, we recommend placing the speakers for the surround left and right channels slightly more towards the front than with conventional surround systems. Doing so sometimes increases the surround effect when playing conventional 5.1-channel sources in the 6.1 surround or DTS-ES

Matrix 6.1 mode. Check the surround effects of the various modes before selecting the surround mode.

60°

Surround back speakers

[ As seen from above ]

Surround speaker Surround back speaker

Front speaker

Point slightly downwards

60 to 90 cm

[ As seen from the side ]

• Set the front speakers with their front surfaces as flush with the TV or monitor screen as possible. Set the center speaker between the front left and right speakers and no further from the listening position than the front speakers.

• Consult the owner’s manual for your subwoofer for advice on placing the subwoofer within the listening room.

• If the surround speakers are direct-radiating (monopolar) then place them slightly behind and at an angle to the listening position and parallel to the walls at a position 60 to 90 centimeters (2 to 3 feet) above ear level at the prime listening position.

Surround speakers

60°



Surround speaker

Front speaker

Surround back speaker


60 to 90 cm


93


• Set the front speakers, center speaker and subwoofer in the same positions as in example q.

• It is best to place the surround speakers directly at the side or slightly to the front of the viewing position, and 60 to 90 centimers (2 to 3 feet) above the ears.

• Same as surround back speaker installation method q.

Using dipolar speakers for the surround back speakers as well is more effective.


• The signals from the surround channels reflect off the walls as shown on the diagram at the left, creating an enveloping and realistic surround sound presentation.

For multi-channel music sources however, the use of bipolar or dipolar speakers mounted at the sides of the listening position may not be satisfactory in order to create a coherent 360 degree surround sound field. Connect another pair of direct radiating speakers as described in example e and place them at the rear corners of the room facing towards the prime listening position.

e When using different surround speakers for movies and music

To achieve more effective surround sound for both movies and music, use different sets of surround speakers and different surround modes for the two types of sources.

• Set the front speakers slightly wider apart than the setup for watching movies only and point them toward the listening position in order assure clear positioning of the sound.

• Set the center speaker in the same positions as in example q.

• Set surround speakers A for watching movies in the positions described in example q or w, depending on the types of speakers used.

• Set surround speakers B for playing multi-channel music at the same height as the front speakers and slightly at an angle to the rear of the listening position, and point them toward the listening position.

• Connect the surround speakers for watching movies to the surround speaker A terminals on the AVR-4306, the surround speakers for playing multi-channel music to the surround speaker B terminals. Set the surround speaker selection on the setup menu ( page 86).

Front speakers

Center speaker

Monitor

Subwoofer

45° ~ 60°

Surround speakers A

120°


Surround speakers B


Surround speakers A

Front speaker

Surround back speaker

60 to 90 cm


Surround speakers B



[2] When not using surround back speakers

• Set the front speakers with their front surfaces as flush with the TV or monitor screen as possible. Set the center speaker between the front left and right speakers and no further from the listening position than the front speakers.

• Consult the owner’s manual for your subwoofer for advice on placing the subwoofer within the listening room.

• If the surround speakers are direct-radiating (monopolar) then place them slightly behind and at an angle to the listening position and parallel to the walls at a position 60 to 90 centimeters (2 to 3 feet) above ear level at the prime listening position.


Front speakers

Center speaker

Monitor

Subwoofer

60°

120°

Surround speakers


Surround speaker

Front speaker

60 to 90 cm


94


Surround

The AVR-4306 is equipped with a digital signal processing circuit that lets you play program sources in the surround mode to achieve the same sense of presence as in a movie theater.

[1] Dolby Surround

q Dolby Digital

Dolby Digital is the multi-channel digital signal format developed by Dolby Laboratories.

Dolby Digital consists of up to “5.1” channels - front left, front right, center, surround left, surround right, and an additional channel exclusively reserved for additional deep bass sound effects (the Low Frequency Effects – LFE – channel, also called the “.1” channel, containing bass frequencies of up to 120 Hz).

Unlike the analog Dolby Pro Logic format, Dolby Digital’s main channels can all contain full range sound information, from the lowest bass, up to the highest frequencies – 22 kHz. The signals within each channel are distinct from the others, allowing pinpoint sound imaging, and Dolby Digital offers tremendous dynamic range from the most powerful sound effects to the quietest, softest sounds, free from noise and distortion.

2

Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic

Comparison of home surround systems

No. recorded channels

(elements)

No. playback channels

Playback channels

(max.)

Audio processing

High frequency playback limit of surround channel

Dolby Digital

5.1 ch

5.1 ch

L, R, C, SL, SR, SW

L, R, C, S

(SW - recommended)

Digital discrete processing Dolby

Digital encoding/ decoding

Analog matrix processing Dolby

Surround

20 kHz

Dolby Pro Logic

2 ch

4 ch

7 kHz

2

Dolby Digital compatible media and playback methods

Marks indicating Dolby Digital compatibility:

The following are general examples. Also refer to the player’s operating instructions.

Media

DVD

1

Others

(satellite broadcasts,

CATV, etc.)

Dolby Digital output terminals

Optical or coaxial digital output

(same as for PCM)

1

Playback method

(reference page)

Set the input mode to

“AUTO” ( page

27).


(same as for PCM)


“AUTO” ( page

27).

1: Some DVD digital outputs have the function of switching the Dolby Digital signal output method between “bit stream” and “(convert to) PCM”. When playing in Dolby

Digital surround on the AVR-4306, switch the DVD player’s output mode to “bit stream”. In some cases players are equipped with both “bit stream + PCM” and “PCM only” digital outputs. In this case connect the “bit stream +

PCM” terminals to the AVR-4306.

w Dolby Pro Logic II

• Dolby Pro Logic II is a new multi-channel playback format developed by Dolby Laboratories using feedback logic steering technology and offering improvements over conventional Dolby

Pro Logic circuits.

• Dolby Pro Logic II can be used to decode not only sources recorded in Dolby Surround ( ) but also regular stereo sources into five channels (front left, front right, center, surround left and surround right) to achieve surround sound.

• Whereas with conventional Dolby Pro Logic the surround channel playback frequency band was limited, Dolby Pro Logic II offers a wider band range (20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater). In addition, the surround channels were monaural (the surround left and right channels were the same) with previous Dolby Pro

Logic, but Dolby Pro Logic II they are played as stereo signals.

• Various parameters can be set according to the type of source

( and the contents, so it is possible to achieve optimum decoding page 33).

Additional Information e Dolby Pro LogicIIx

• Dolby Pro Logic II x furthers the matrix decoding technology of

Dolby Pro Logic II to decode audio signals recorded on two channels into up to 7.1 playback channels, including the surround back channel. Dolby Pro Logic II x also allows 5.1channel sources to be played in up to 7.1 channels.

The mode can be selected according to the source. The Music mode is best suited for playing music, the Cinema mode for playing movies, and the Game mode for playing games. The

Game mode can only be used with 2-channel audio sources.

Sources recorded in Dolby Surround

• These are sources in which three or more channels of surround have been recorded as two channels of signals using Dolby Surround encoding technology.

• Dolby Surround is used for the sound tracks of movies recorded on DVDs, LDs and video cassettes to be played on stereo VCRs, as well as for the stereo broadcast signals of FM radio, TV, satellite broadcasts and cable TV.

• Decoding these signals with Dolby Pro Logic makes it possible to achieve multi-channel surround playback. The signals can also be played on ordinary stereo equipment, in which case they provide normal stereo sound.

• There are two types of DVD Dolby Surround recording signals.

q 2-channel PCM stereo signals w 2-channel Dolby Digital signals

2

Sources recorded in Dolby Surround are indicated with the logo mark shown below

Dolby Surround support mark:

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic” and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

95


[2] DTS Digital Surround

DTS Digital Surround (also called simply DTS) is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by Digital Theater Systems.

DTS offers the same “5.1” playback channels as Dolby Digital

(front left, front right and center, surround left and surround right) as well as the stereo 2-channel mode. The signals for the different channels are fully independent, eliminating the risk of deterioration of sound quality due to interference between signals, crosstalk, etc.

DTS features a relatively higher bit rate as compared to Dolby

Digital (1234 kbps for CDs and LDs, 1536 kbps for DVDs) so it operates with a relatively low compression rate. Because of this the amount of data is great, and when DTS playback is used in movie theaters, a separate CD-ROM synchronized with the film is played.

With LDs and DVDs, there is of course no need for an extra disc; the pictures and sound can be recorded simultaneously on the same disc, so the discs can be handled in the same way as discs with other formats.

There are also music CDs recorded in DTS. These CDs include

5.1-channel surround signals (compared to two channels on current CDs). They do not include picture data, but they offer surround playback on CD players that are equipped with digital outputs (PCM type digital output required).

DTS surround track playback offers the same intricate, grand sound as in a movie theater, right in your own listening room.

2

DTS compatible media and playback methods

Marks indicating DTS compatibility: and

The following are general examples. Also refer to the player’s operating instructions.

Media

CD

DVD

DTS Digital output terminals

Playback method

(reference page)


(same as for PCM)

2


“AUTO” or “DTS” ( page 27).

Never set the mode to

“ANALOG” or “PCM”.

1


(same as for PCM)

3


“AUTO” or “DTS” ( page 27).

1: DTS signals are recorded in the same way on CDs and LDs as PCM signals. Because of this, the un-decoded DTS signals are output as random “hissy” noise from the CD or

LD player’s analog outputs. If this noise is played with the amplifier set at a very high volume, it may possibly cause damage to the speakers. To avoid this, be sure to switch the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS” before playing CDs or

LDs recorded in DTS. Also, never switch the input mode to

“ANALOG” or “PCM” during playback. The same holds true when playing CDs or LDs on a DVD player or LD/DVD compatible player. For DVDs, the DTS signals are recorded in a special way so this problem does not occur.

2: The signals provided at the digital outputs of a CD or LD player may undergo some sort of internal signal processing

(output level adjustment, sampling frequency conversion, etc.). In this case the DTS-encoded signals may be processed erroneously, in which case they cannot be decoded by the AVR-4306, or may only produce noise.

Before playing DTS signals for the first time, turn down the master volume to a low level, start playing the DTS disc,

( then check whether the DTS indicator on the AVR-4306 page 31) lights before turning up the master volume.

3: A DVD player with DTS-compatible digital output is required to play DTS DVDs. A DTS Digital Output logo is featured on the front panel of compatible DVD players.

Recent DENON DVD player models feature DTScompatible digital output – consult the player’s owner’s manual for information on configuring the digital output for

DTS playback of DTS-encoded DVDs.

MANUFACTURED UNDER LICENSE FROM DIGITAL

THEATER SYSTEMS, INC.

U.S. PAT. NO’S. 5,451,942; 5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;

6,226,616; 6,487,535 AND OTHER U.S. AND WORLD–WIDE

PATENTS ISSUED AND PENDING.

“DTS”, “DTS–ES”, “Neo:6”, AND “DTS 96/24” ARE

TRADEMARKS OF DIGITAL THEATER SYSTEMS, INC. ©

1996, 2003 DIGITAL THEATER SYSTEMS, INC. ALL RIGHTS

RESERVED.


[3]DTS-ES

DTS-ES is a new multi-channel digital signal format developed by

Digital Theater Systems, Inc. While offering high compatibility with the conventional DTS Digital Surround format, DTS-ES greatly improves the 360-degree surround impression and space expression thanks to further expanded surround signals. This format has been used professionally in movie theaters since

1999.

In addition to the 5.1 surround channels (FL, FR, C, SL, SR and

LFE), DTS-ES also offers the SB (Surround Back, sometimes also referred to as “surround center”) channel for surround playback with a total of 6.1 channels. DTS-ES includes two signal formats with different surround signal recording methods, as described below.

2

DTS-ES™ Discrete 6.1

DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 is the newest recording format. With it, all

6.1 channels (including the SB channel) are recorded independently using a digital discrete system. The main feature of this format is that because the SL, SR and SB channels are fully independent, the sound can be designed with total freedom and it is possible to achieve a sense that the acoustic images are moving about freely among the background sounds surrounding the listener from 360 degrees.

Though maximum performance is achieved when sound tracks recorded with this system are played using a DTS-ES decoder, when played with a conventional DTS decoder the SB channel signals are automatically down-mixed to the SL and SR channels, so none of the signal components are lost.

2

DTS-ES™ Matrix 6.1

With this format, the additional SB channel signals undergo matrix encoding and are input to the SL and SR channels beforehand. Upon playback they are decoded to the SL, SR and

SB channels. The performance of the encoder used at the time of recording can be fully matched using a high precision digital matrix decoder developed by DTS, thereby achieving surround sound more faithful to the producer’s sound design aims than with conventional 5.1- or 6.1-channel systems.

In addition, the bit stream format is 100% compatible with conventional DTS signals, so the effect of the Matrix 6.1 format can be achieved even with 5.1-channel signal sources. Of course it is also possible to play DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 encoded sources with a DTS 5.1-channel decoder.

96


When DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 or Matrix 6.1 encoded sources are decoded with a DTS-ES decoder, the format is automatically detected upon decoding and the optimum playing mode is selected. However, some Matrix 6.1 sources may be detected as having a 5.1-channel format, so the DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 mode must be set manually to play these sources. (For instructions on selecting the surround mode ( page 32).)

The DTS-ES decoder includes another function, the DTS Neo:6 surround mode for 6.1-channel playback of digital PCM and analog signal sources.

2

DTS Neo:6™ surround

This mode applies conventional 2-channel signals to the high precision digital matrix decoder used for DTS-ES Matrix 6.1 to achieve 6.1-channel surround playback. High precision input signal detection and matrix processing enable full band reproduction (frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz or greater) for all 6.1 channels, and separation between the different channels is improved to the same level as that of a digital discrete system.

DTS Neo:6 surround includes two modes for selecting the optimum decoding for the signal source.

• DTS Neo:6 Cinema

This mode is optimum for playing movies. Decoding is performed with emphasis on separation performance to achieve the same atmosphere with 2-channel sources as with

6.1-channel sources.

This mode is effective for playing sources recorded in conventional surround formats as well, because the in-phase component is assigned mainly to the center channel (C) and the reversed phase component to the surround (SL, SR and SB channels).

• DTS Neo:6 Music

This mode is suited mainly for playing music. The front channel

(FL and FR) signals bypass the decoder and are played directly so there is no loss of sound quality, and the effect of the surround signals output from the center (C) and surround (SL,

SR and SB) channels add a natural sense of expansion to the sound field.

[4] DTS 96/24

The sampling frequency, number of bits and number of channels used for recording of music, etc., in studios has been increasing in recent years, and there are a growing number of high quality signal sources, including 96 kHz/24 bit 5.1-channel sources.

For example, there are high picture/sound quality DVD video sources with 96 kHz/24 bit stereo PCM audio tracks.

However, because the data rate for these audio tracks is extremely high, there are limits to recording them on two channels only, and since the quality of the pictures must be restricted it is common to only include still pictures.

In addition, 96 kHz/24 bit 5.1-channel surround is possible with

DVD audio sources, but DVD audio players are required to play them with this high quality.

DTS 96/24 is a multi-channel digital signal format developed by

Digital Theater Systems, Inc. in order to deal with this situation.

Conventional surround formats used sampling frequencies of 48 or 44.1 kHz, so 20 kHz was about the maximum playback signal frequency. With DTS 96/24, the sampling frequency is increased to 96 or 88.2 kHz to achieve a wide frequency range of over 40 kHz.

In addition, DTS 96/24 has a resolution of 24 bits, resulting in the same frequency band and dynamic range as 96 kHz/24 bit PCM.

As with conventional DTS Surround, DTS 96/24 is compatible with a maximum of 5.1 channels, so sources recorded using

DTS 96/24 can be played in high sampling frequency, multiple channel audio with such normal media as DVD videos and CDs.

Thus, with DTS 96/24, the same 96 kHz/24 bit multi-channel surround sound as with DVD-Audio can be achieved while viewing DVD-Video images on a conventional DVD-Video player

( 1). Furthermore, with DTS 96/24 compatible CDs, 88.2

kHz/24 bit multi-channel surround can be achieved using normal

CD/LD players ( 1).

Even with the high quality multi-channel signals, the recording time is the same as with conventional DTS surround sources.

What’s more, DTS 96/24 is fully compatible with the conventional DTS surround format, so DTS 96/24 signal sources can be played with a sampling frequency of 48 kHz or 44.1 kHz on conventional DTS or DTS-ES surround decoders ( 2).

1: A DVD player with DTS digital output capabilities (for

CD/LD players, a player with digital outputs for conventional DTS CDs/LDs) and a disc recorded in DTS

96/24 are required.

2: The resolution is 24 or 20 bits, depending on the decoder.


Audyssey MultEQ XT

There are several factors that can degrade the sound from even the best loudspeakers in a listening room. One of the most important is the interaction of sound from the loudspeakers with large surfaces such as walls, the floor, and the ceiling in the room. Even with careful loudspeaker placement and acoustical treatments, there are significant problems that are caused by room acoustics. These include reflections from nearby surfaces and standing waves that are created between large parallel surfaces in the room.

In a home theater the situation is further complicated because there are several listening locations. The effects of room acoustics on the sound arriving at each person’s ears are very different and the result is a listening experience that is degraded in a different way for every person in the room. It is not uncommon to have variations in two adjacent seats that are as large as 10 dB, particularly in the frequency range below 250 Hz.

The solution to this problem is to apply room correction after precisely measuring how each loudspeaker interacts with the room. Because the room causes variations in the frequency response of the loudspeakers that are so large from seat to seat, it is important to measure each loudspeaker at several locations in the listening room. This should be done even if there is only one listener. Measurement at a single location is not representative of the acoustical problems in the room and will, in most cases, degrade overall performance.

Audyssey MultEQ XT is the only technology that can achieve room correction for multiple listeners in a large listening area. It does so by combining the data collected at several points in the room from each loudspeaker and then applying correction that minimizes the acoustical effects of the room and is matched to the frequency resolution of human perception (known as psychoacoustics). Furthermore, MultEQ XT correction is applied both in frequency and time domains and so there are no artifacts

(such as smearing of sound or modal ringing) that are sometimes associated with traditional methods of room equalization.

In addition to correcting frequency response problems over a wide listening area, Audyssey MultEQ XT provides a completely automated sound system set-up process. It identifies how many loudspeakers are connected to the amplifiers and whether they are full-range, satellites, or subwoofers. If there is a least one subwoofer connected, Audyssey MultEQ XT determines the optimum crossover frequency between each satellite and the subwoofer(s). It automatically checks the polarity of each loudspeaker and alerts the user if there are any that may be wired out-of-phase relative to the others. It measures the distance to each loudspeaker from the main listening position and adjusts the delays so that sound from each loudspeaker arrives at the same time. Finally, Audyssey MultEQ XT determines the playback level of each loudspeaker and adjusts the volume trims so that all levels are equal.

97


The two diagrams below illustrate two examples of microphone placement for two types of seating arrangements. There are six measuring positions shown in each case. Increasing the number of measuring points will provide a better sampling of the listening area and produce better results. The dotted line represents the area in which the room correction provided by

Audyssey MultEQ XT is optimal. The microphone must be placed at ear height at each location.

DENON LINK (DENON Digital Link)

High-grade LPCM 24 bit, 96-kHz, 6-channel or 24-bit, 192 kHz, 2channel digital input is possible when the AVR-4306 is connected via a shielded twisted pair (STP) cable to a DENON

DVD player that supports DENON Digital Link, Since DENON

Digital Link uses low-voltage differential signaling (LVDS), transfer capabilities of greater than 1.2 Gbps at a differential voltage of approximately 0.3 Vpp are possible.


Windows Media Connect

This is a media server provided free of charge by Microsoft since

October 2004.

It operates with all types of music jukebox programs, but is optimum with Windows Media Player Ver. 10.

Windows Media Connect can be used to play playlists created on jukebox software such as Windows Media Player Ver. 10, as well as WMA, DRM WMA, MP3 and WAV files.

• Audyssey MultEQ XT is a trademark of Audyssey Laboratories.

It is licensed under US and National Patent Applications

20030235318 and 10/700,220. Additional U.S. and Foreign

Patents pending. MultEQ and the Audyssey MultEQ logo are trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories, Inc.. All rights reserved.

HDCD®

(High Definition Compatible Digital®)

HDCD is an encoding/decoding technology that greatly reduces the distortion that occurs upon digital recording while maintaining compatibility with the conventional CD format, thus expanding the dynamic range and achieving a high resolution.

Conventional CDs and HDCD compatible CDs are identified automatically to select the optimum digital processing.

AL24 Plus (AL24 Processing Plus)

2

AL24 Processing for All Channels

DENON has further developed its proprietary AL24 Processing, an analog waveform reproduction technology, to support the

192-kHz sampling frequency of DVD-Audio. AL24 Processing

Plus, thoroughly suppresses quantization noise associated with

D/A conversion of LPCM signals to reproduce the low-level signals with optimum clarity that will bring out all the delicate nuances of the music.

Equipped foe not only front left and right channels but also for the surround left and right, center and subwoofer channels.

2

Explanation for installing Windows Media

Connect

1. If installation of Windows XP Service Pack 2 is not yet complete, either download free of charge from Microsoft or via the Windows Update installer.

2. Download the latest version of Windows Media Player Ver. 10 either directly from Microsoft or using the Windows Update installer.

3. Download Windows Media Connect (usable since October 12,

2004) either directly from Microsoft or using the Windows

Update installer.

About HDMI

“HDMI” is the abbreviation of “High Definition Multimedia

Interface”.

This is a digital interface standard for next generation TVs developed based on the DVI (Digital Visual Interface) used for computer displays, etc., and optimized for use in nonprofessional equipment. With it, non-compressed digital video and multi-channel audio signals can be transferred with a single connector, eliminating the need to use separate cables for the picture and sound and making it possible to make connectors smaller. HDMI is also compatible with HDCP (High-bandwidth

Digital Contents Protection), a technology for protecting copyrights that encrypts digital video signals in the same was as with DVI.

vTuner

This is an Internet radio free online contents server. Note that usage fess are included in upgrade costs.

For inquiries about this service, visit the vTuner site below.

vTuner website: http://www.radiodenon.com

This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of

Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Nothing Else Matters Software and BridgeCo or an authorized subsidiary.

•

®, HDCD®, High Definition Compatible Digital® and

Microsoft® are either registered trademarks or trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. HDCD system manufactured under license from

Microsoft Corporation, Inc. This product is covered by one or more of the following: In the USA: 5,479,168, 5,638,074,

5,640,161, 5,808,574, 5,838,274, 5,854,600, 5,864,311,

5,872,531, and in Australia: 669114. Other patents pending.

• HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia

Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI

Licensing LLC.

98


Windows Media DRM

A copyright-protected technology developed by Microsoft.

• The PlaysForSure logo, Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

• Content providers are using the digital rights management technology for Windows Media contained in this device (“WM-

DRM”) to protect the integrity of their content (“Secure

Content”) so that their intellectual property, including copyright, in such content is not misappropriated. This device uses WM-DRM software to play Secure Content (“WM-DRM

Software”). If the security of the WM-DRM Software in this device has been compromised, owners of Secure Content

(“Secure Content Owners”) way request that Microsoft revoke the WM-DRM Software's right to acquire new licenses to copy, display and/or play Secure Content. Revocation does not alter the WM-DRM Software’s ability to play unprotected content. A list of revoked WM-DRM Software is sent to your device whenever you download a license for Secure Content from the Internet or from PC. Microsoft may, in conjunction with such license, also download revocation list onto your device on behalf of Secure Content Owners.

Surround modes and parameters


Surround Mode

PURE DIRECT, DIRECT

DSD DIRECT

DSD MULTI DIRECT

MULTI CH DIRECT

STEREO

EXT.IN

MULTI CH IN

WIDE SCREEN

DOLBY PRO LOGIC II x

DOLBY PRO LOGIC II

DTS NEO:6

DOLBY DIGITAL

DTS SURROUND

7CH STEREO

SUPER STADIUM

ROCK ARENA

JAZZ CLUB

CLASSIC CONCERT

MONO MOVIE

VIDEO GAME

MATRIX

VIRTURL

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

E

B

B

B

B

E

E

B

B

E

B

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

FRONT L/R CENTER

Signals and adjustability in the different modes

Channel output Parameter (default values are shown in parentheses)

SURROUND

L/R

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

E

B

B

B

B

B

B

E

B

E

E

SURROUND

BACK L/R

E

E

B

B

E

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

E

SUB-

WOOFER

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

D. COMP

C (OFF)

E

E

E

C (OFF)

E

E

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

*1

LFE

E

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

E

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

E

E

*2

AFDM

*1

SB CH OUT

(MODE)

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

E

E

E

E

C

C

E

C (ON)

C (ON)

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C : Signal / Adjustable

E : No signal / Not adjustable

B : Turned on or off by speaker configuration setting

C : Able

E : Unable

NOTE1 : BASS +6 dB, TREBLE 0 dB

NOTE2 : BASS +6 dB, TREBLE +4 dB

NOTE3 : This parameter is availabe when the “MODE” is set to “CINEMA”.

NOTE4 : This parameter is availabe when the “MODE” is set to “CINEMA” or “PL”.

*1: When playing Dolby Digital and DTS signals.

*2: When playing Dolby Digital, DTS, DVD-Audio and

Super Audio CD.

99


Signals and adjustability in the different modes

Parameter (default values are shown in parentheses)

Surround Mode

PURE DIRECT, DIRECT

DSD DIRECT

DSD MULTI DIRECT

MULTI CH DIRECT

STEREO

EXT.IN

MULTI CH IN

WIDE SCREEN

DOLBY PRO LOGIC II x

DOLBY PRO LOGIC II

DTS NEO:6

DOLBY DIGITAL

DTS SURROUND

7CH STEREO

SUPER STADIUM

ROCK ARENA

JAZZ CLUB

CLASSIC CONCERT

MONO MOVIE

VIDEO GAME

MATRIX

VIRTURL

E

E

E

E

C (0 dB)

E

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (NOTE1)

C (NOTE2)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

C (0 dB)

TONE

CONTROL

CINEMA

EQ.

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C (OFF)

C (NOTE3)

C (NOTE4)

C (NOTE3)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C (CINEMA)

C (CINEMA)

C (CINEMA)

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

MODE

(DECODER)

ROOM

SIZE

EFFECT

LEVEL

E

E

E

E

E

E

C (Medium)

C (Medium)

C (Medium)

C (Medium)

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C (Medium)

C (Medium)

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C (ON, 10)

E

E

E

E

E

E

C (10)

C (10)

C (10)

C (10)

C (10)

C (10)

E

E

Dolby Digital

DELAY TIME

SUBWOOFER

ON/OFF

NIGHT mode

PRO LOGIC II / II x MUSIC MODE only

PANORAMA DIMENSION

CENTER

WIDTH

C (OFF)

E

E

E

C (OFF)

E

E

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C (30 msec)

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C

C

E

E

C (OFF)

C (OFF)

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C (3)

C (3)

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C (3)

C (3)

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E


NEO:6 MUSIC

MODE only

EXT. IN only

CENTER

IMAGE

E

E

C (0.3)

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

SW ATT

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C

E

E

E

E

E

E

C : Signal / Adjustable

E : No signal / Not adjustable

B : Turned on or off by speaker configuration setting

C : Adjustable

E : Not adjustable

100


2

Differences in surround mode names depending on the input signals


Button

Surround Mode Note ANALOG

LINEAR

PCM

DTS ES DSCRT

(With Flag)

STANDARD

DTS SURROUND

DTS ES DSCRT6.1

DTS ES MTRX6.1

DTS SURROUND

DTS 96/24

DTS + PL II x CINEMA

DTS + PL II x MUSIC

DTS + NEO:6

DTS NEO:6 CINEMA

DTS NEO:6 MUSIC

DOLBY SURROUND

DOLBY DIGITAL EX

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY DIGITAL+PL II x CINEMA

DOLBY DIGITAL+PL II x MUSIC

DOLBY PRO LOGIC II x CINEMA

DOLBY PRO LOGIC II x MUSIC

DOLBY PRO LOGIC II x GAME

DOLBY PRO LOGIC II CINEMA

DOLBY PRO LOGIC II MUSIC

DOLBY PRO LOGIC II GAME

DOLBY PRO LOGIC

MULTI CH IN

MULTI CH IN

MULTI IN + PL II x CINEMA

MULTI IN + PL II x MUSIC

*1

*1

*2

*1

*1

*1

*2

*1

E

E

E

E

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

E

E

E

C

C

E

E

E

E

C

C

C

C

E

E

E

E

C

C

C

E

E

E

C

C

E

E

E

E

*2

*1

E

E

E

E

E

E

4 : Mode selectable in initial status

B : Mode fixed when AFDM is ON

C : Selectable mode

E : Non-selectable mode

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C

C

E

E

E

4 B

E

C

E

DTS

DTS ES MTRX

(With Flag)

DTS

(5.1ch)

DTS

96/24

DOLBY DIGITAL EX

(With Flag)

Input signals

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY DIGITAL

EX

(With no Flag)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(5.1ch)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(3, 4, 5ch)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(2ch)

DVD-Audio

(multi ch)

DVD-AUDIO

DVD-

Audio

(2ch)

176.4/

192kHz

Super Audio CD

DSD

(multi ch)

DSD

(2ch)

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

4 B

C

E

E

E

C

C

C

E

E

E

E

E

E

C

C

C

E

E

4

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

4

C

C

C

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

4 B

C

E

E

C

C

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

NOTE :

*1: This mode is not available when the Surround Back speaker setup is set to “None”.

*2: This mode is not available when the Surround Back speaker setup is set to “1spkr” or “None”.

C

4

E

E

E

E

E

C

C

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C

4

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C

C

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C

4

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C

C

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C

C

C

C

C

C

E

E

E

E

4

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C

C

E

E

E

4

C

C

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C

C

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

4

C

C

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

E

C

E

E

C

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

101


Button

Surround Mode

DIRECT

DIRECT

DSD DIRECT

DSD MULTI DIRECT

MULTI CH DIRECT

M DIRECT + PL II x CINEMA

M DIRECT + PL II x MUSIC

PURE DIRECT

PURE DIRECT

DSD PURE DIRECT

DSD MULTI PURE

MULTI CH PURE DIRECT

M PURE D + PL II x CINEMA

M PURE D + PL II x MUSIC

DSP SIMULATION

7CH STEREO

WIDE SCREEN

SUPER STADIUM

ROCK ARENA

JAZZ CLUB

CLASSIC CONCERT

MONO MOVIE

VIDEO GAME

MATRIX

VIRTUAL

STEREO

STEREO

Note

*2

*1

*2

*1

*3

ANALOG

LINEAR

PCM

DTS ES DSCRT

(With Flag)

C

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C

E

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

E

E

E

E

E

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

E

E

E

E

C

E

C

E

E

E

E

E

C

E

E

E

E

E

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

DTS

DTS ES MTRX

(With Flag)

C

E

E

E

E

E

C

E

E

E

E

E

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

E

E

E

E

C

E

DTS

(5.1ch)

DTS

96/24

DOLBY DIGITAL EX

(With Flag)

Input signals

DOLBY DIGITAL

DOLBY DIGITAL

EX

(With no Flag)

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(5.1ch)

C

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C

E

C

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C

E

DOLBY

DIGITAL

(3, 4, 5ch)

E

E

E

E

C

E

C

E

E

E

E

E

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

E

E

E

E

E

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

E

E

E

E

E

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

4 4

4 : Mode selectable in initial status

C : Selectable mode

E : Non-selectable mode

C C C C C

NOTE :

*1: This mode is not available when the Surround Back speaker setup is set to “None”.

*2: This mode is not available when the Surround Back speaker setup is set to “1spkr” or “None”.

*3: If the Surround Back speaker setup is set to “None”, then “5CH STEREO” is displayed.

C

E

E

E

C

E

E

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

E

E

E

C

E

E

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

E

E

E

E

C

E

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

E

E

E

E

C

E


DOLBY

DIGITAL

(2ch)

DVD-Audio

(multi ch)

DVD-AUDIO

DVD-

Audio

(2ch)

176.4/

192kHz

Super Audio CD

DSD

(multi ch)

DSD

(2ch)

E

E

E

E

C

E

E

E

E

C

C

C

E

E

E

E

C

E

C

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C

C

C

C

E

C

E

E

E

E

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

E

E

E

C

C

C

C

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C

E

4

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

E

C

E

E

E

E

E

4

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

E

E

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

C

E

C

E

E

E

E

4

102


Relationship between the video input signal and monitor output according to the video convert settings

Video convert

ON

HDMI

Input signals

COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO HDMI

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

COMPONENT

COMPONENT

VIDEO

COMPONENT ✳1

COMPONENT ✳1

S-VIDEO

COMPONENT ✳2

COMPONENT ✳2

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

COMPONENT

COMPONENT

COMPONENT

COMPONENT ✳1

COMPONENT ✳1

COMPONENT ✳1

COMPONENT ✳2

COMPONENT ✳2

COMPONENT ✳2

COMPONENT ✳2

COMPONENT ✳2

COMPONENT ✳2

S-VIDEO

COMPONENT ✳2

COMPONENT ✳2

HDMI

HDMI ✳1

HDMI ✳2

HDMI ✳2

HDMI

HDMI

HDMI ✳1

HDMI ✳1

HDMI ✳1

HDMI ✳2

HDMI ✳2

HDMI ✳2

HDMI ✳2

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

COMPONENT

COMPONENT

COMPONENT ✳1

COMPONENT ✳1

COMPONENT ✳1

COMPONENT ✳2

COMPONENT ✳2

COMPONENT ✳2

COMPONENT ✳2

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

✳3

COMPONENT

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

✳3

COMPONENT

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

VIDEO

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

COMPONENT

VIDEO

VIDEO

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

480p ~ 720p : 480p/576p/1080i/720p

• The MAIN ZONE video conversion function is compatible with the following format: NTSC, PAL, SECAM, NTSC4.43, PAL-N, PAL-M and PAL-60.

• When SECAM signals of video input are up-converted, the signals are output in

PAL format from the S-Video connector.

• When the input signal is a component 1080i or 720p signal, the signal upconverted to HDMI is output with that resolution.

• When the input signal is a video, S-Video or component 480i, 480p, 576i or 576p signals, the signal up-converted to HDMI is output according to the setting made at “Resolution” under “HDMI Out Setup” ( page 72).

• Signals up-converted to HDMI are output to the HDMI monitor with the resolution at which they are input. Note that resolutions of 1080p are not handled.

✳1

✳2

✳3

: Not output

: On screen display superimposed on video signal and output.

: On screen display superimposed on S-Video signal and output.

: Video signals are output when the analog to HDMI convert function is set to “OFF”.

COMPONENT : On screen display only displayed for SYSTEM SETUP,

HDMI

SURROUND PARAMETER and ON SCREEN buttons.

: The on screen display is displayed when the analog to HDMI convert function is set to “ON”.

: Video signals are not output when the analog to HDMI convert function is set to “OFF”.

103



Video convert

OFF

S-VIDEO

MONITOR OUT

–

–

–

Used

Not used

–

–

–

Used

Not used

–

–

–

Used

Not used

–

–

–

Used

Not used

HDMI

Input signals

COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO HDMI

MONITOR OUT

COMPONENT S-VIDEO VIDEO

VIDEO

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

–

VIDEO ✳2

VIDEO

COMPONENT

COMPONENT ✳1

COMPONENT ✳2

COMPONENT ✳2

COMPONENT ✳1

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

–

VIDEO

VIDEO ✳2

VIDEO

HDMI

HDMI

HDMI

HDMI

HDMI

HDMI

HDMI

HDMI

HDMI

HDMI

COMPONENT

COMPONENT ✳1

COMPONENT ✳2

COMPONENT ✳2

COMPONENT ✳1

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

–

S-VIDEO

S-VIDEO

–

VIDEO

VIDEO

VIDEO

VIDEO

VIDEO

VIDEO

✳2

✳2

✳1

✳2

: Not output

: On screen display superimposed on video signal and output.

: On screen display superimposed on S-Video signal and output.

COMPONENT : On screen display only displayed for SYSTEM SETUP,

SURROUND PARAMETER and ON SCREEN buttons.

HDMI : The on screen display is displayed when the analog to HDMI convert function is set to “ON”.


104

Troubleshooting

If a problem should arise, first check the following.

1. Are the connections correct?

2. Have you operated the receiver according to the Operating Instructions?

3. Are the speakers and other components operating properly?

If this unit is not operating properly, check the items listed in the table below. Should the problem persist, there may be a malfunction. Disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase.

Symptom

Display not lit and sound not produced when POWER switch set to on.

Cause Measures

• Power supply cord not plugged in securely.

• Check the insertion of the power supply cord plug.

Page

23

Display lit but sound not produced.

• Speaker cables not securely connected.

• FUNCTION knob position is not appropriate.

• Volume control set to minimum.

• MUTING is on.

• No digital signal is being input.

• Connect securely.

• Switch to the proper position.

• Turn volume up to suitable level.

• Switch off MUTING.

• Properly select a digital signal input source.

• AVR-4306’s video output terminals and monitor’s input terminals are not properly connected.

• Check that the connections are correct.

7

25

25

26

67

8,

14~23

Nothing is displayed on monitor.

• Monitor TV’s input setting is wrong.

• Set the TV’s input selector to the terminals to which video signals are connected.

—

No DTS sound is produced.

Copying from DVD to

VCR is not possible.

No sound is produced from subwoofer.

• The PURE DIRECT mode is set.

• Set a surround mode other than the PURE DIRECT mode.

• DVD player’s audio output setting is not set to bit stream.

• DVD player is not DTS-compatible.

• AVR-4306’s input setting is set to analog

• Make the DVD player’s initial settings.

• Use a DTS-compatible player.

• Set to AUTO or DTS.

• Copying between a source such as

DVD and a VCR is not usually possible, as DVDs are often encoded with copy-protection signals that prevent VCR recording.

• Copying is not possible.

• Subwoofer’s power is not on.

• Subwoofer’s initial setting is set to

“NO”.

• Subwoofer’s output is not connected.

• The subwoofer’s channel volume level is set to “OFF”.

• Turn on the power.

• Set the setting to “YES”.

• Connect properly.

• Turn the subwoofer’s channel volume level up.

30

—

—

27

—

—

82

7, 23

39

Symptom Cause Measures

Troubleshooting

Page

No test tones are produced.

• Surround mode is set to a mode other than Dolby Surround.

• Set to Dolby Surround.

No sound is produced from surround speakers.

• Surround mode is set to

“STEREO”.

• Set to a mode other than

“STEREO”.

This unit does not operate properly when remote control unit is used.

An image is not projected with an

HDMI connection.

The HDMI audio is not output.

• Batteries dead.

• Remote control unit too far from this unit.

• Obstacle between this unit and remote control unit.

• Different button is being pressed.

• < and > ends of batteries inserted in reverse.

• Replace with new batteries.

• Move closer.

• Remove obstacle.

• Press the proper button.

• Insert batteries properly.

• AVR-4306’s HDMI output terminals and monitor’s input terminals are not properly connected.

• No HDMI signal is being input.

• Check the HDMI connection.

• The connected monitor equipment or other equipments do not support HDCP.

• The output format of the connected player (HDMI FORMAT) does not matche the supported input format of connected monitor equipments.

• Properly select HDMI signal input source.

• The AVR-4306 will not output video signal unless the other equipment supports HDCP.

• Check whether the output format of the connected player (HDMI

FORMAT) matches the supported input format of connected monitor equipments.

• The AVR-4306 does not play HDMI audio signals.

• The HDMI audio signals are not output from the connected monitor device.

• Set the HDMI audio playback setting at the “HDMI In Assign” settings to “AMP”.

• Set the HDMI audio playback setting at the “HDMI In Assign” settings to “TV”.

—

—

3

3

3

—

3

22

71

20

20

71

71

Power has turned off and the power indicator is flashing red.

• The set’s internal temperature has risen and the protection circuit has been activated.

• Put the AVR-4306 in a wellventilated place.

• Turn off the power, then wait for the set to fully cool off before turning the power back on.

• Check the connections of all the speaker cables.

• The core wires of the speaker cables are touching each other or the AVR-4306’s rear panel, activating the protection circuit.

• AVR-4306 is malfunctioning.

• Turn off the power and contact a

DENON customer service center.

Sound is only produced from the center speaker.

• You are playing a monaural source

(TV, AM radio broadcast, etc.) in the DOLBY/DTS SURROUND mode.

• When playing monaural sources, select a surround mode other than

DOLBY/DTS SURROUND mode.

7

7

7

7

36, 37

105

Specifications

Troubleshooting

Symptom Cause Measures

“CHECK ANTENNA” is displayed in the XM mode.

• AVR-4306’s XM terminal and the

XM Connect-and-Play antenna is not properly connected.

• Check that the connection are correct.

“NO SIGNAL” is displayed in the XM mode.

• The signal cannot be received.

• Reposition your XM Connect-and-

Play antenna.

“OFF AIR” is displayed in the XM mode.

• The selected channel is not currently broadcasting.

• Select the another channel.

Page

21

42

42, 43

Receiving only XM channels 0 and 1.

• The XM Tuner is not activated.

• Contact XM Radio.

42

Specifications

2

Audio section

• Power amplifier

Rated output: Front:

130 W + 130 W (8

Ω

/ohms, 20 Hz ~ 20 kHz with 0.05 % T.H.D.)

170 W + 170 W (6

Ω

/ohms, 1 kHz with 0.7 % T.H.D.)

Center:

130 W (8

Ω


170W (6

Ω


Dynamic power:

Output terminals:

Surround (A, B):

130 W + 130 W (8

Ω


170 W + 170 W (6

Ω


Surround Back:

130 W + 130 W (8

Ω


170 W + 170 W (6

Ω


150 W x 2 ch (8

Ω

/ohms)

220 W x 2 ch (4

Ω

/ohms)

Front, Center, Surr. Back 6 ~ 16

Ω

/ohms

Surround: A or B 6 ~ 16

Ω

/ohms

A + B 8 ~ 16

Ω

/ohms

• Analog

Input sensitivity / input impedance: 200 mV / 47 k

Ω

/kohms

Frequency response: 10 Hz ~ 100 kHz: +0, –3 dB (DIRECT mode)

S/N:

Distortion:

Rated output:

• Digital

D/A output:

102 dB (DIRECT mode)

0.005% (20 Hz ~ 20 kHz) (DIRECT mode)

1.2 V

Rated output — 2 V (at 0 dB playback)

Total harmonic distortion — 0.008 % (1 kHz, at 0 dB)

S/N ratio — 102 dB

Dynamic range — 100 dB

Digital input: Format — Digital audio interface

• Phono equalizer (PHONO input — REC OUT)

Input sensitivity:

RIAA deviation:

2.5 mV

±1 dB (20 Hz to 20 kHz)

S/N:

Rated output / Maximum output:

Distortion factor:

74 dB (A weighting, with 5 mV input)

150 mV / 8 V

0.03% (1 kHz, 3 V)

106

2

Video section

• Standard video terminals

Input / output level and impedance: 1 Vp-p, 75

Ω

/ohms

Frequency response: 5 Hz ~ 10 MHz — +0, –3 dB

• S-Video terminals

Input / output level and impedance: Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75

Ω

/ohms

C (color) signal — 0.286 Vp-p, 75

Ω

/ohms


• Color component video terminal

Input / output level and impedance: Y (brightness) signal — 1 Vp-p, 75

Ω

/ohms

P

B

/C

B signal — 0.7 Vp-p, 75

Ω

/ohms

P

R

/C

R signal — 0.7Vp-p, 75

Ω

/ohms


2

Tuner section

[FM]

(note: µV at 75

Ω

/ohms, 0 dBf = 1 x 10 –15 W)

87.5 MHz ~ 107.9 MHz Receiving Range:

Usable Sensitivity:

50 dB Quieting Sensitivity:

1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)

MONO 1.6 µV (15.3 dBf)

STEREO

MONO

23 µV (38.5 dBf)

77 dB S/N (IHF-A):

STEREO

Total Harmonic Distortion (at 1 kHz): MONO

STEREO

72 dB

0.15%

0.3%

2

General

Power supply:

Power consumption:

Maximum external dimensions:

Mass:

2

Remote control unit (RC-1024)

Batteries:

External dimensions:

Mass:

[AM]

520 kHz ~ 1710 kHz

18 µV

AC 120 V, 60 Hz

8.0 A

1 W Max (Standby)

434 (W) x 171 (H) x 429 (D) mm (17-3/32” x 6-47/64” x 16-57/64”)

18.5 kg (40 lbs 12.6 oz)

LR6/AA Type (two batteries)

63 (W) x 238 (H) x 31 (D) mm (2-31/64” x 9-3/8” x 1-7/32”)

190 g (Approx. 6.7 oz) (including batteries)

* For purposes of improvement, specifications and design are subject to change without notice.

2

List of preset codes / Liste de codes préréglés

DVD

3D Lab 40539

Acoustic Solutions 40713, 40730, 41242

Advent 41016

AEG

AFK

40770, 40790

41051

Afreey

Aim

Airis

Aiwa

Akai

40698

40699, 40778, 40833, 41165

41250

40533, 40641

40690, 40705, 40770, 40790, 40884,

40899, 41089, 41115

40699

41051

Akira

Akura

Alba

Alco

Allegro

40539, 40672, 40695, 40699, 40713,

40717, 40730, 40783, 41051

40790

40869

Amitech

Amphion Media Works

40770, 40784, 40850

Amstrad

40872

40713

AMW

Ansonic

Apex

Apex Digital

Arianet

Aspire Digital

Audiosonic

Audiovox

40872

40774, 40831

40672, 41061

40672, 40717, 40755, 40794, 40796,

40797, 40830, 41004, 41020, 41056,

41061, 41100

40770

41168, 41407

Awa

Axion

B & K

40690, 41265

40717, 40790, 41041, 41071, 41072,

41121, 41122

40730, 40872

40730, 41071, 41072

40655, 40662

Celestial

Centrex

Centrum

CGV

Changhong

Cinea

Cineral

Cinetec cineULTRA

CineVision

Citizen

Classic

Basic Line

Baze

Bellagio

Black Diamond

Blaupunkt

Blue Parade

Blue Sky

Boghe

Boman

Brainwave

Brandt

Broksonic

Bush

40713

41165

41004

40698, 40713, 40833, 40884

40717

40571

40651, 40672, 40695, 40713, 40769,

40778, 40804

41004

40783

40770, 41115

40503, 40651

40695, 40868

40516, 40672, 40690, 40695, 40699,

40713, 40717, 40730, 40778, 40831,

40833, 40884, 41051, 41165

C-Tech 40798

Cambridge Soundworks

Cat

CAVS

CCE

40690

40699, 41087

41057

40730

41020

40672, 41004

40713

41115

40627, 41061

40831

40730

40713

40699

40833, 40869, 40876

41277

40730, 41730

1

PRESET CODE

Clatronic

Clayton

Coby

40672, 41165

40713

40730, 40770, 40778, 40852, 41086,

Compacks

Conia

41107, 41115, 41165, 41177, 41351

40826, 41265

40516, 40672, 40798, 40852, 41004

Continental Edison 40768, 40831

Craig

Crown

Curtis Mathes

Cybercom

CyberHome

40831

40690, 40769, 40770, 41115

41087

40831

40816, 40874, 41023, 41024, 41117,

41129

41074

40651, 40774

Cydectin

Cytron

D-Vision

Daenyx

Daewoo

41115

40872

40705, 40770, 40784, 40833, 40869,

40872, 41169, 41172, 41234, 41242

Daewoo International 40872

Dansai

Dantax

40770, 40783, 41115

40539, 40713, 40790, 41089

Daytek

Dayton

DCE

DEC

Decca

Denon

Denver

40872

40872

40831

40774, 40778

40770, 41115

40490, 40634, *[41470], 41634

40699, 40778, 41107, 41165, 41353,

41359

Desav

Desay

40770

40800, 41407

Diamond

Dick Smith Electronics

40651, 40768, 40790

Digihome

40833, 41730

40713

digiRED

Digitor

Digitrex

DIGIXmedia

DiK

Disney

DiViDo

DK Digital

DMTech

Dragon

DSE

Dual

Durabrand

DVD2000

DVX

ECC

Electrohome

Elfunk

Elin

Ellion

Elta

Emerson

Encore

Enterprise

Enzer

EuroLine

Fenner

Ferguson

Finlux

Fintec

Firstline

Fisher

Funai

Gateway

40717

40651, 40690

40672, 41056, 41100

40826

40774, 40831

40675, 41270

40705

40831

40783

40831

40833, 41730

40651, 40713, 40730, 40783, 40790,

40831, 41068, 41085

40713, 40831, 41003, 41127

40521

40768

40730

40770, 40784

40850

40770

40850

40672, 40690, 40770, 40850, 41051,

41115

40591, 40675, 40705, 40816, 40821,

41268

40698

40591

40770, 40784

41115

40651, 40769

40651

40591, 40672, 40741, 40770, 40783,

41165

40784, 41169

40651, 40713, 40869

40670

40675, 40695, 41334

41073, 41077, 41158

GE

General Electric

Global Solutions

Go Video

Go Vision

GoldStar

Goodmans

GPX

Gradiente

Gran Prix

Grandin

Greenhill

Grundig

Grunkel

GVG

H & B

H&B

Hanseatic

Harman/Kardon

HDT

Hen

Hher

Hitachi

Hiteker

Home Electronics

Home Tech

Humax

Hyundai

I-Lo iLo

Initial

Integra

IRT

40522, 40717, 40815

40717

40768

40715, 40741, 40744, 40783, 40833,

40869, 41044, 41075, 41099, 41144,

41158, 41304, 41730

41071, 41072

40591, 40741

40651, 40690, 40713, 40730, 40783,

40790, 40833, 41004, 41730

40699, 40769

40651

40831

40672, 40713

40717

40539, 40651, 40670, 40695, 40705,

40713, 40790, 41004, 41730

40770

41169

40850

40713, 40850

40741, 40783

40582, 40702

40705

40713

40651, 40713, 40826, 40831

40573, 40664, 40695, 40713, 41247

40672, 40872

40730

41107

40646

40768, 40783, 40850

41348

41348

40717, 40839

40571, 40627, 41634

40783

2

PRESET CODE jWin

Karcher

Kawasaki

Kendo

Kennex

Kenwood

Kiiro

KLH

KLH Digital

Konka

Koss

Landel

Lasonic

Lawson

Lenco

ISP

Jaton

JBL

Jeken

Jensen

Jepssen

JMB

JNC

JSI

JVC

Lenoxx

Lexia

LG

Lifetec

Limit

LiteOn

Loewe

Logix

Lumatron

40695

41078

40702

40699

41016

41250

40695

40672

41423

40503, 40539, 40558, 40623, 40867,

41164

41049, 41051

40783

40790

40699, 40713, 40831

40713, 40770

40490, 40534

40770

40717, 40790, 41020, 41149

40717

40711, 40719, 40720, 40721

40651, 40896, 41423

40826

40798, 41173

40768

40651, 40699, 40713, 40770, 40774,

40778, 41165

40690, 41127

40699, 40768

40591, 40741, 40790, 40801, 40869,

40036

40651, 40831

40768

41058, 41158, 41416, 41440

40511, 40539, 40741

40705, 40783

40705, 40741, 40833, 41115

Lunatron

Luxman

Luxor

Magnasonic

Magnavox

Magnex

Malata

Manhattan

Marantz

Mark

Marquant

Matsui

Maxim

MBO

MDS

Mecotek

Medion

MEI

Memorex

Metronic

Metz

Micromedia

Micromega

Microsoft

Microstar

Minato

Minax

Minerva

Minoka

Minowa

Mintek

Mirror

Mitsubishi

Mizuda

Momitsu

40741

40573

40713, 41004, 41730

40651, 40769

40503, 40539, 40646, 40675, 40713,

40821

41165

40782, 41159

40705, 40713

40539

40713

40770

40651, 40672, 40695, 40713, 40884,

41004, 41730

40713, 40872

40690, 40730, 41730

40778

40770

40630, 40651, 40770, 40774, 40783,

40820, 40831

40790

40695, 40831, 41270

40690

40525, 40571, 40713

40503, 40539

40539

40522

40831

40752

40713

40705

40770

41165

40717, 40839

40752

40521, 40713, 41403, 41521

40770

41082

MTlogic

Mustek

Mx Onda

NAD

Naiko

Narita

NEC

Nesa

Nevir

NextBase

NexxTech

Nintaus

Norcent

41265

40730, 41730

40651

40591, 40692, 40741

40770, 41004

41115

40591, 40692, 40785, 40869, 41404

40717

40770, 40831

40826

41402

41051

40872, 41003, 41107, 41265

Nordmende

Noriko

Nu-Tec

Okano

Olidata

Omni

Onix

Onkyo

40774, 40831

40752

40516

40752

40672

40690, 40698, 40778, 40833

40672, 40852

40503, 40627, 40792

Oopla

Optimus

41158

40525

OptoMedia Electronics

40896

Orion

Oritron

Ormond

Otic

P&B

Pacific

Packard Bell

40695

40651

40713

40826

40770

40695, 40713, 40768, 40774, 40790,

40804, 40831

40770

Palladium

Palsonic

Panasonic

40695

40672, 40852

40490, 40503, 40703, 41362, 41462,

41490, 41762

3

PRESET CODE

Panda

Philco

Philips

Phonotrend

Pioneer

Plu2

Pointer

Polaroid

Polk Audio

Portland

Powerpoint

Powtek

Prima

Prinz

Prism

Proline

Proscan

Proson

Prosonic

ProVision

Qwestar

Radionette

RCA

REC

Recco

Red Star

Reoc

Resonance

Revoy

Rio

RJTech

Roadstar

Ronin

Rotel

40717

40690, 40790

40503, 40539, 40646, 40675, 40854,

41158, 41260, 41267, 41354

40672, 40699, 41165

40490, 40525, 40571, 40631

40850

40784

41020, 41061, 41086

40539

40770

40872

40852

41016

40831

40705

40651, 40672, 40833, 41004

40522

40713

40752

40699, 40778

40651

40741, 40869

40522, 40571, 40717, 40769, 40790,

40822, 41022, 41132

40490

40698

40770, 41003

40752, 40768

40651

40699

40869

41360

40690, 40699, 40713, 40730, 40833,

41051

40872

40558, 40623

Rowa

Saba

Sabaki

Saivod

Sakyno

Salora

Sampo

Samsung

Sansui

Sanyo

Scan

ScanMagic

Schaub Lorenz

Schneider

Schwaiger

Scientific Labs

Scott

SEG

Semp

Sensory Science

Shanghai

Sharp

Sharper Image

Sherwood

Shinco

Shinsonic

Silva

Silva Schneider

Singer

Skantic

Skymaster

Slim Art

Slim Devices

SM Electronic

40516, 40717, 40823, 40872, 41004

40651, 40769

40798

40831

40768

40741

40698, 40752

40490, 40573, 40744, 40820, 40899,

41044, 41075

40695, 40768, 40784

40670, 40695, 40873

40705, 40850

40730

40770, 41115

40539, 40651, 40705, 40713, 40774,

40783, 40790, 40804, 40831

40752

40768, 40798

40651, 40672, 40797

40713, 40768, 40798, 40872, 40884

40503

41158

40672

40630, 40675, 40713, 40752, 41256

41117

40633, 40717, 40741, 40770, 41043,

41077

40717

40533, 40839

40831

40831

40690, 40768

40539, 40713, 41003

40730, 40768

40784

40533

40690, 40730, 40768

Technics

Technika

Technisson

Technosonic

Techwood

Tedelex

Telefunken

Teletech

Tensai

Smart

Sonai

Sonashi

Sonic Blue

Sony

Soundmaster

Soundmax

Soundwave

Sova

Spectra

Standard

Star Cluster

Strong

Sungale

Sunkai

Sunstech

Superscan

Supervision

SVA

Sylvania

Symphonic

Synn

Tandberg

Tatung

Teac

40705, 40713

40755

40831

40783, 40869, 41099

40533, 40573, 40864, 41033, 41431,

41533

40768

40768

40783

41122

40872

40651, 40768, 40831

40768

40713

41074

40770, 40850

40831

40821

40768

40672, 40717, 40860, 41105

40630, 40675, 40821, 41268

40675

40768

40713

40770

40516, 40571, 40692, 40695, 40717,

40741, 40768, 40790, 40809, 40833,

41051

40490, 40703

40768, 40770, 40831, 41115, 41165

41115

40730, 41051, 41115

40692, 40713

40690, 40768, 41004

40770, 40790, 40833

40713, 40768

40651, 40690, 40770

4

PRESET CODE

Terapin

Tevion

Theta Digital

Thomson

Tokai

41031

40651, 40768, 40798, 40833

40571

40522

40698, 40784, 40790

Tokaido

Toshiba

40698

40503, 40695, 41045, 41154

Trans Continens 40826

TRANS-continents 40826, 40831, 40872

Transonic

Tredex

Trio

TYT

40672, 40730, 41165

40800, 40803, 40804

40770, 40784

40705

Umax

United

40690

40672, 40695, 40768, 40826, 40852,

41115, 41165

Universal Multimedia 40768

Universum

Urban Concepts

US Logic

V

40591, 40713, 40741, 40869

40503

40839

41064

Venturer

Vestel

Vieta

VInc

Vizio

Vocopro

Voxson

Walkvision

40790

40713

40705

41064, 41226

41064, 41226

41027

40690, 40730, 40774, 40831

40717

Welkin

Wellington

Wesder

Wharfedale

Wilson

Windsor

Windy Sam

WIZE

40831

40713

40699

40698, 40752, 40768, 40790

40831

40713

40573

41115

Xbox

Xenius

XLogic

XMS

Xoro

Yakumo

Yamada

Yamaha

Yamakawa

Yukai

Zenith

Zeus

Zoece

40522

40651, 40790

40768, 40798

40770

41173, 41250

41004, 41056

40872, 41004, 41056, 41158

40490, 40539, 40545, 40646

40872

40730, 41730

40503, 40591, 40741, 40869

40784

41265

Digitrex

DSE

Funai

Gateway

Go Video iLo

JVC

LG

LiteOn

Loewe

Magnavox

Mitsubishi

Mustek

NEC

Panasonic

DVDR

Apex Digital

Aspire Digital

41056

41168

Coby

CyberHome

41086

41129

Denon


40490

41730

41056

41730

40675, 41334

41073, 41158

40741, 41158, 41304, 41730

41348

41164

40741

41158, 41416, 41440

40741

40646

41403

41730

41404

40490

VCR

ABS

Accent

Admiral

Adventura

Adyson

Aiko

Aim

Aiwa

Philips

Pioneer

Polaroid

RCA

Samsung

Sensory Science

Sharp

Sony

Sylvania

Zenith

40646, 41158

40631

41086

40522

40490

41158

40675

41033, 41431

40675

40741

Akai

Akashi

Akiba

Akura

Alba

Alienware

Allstar

America Action

American High

Amoisonic

Amstrad

Anam

Anam National

Anitech

21972

20072

20048, 20209, 20479

20000

20072

20278

20209, 20278, 20642

20000, 20032, 20037, 20124, 20209,

20315, 20348, 20479

20037, 20041, 20081, 20175, 20240,

20315, 20348, 20642

20072

20072

20072

20000, 20072, 20081, 20209, 20278,

20315, 20348

21972

20081

20278

20035

20479

20000, 20072, 20278

20037, 20162, 20226, 20240, 20278

20162, 20226, 21562

20072

5

PRESET CODE

Ansonic

Apelsound

Aristona

ASA

Asha

Asuka

Audiosonic

Audiovox

Awa

Baird

Basic Line

Beaumark

Beko

20000

20209

20081

20037, 20081

20240

20037, 20038

20072, 20278

20037, 20278

20037, 20043, 20278, 20642

20000, 20041, 20104

20046, 20072, 20104, 20278

20240

20104

Bell & Howell

Bestar

Black Diamond

Black Panther

Blaupunkt

Blue Sky

Bush

20104

20278

20081, 20642

20278

20081, 20162, 20226

20037, 20072, 20209, 20278, 20348,

20642

20072 Bondstec

Brandt

Brandt Electronic

20041, 20320

20041

Brandt Electronique 20041

Brinkmann 20209, 20348

Broksonic 20002, 20121, 20184, 20209, 20348,

20479, 21479

20000, 20072, 20081, 20209, 20278,

20315, 20348, 20642

Calix

Canon

Carena

Carrefour

Carver

Casio

Cathay

CCE

20037

20035

20209

20045

20081

20000

20278

20072, 20278

CGE

Changhong

Cimline

Cineral

Citizen

Clatronic

Colt

Condor

Craig

Crown

Curtis Mathes

Cybernex

CyberPower

Cyrus

Daewoo

20000

20048, 20081

20072

20278

20037, 20278, 21278

20000, 20072

20072

20278

20037, 20047, 20072, 20240

20037, 20072, 20278

20035, 20041, 20060, 20162, 21035

20240

21972

Dansai

Daytron

De Graaf

Decca

Deitron

20081

20045, 20046, 20104, 20209, 20278,

20642, 21278

20072, 20278

20278

20042, 20046, 20048, 20081, 20104

20000, 20067, 20081, 20209, 20348

20278

Dell

Denko

Denon

Diamant

21972

20072

20042

20037

Diamond


20209, 20348

Digitor

20642

20642

DirecTV

Domland

DSE

Dual

Dumont

Durabrand

Dynatech

Elbe

Elcatech

20739

20209

20642

20000, 20041, 20081, 20278, 20348

20000, 20081, 20104

20038, 20039

20000

20038, 20278

20072

Electrohome

Electrophonic

Elin

Elsay

Elta

Emerex

Emerson

ESC

Ferguson

Fidelity

Finlandia

Finlux

Firstline

Fisher

Flint

Frontech

Fuji

Fujitsu

Fujitsu General

Funai

Galaxis

Garrard

Gateway

GE

GEC

General

General Technic

Genexxa

Gessen

Go Video

GoldHand

20037

20037

20240

20072

20072, 20278

20032

20000, 20002, 20035, 20037, 20043,

20045, 20072, 20121, 20184, 20209,

20240, 20278, 20294, 20479, 21278,

21479

20240, 20278

20000, 20041, 20278, 20320

20000, 20072, 20240, 20278, 20432

20000, 20037, 20042, 20043, 20046,

20048, 20081, 20104, 20226

20000, 20042, 20081, 20104, 20315

20037, 20043, 20045, 20072, 20209,

20278, 20348

20046, 20047, 20104

20209, 20348

20072

20033, 20035

20000, 20045

20037

20000, 21333

20278

20000

21972

20035, 20048, 20060, 20209, 20226,

20240, 20320, 20807, 21035, 21060

20081

20045

20348

20104

20278

20432

20072

6

PRESET CODE

GoldStar

Goodmans

GPX

Gradiente

Graetz

Granada

Grandin

Gronic

Grundig

20037, 20038, 20209, 20225, 20226,

20348, 21237

20000, 20037, 20072, 20081, 20209,

20278, 20348, 20642

20037

20000

20041, 20104, 20240

20000, 20037, 20042, 20046, 20048,

20081, 20104, 20226, 20240

20000, 20037, 20072, 20209, 20278

20104

20072, 20081, 20226, 20320, 20347,

20348

Haaz

Hanseatic

Haojie

Harley Davidson

Harman/Kardon

Harwood

HCM

Headquarter

20348

20037, 20038, 20081, 20209

20240

20000

20038, 20081

20072

20072

20046

Hewlett Packard

Hher

HI-Q

Hinari

Hischito

Hitachi

21972

20278, 20642

20047

20041, 20072, 20240, 20278

20045

*[20000], 20037, 20041, 20042, 20046,

20081, 20089, 20240, 20040

20081 Hornyphon

Howard Computers 21972

HP 21972

Hughes Network Systems

20042, 20739

Humax

Hush

Hypson iBUYPOWER

20739

21972

20000, 20037, 20072, 20209, 20278

21972

Irradio

ITT

ITV

JBL

Jensen

JMB

Joyce

JVC

Kaisui

Kambrook

Karcher

KEC

Kendo

Kenwood

KIC

Kimari

Kioto

KLH

Kneissel

Kodak

Kolin

Kolster

Korpel

Imperial

Ingersoll

Inno Hit inotech

Interbuy

Interfunk

Internal

International

Intervision

IR

20000

20209, 20240

20072, 20432

20278

20072

20081, 20104

20278

20037, 20278, 20642

20000, 20209, 20278

20041, 20042, 20045, 20047, 20072,

20081, 20104, 20209, 20226, 20240,

20348

20072, 20081

20041, 20046, 20104, 20240

20037, 20278

20278

20041

20209, 20348

20000

20041, 20045, 20067, 20081, 21008,

21283

20072

20037

20081, 20278

20037, 20278

20072, 20209, 20278, 20315, 20348,

20642

20038, 20041, 20067

20000

20047

20348

20072

20037, 20209, 20278, 20348

20035, 20037

20041, 20043

20209

20072

Kuba Electronic

Kyoto

Lenco

Leyco

LG

Lifetec

Linksys

Lloyd's

Loewe

Logik

Lux May

Luxor

LXI

M Electronic

Magnasonic

Magnavox

Magnin

Magnum

Manesth

Marantz

Mark

Marta

Mastec

Master's

Matsui

Matsushita

Media Center PC

Medion

MEI

Melectronic

Memorex

20047

20072

20278

20072

20037, 20038, 20042, 20045, 20209,

21237

20209, 20348

21972

20000

20037, 20081, 20162, 21562

20072, 20209, 20240

20072

20043, 20046, 20047, 20048, 20104,

20315

20037

20000, 20038

20278, 21278

20000, 20035, 20039, 20081, 20149,

20642, 21781

20240

20642

20045, 20072, 20081, 20209

20035, 20038, 20081, 20209

20000, 20278

20037

20642

20278

20209, 20240, 20278, 20348

20035, 20162, 20226

21972

20209, 20348, 20642

20035

20000, 20037, 20038

20000, 20035, 20037, 20039, 20046,

20047, 20048, 20104, 20162, 20209,

20240, 20348, 20479, 21237

7

PRESET CODE

Memphis

Metronic

Metz

MGA

MGN Technology

Micormay

Micromaxx

Microsoft

Mind

Minolta

Mitsubishi

Nordmende

Northgate

Novatronic

20072

20081

20037, 20081, 20162, 20226, 20347,

21562

20043, 20240

20240

20348

20209, 20348

21972

21972

20042

20000, 20041, 20043, 20048, 20067,

20081, 20642, 20807

Motorola

MTC

Multitec

Multitech

Murphy

Myryad

NAD

Naiko

20035, 20048

20000, 20240

20037

20000, 20072, 20278

20000

20081

20104

20642

National 20162, 20226, 20240

Nebula Electronics 20033

NEC 20035, 20037, 20038, 20041, 20048,

20067, 20104, 20209, 20278

Neckermann

Nesco

Neufunk

Newave

20081

20072

20209

20037

Nikkai

Nikko

Niveus Media

Noblex

Nokia

20072, 20278

20037

21972

20240

20041, 20042, 20046, 20048, 20081,

20104, 20240, 20278, 20315

20041, 20067, 20320

21972

20209

Nu-Tec

Oceanic

Okano

Olympus

Onida

Onimax

Onkyo

Optimus

Orbit

Orion

Osaki

Osume

Otake

Otto Versand

Pacific

Packard Bell

Palladium

Palsonic

Panasonic

Pathe Cinema

Pathe Marconi

Penney

Pentax

Perdio

Philco

Philips

Phoenix

Phonola

Pilot

20209

20000, 20041, 20046, 20048, 20081,

20104

20072, 20209, 20278, 20315, 20348

20035, 20226

20162

20642

20222

20037, 20048, 20104, 20162, 20432,

21062

20072

20002, 20121, 20184, 20209, 20348,

20479, 21479

20000, 20037, 20072

20072

20209

20081

20000, 20348, 20642

21972

20037, 20041, 20072, 20209, 20315,

20348

20000, 20037, 20072, 20642

20035, 20162, 20225, 20226, 20614,

20616, 21035, 21062, 21308, 21562

20043

20041

20035, 20037, 20038, 20042, 20240,

21035, 21237

20042

20000, 20209

20000, 20035, 20038, 20072, 20209,

20226, 20479

20000, 20035, 20081, 20226, 20616,

20618, 20739

20278

20081

20037

Qisheng

Quarter

Quartz

Quasar

Quelle

Radialva

Radiola

Radionette

RadioShack

Radix

Randex

Rank

Rank Arena

RCA

Pioneer

Polk Audio

Portland

Prinz

Profitronic

Proline

Proscan

Prosonic

Protec

Protech

ProVision

Pulsar

Pye

Realistic

Reoc

ReplayTV

Rex

RFT

Ricavision

Roadstar

20042, 20067, 20081, 20162, 21562

20081

20278

20000

20081, 20240

20000, 20278, 20320, 20642

20060, 21060

20278

20072

20081, 20278

20278

20039

20000, 20081

20060

20046

20046

20035, 20162, 20278, 21035

20081

20037, 20048

20081

20037

20000, 20037

20037

20037

20041

20041

20000, 20035, 20042, 20048, 20060,

20149, 20226, 20240, 20320, 20432,

20807, 20880, 21035, 21060

20000, 20035, 20037, 20046, 20047,

20048, 20104

20348

20614, 20616

20041

20072

21972

20037, 20072, 20081, 20240, 20278

8

PRESET CODE

Scott

Sears

Seaway

SEG

SEI

Seleco

Semp

Sentra

Serie Dorada

Sharp

Shinco

Shintom

Shivaki

Shogun

Siemens

Siera

Silva

Silver

Royal

Runco

Saba

Saisho

Salora

Sampo

Samsung

Sanky

Sansui

Sanyo

Saville

SBR

Schaub Lorenz

Schneider

20072

20039

20041, 20067, 20278, 20320

20209, 20348

20043, 20046, 20104

20037, 20048

20045, 20240, 20432, 20739, 21014

20039, 20048

20000, 20041, 20067, 20072, 20209,

20348, 20479, 21479

20046, 20047, 20048, 20067, 20104,

20159, 20209, 20240, 20348, 21330

20240, 20278

20081

20000, 20041, 20104, 20315, 20348

20000, 20037, 20042, 20072, 20081,

20240, 20278, 20348,20642

20043, 20045, 20121, 20184

20000, 20035, 20037, 20042, 20046,

20047, 20104, 21237

20278

20072, 20081, 20240, 20278, 20642

20081

20037, 20041

20045

20072

20037

20037, 20048, 20209, 20807

20000

20072, 20104

20037

20240

20037, 20046, 20081, 20104, 20320,

20347

20081

20037

20278

Singer

Sinudyne

Smaragd

Sonic Blue

Soniko

Sonitron

Sonneclair

Sonolor

Sontec

Sonwa

Sony

Soundwave

Ssangyong

Stack 9

Starlite

Stern

STS

Sunkai

Sunstar

Suntronic

Sunwood

Supra

Sylvania

Symphonic

Systemax

T+A

Tagar Systems

Taisho

Tandberg

Tandy

Tashiko

Tatung

Tchibo

TCM

Teac

20045, 20072, 20348

20081, 20209

20348

20614, 20616

20072

20104

20072

20046

20037

20642

20000, 20032, 20033, 20035, 20636,

21232, 21295, 21972

20037, 20209, 20348

20072

21972

20037

20278

20042

20209, 20278, 20348

20000

20000

20072

20037, 20240, 20278, 20348

20000, 20035, 20043, 20081, 21781

20000

21972

20162

21972

20209

20278

20000, 20104

20000, 20037, 20048, 20081, 20240

20000, 20041, 20043, 20045, 20048,

20067, 20081, 20209, 20348

20348

20348

20000, 20037, 20041, 20072, 20278,

20642

Totevision

Touch

Towada

Tradex

Triad

Uher

Ultravox

Unitech

United

Universal

Telestar

Teletech

Tenosal

Tensai

Tevion

Texet

Thomas

Thomson

Thorn

Tivo

TMK

Tokai

Topline

Toshiba

Tec

Tech Line

Technics

TechniSat

Teco

Tedelex

Teknika

Teleavia

Telefunken

20081

20278

20240

20278

20240

20348

20209

20072

20072

20035, 20081, 20162, 20226

20209

20035, 20037, 20038, 20041, 20048

20037, 20209, 20348, 20642

20000, 20035, 20037

20041

20041, 20067, 20209, 20240, 20278,

20320, 20642

20037

20000, 20072, 20278

20072

20000, 20072, 20278

20209, 20348, 20642

20278

20000

20041, 20060, 20067, 20278, 20320

20037, 20041, 20104

20618, 20636, 20739, 21503

20240

20037, 20072

20348

20041, 20042, 20043, 20045, 20067,

20081, 20209, 20432, 20845, 21008,

21145, 21289, 21323, 21503, 21972

20037, 20240

21972

20072

9

PRESET CODE

Universum

Vector

Vector Research

Victor

Video Concepts

Video Technic

Videomagic

Videosonic

Viewsonic

Villain

Voodoo

Wards

20000, 20037, 20081, 20104, 20209,

20240, 20315, 20348

20045

20038

20041, 20067, 21283

20045

20000

20037

20240

21972

20000

21972

20000, 20033, 20035, 20038, 20039,

Watson

Wharfedale

20042, 20045, 20046, 20047, 20048,

20060, 20072, 20081, 20149, 20240

20081, 20642

20642

White Westinghouse 20072, 20209, 20278

World 20348

XR-1000

Yamaha

20000, 20035, 20072

20038, 20041

Yamishi

Yokan

Yoko

Yoshita

Zenith

ZT Group

ZX

20072, 20278

20072

20037, 20240

20072

20000, 20033, 20039, 20209, 20479,

21479

21972

20209, 20348

TV

888

A-Mark

A.R. Systems

Abex

Accent

Acura

10264, 10412

10003

10374, 10455

10032

10009

10009

Akashi

Akiba

Akira

Akito

Akura

Alaron

Alba

Addison

Admiral

Advent

Adventura

Adyson

AEA

AEG

Agashi

AGB

Agef

Aiko

Aim

Aiwa

Akai

Albatron

10092, 10108, 10653

10087, 10093, 10163, 10264, 10363,

10463

10761, 10783, 10815, 10817, 10842

10046

10032, 10216, 10217

10037

10606

10216, 10217

10516

10087

10009, 10037, 10092, 10216, 10217,

10264

10045, 10208, 10264, 10339, 10374,

10412, 10455, 10606, 10706, 10753,

10805

10163, 10701, 10705, 10848

10009, 10030, 10035, 10037, 10060,

10072, 10163, 10178, 10191, 10208,

10216, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10361,

10363, 10371, 10377, 10412, 10433,

10473, 10480, 10516, 10548, 10556,

10581, 10602, 10606, 10631, 10648,

10672, 10696, 10698, 10702, 10706,

10714, 10715, 10729, 10745, 10753,

10812, 11537

10009

10037, 10218, 10282, 10455

10037, 10418, 10556

10037

10009, 10037, 10218, 10264, 10282,

10359, 10412, 10668, 10714, 11037

10179, 10216

10009, 10036, 10037, 10163, 10216,

10218, 10235, 10247, 10355, 10371,

10418, 10443, 10487, 10581, 10668,

10714, 11037

10700, 10843

Aolingpu

Aolinpike

Apex

Apex Digital

Arcam

Archer

Ardem

Aristona

ART

ASA

Albiral

Alfide

Alkos

Allorgan

Allstar

Ambassador

America Action

Amplivision

Ampro

Amstrad

Anam

Anam National

Andersson

Anex

Anglo

Anhua

Anitech

Ansonic

AOC

10102

10672

10035

10206, 10217

10037

10177

10180

10217, 10370

10751

10009, 10037, 10171, 10177, 10218,

10264, 10362, 10371, 10412, 10433,

10516, 10581, 10648, 11037

10003, 10009, 10180, 10250, 10628,

10700, 10861

10055, 10250, 10650

11163

10037, 10421

10009, 10264

10051

10009, 10037, 10282

10009, 10104, 10247, 10292, 10370,

10428, 10556, 10668, 11437

10003, 10009, 10018, 10019, 10030,

10052, 10060, 10092, 10093, 10108,

10178, 10179, 10180, 10185, 10451,

10628

10858

10264, 10412

10156, 10765

10748, 10765, 10767, 10879

10216, 10217

10003

10037, 10486, 10556, 10633, 10714,

10715

10037, 10556

11037

10070, 10087, 10104

10

PRESET CODE

Asberg

Asora

Astra

Asuka

ATD

Atlantic

Audinac

Audiosonic

Audioton

Audiovox

Autovox

Aventura

Awa

Axxent

Axxon

Baihe

Baile

Baird

Bang & Olufsen

Baohuashi

Baosheng

Barco

Basic Line

Bauer

Baur

Baysonic

Bazin

Beaumark

Beijing

10102

10009

10037, 10264

10217, 10218, 10264

10698

10001, 10206, 10320

10180

10009, 10037, 10109, 10217, 10218,

10264, 10337, 10370, 10374, 10428,

10486, 10714, 10715

10217, 10264, 10428, 10486

10003, 10092, 10180, 10451, 10623,

10802, 10875

10087, 10206, 10217, 10247, 10544

10171

10009, 10011, 10036, 10037, 10108,

10157, 10216, 10217, 10264, 10374,

10412, 10512, 10606, 10698, 10785

10009

10714

10009, 10264, 10412

10001, 10009, 10374, 10661

10072, 10073, 10193, 10208, 10217

10087, 10565

10264, 10412

10009, 10817

10380

10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10282,

10339, 10374, 10455, 10556, 10668,

11037, 11163

10805

10009, 10037, 10146, 10361, 10455,

10512, 10535, 10544

10180

10217

10178

10001, 10009, 10208, 10226, 10264,

10374, 10412, 10482, 10661, 10812,

10817, 10821

Beko

Belcor

Bell & Howell

BenQ

Beon

Berthen

Best

Bestar

Bestar-Daewoo

Binatone

Black Diamond

Black Panther

Black Strip

Blaupunkt

10037, 10292, 10370, 10418, 10428,

10486, 10606, 10714, 10715, 11037

10019

10016, 10154

11032, 11756

10032, 10037, 10418

10668

10337, 10370, 10421

10037, 10370, 10374

10374

10217

10556, 10587, 10614, 11037

10102

Blue Sky

10035

10036, 10170, 10191, 10195, 10200,

10455, 10535

10037, 10218, 10282, 10455, 10487,

10499, 10556, 10606, 10668, 10714,

10715, 11037, 11254, 11437

10282

10247

Blue Star

Bondstec

Boots

Bosch

Boxlight

BPL

10009, 10217

10320

10752, 10893

10037, 10208, 10282

Bradford

Brandt

10180

10109, 10287, 10335, 10560, 10625,

10714

Brandt Electronique 10335

Brinkmann

Brionvega

Britannia

Brockwood

Broksonic

Bruns

BTC

10037, 10418, 10486, 10668

10087, 10362

10216, 10217

10019

10003, 10180, 10236, 10463

10087

10218

Bush

Caihong

Cailing

Caishi

Candle

Canton

Carad

Carena

Carnivale

Carrefour

Carver

Cascade

Casio

Cathay

CCE

Celebrity

Celera

Celestial

Centrex

Centrum

Centurion

Century

CGE

CGM

Changcheng

Changfei

Changfeng

Changhai

Changhong

10009, 10036, 10037, 10163, 10208,

10217, 10218, 10235, 10264, 10282,

10355, 10361, 10363, 10371, 10374,

10486, 10487, 10556, 10581, 10614,

10617, 10661, 10668, 10698, 10714,

11037

10009, 10817

10748

10891

10030, 10046, 10056, 10186

10218

10037, 10610, 10668, 11037

10037, 10455

10030

10036, 10070

10054, 10170

10009, 10037

10037, 10163

10037

10037, 10217

10000

10765

10767, 10819, 10820, 10821

10698, 10780, 10826

11037

10037

10087, 10238, 10247

10247, 10370, 10418

11037

10001, 10009, 10051, 10264, 10374,

10412, 10661, 10817

10009, 10374, 10817

10264, 10412, 10696, 10753, 10817

10009, 10817

10009, 10156, 10264, 10508, 10765,

10767, 10783, 10817, 10820, 10821,

10848, 11156

11

PRESET CODE

Chengdu

Ching Tai

Chun Yun

Chunfeng

Chung Hsin

Chungfeng

Chunsun

Cimline

Cinema

Cineral

Citizen

10009, 10817

10003, 10009, 10092, 10179

10000, 10003, 10009, 10092, 10179,

10180, 10700, 10843

10009, 10264

10036, 10053, 10108, 10180

10412

10009, 10817

10009, 10218

10672

10092, 10451

10030, 10039, 10046, 10056, 10060,

10092, 10186, 10280

City

Clairtone

Clarion

Clarivox

Clatronic

Clayton

CMS

CMS Hightec

10216

10217

Commercial Solutions 10047, 11447

Concerto 10056

Condor

Conia

Conic

Conrac

Conrowa

Contec

10009

10185

10180

10037, 10070, 10337

10009, 10037, 10102, 10217, 10218,

10247, 10264, 10320, 10370, 10371,

10556, 10579, 10606, 10648, 10714

11037

10009, 10037, 10163, 10247, 10264,

10282, 10320, 10370, 10411, 10418

10754, 10821

10032

10808

10009, 10145, 10156, 10264, 10412,

10696, 10698, 10753, 11156, 11170

10009, 10036, 10037, 10157, 10180,

10185, 10216, 10264, 10698

Continental Edison 10109, 10287, 10487

Cosmel

Craig

10037, 10337

10180

Crosley 10054, 10087, 10247

Dainichi

Dansai

Dansette

Dantax

Datsura

Dawa

Daytek

Dayton

Daytron

Dayu

De Graaf

DEC

Decca

Deitron

Dell

Crown

Crown Mustang

CS Electronics

CTC

Curtis Mathes

CXC

Cybertron

D-Vision

D.Boss

Daewoo

10009, 10037, 10039, 10053, 10180,

10208, 10339, 10359, 10370, 10412,

10418, 10421, 10486, 10487, 10579,

10606, 10672, 10712, 10714, 10715

10672

10216, 10218, 10247

10247

10016, 10030, 10039, 10047, 10051,

10054, 10056, 10060, 10093, 10145,

10154, 10166, 10451, 10466, 10702,

11147, 11347

10180

10218

10037, 10556

10037

10003, 10009, 10019, 10030, 10032,

10037, 10039, 10056, 10092, 10108,

10154, 10170, 10178, 10180, 10217,

10218, 10264, 10374, 10451, 10499,

10556, 10623, 10628, 10634, 10661,

10672, 10700, 10706, 10865, 10880,

11661

10216, 10218

10009, 10032, 10035, 10036, 10037,

10208, 10216

10412

10606, 10714, 10715

10208

10009

10037, 10706

10009

10019, 10374

10374, 10661

10208, 10363, 10548

10418, 10556, 10698, 10785, 10795

10037, 10072, 10217, 10516, 10621

10037, 10374

11080, 11178, 11264, 11454

Digital Life

Digitex

Digitor

Digix

DiK

Dixi

DL

Domeos

Domland

Dongda

Donghai

Dream Vision

DSE

Dual

Denko

Denon

Denstar

Denver

DER

10264

10145, 10511, 10576

10628

10037, 10587, 10606

10193

Desmet

Diamant

Diamond

10009, 10037, 10087, 10320

10037

10009, 10037, 10216, 10264, 10371,

10672, 10698, 10706, 10825


10698

Digatron

Digiline

10037

10105, 10668

10780, 10872, 10891

10820

10037, 10499, 10698, 11724

10880

10037

10009, 10037, 10087

10037, 10780, 10848, 10872, 10891

10037, 10668, 11037

10394

10009

10009

11704

10698

10037, 10217, 10259, 10394, 10531,

10544, 11137

10217 Dual Tec

Dumont

Dunai

Durabrand

DVX

Dwin

Dynatron

E-Elite

10017, 10019, 10070, 10087, 10102

10544

10003, 10171, 10178, 10180, 10463,

11034, 11463

10891

10720, 10774

10012, 10037

10218

12

PRESET CODE

Emperor

Envision

Enzer

Epson

Erres

ESA

ESC

Ether

Etron

Eurofeel

EuroLine

Euroman

Europa

Elbe-Sharp

Electroband

Electrograph

Electrohome

Elekta

Elektra

Elin

Elite

Elman

Elta

Emco

Emerson

Ecco

ECE

Edison-Minerva

Elbe

10706, 10773

10037

10487

10217, 10238, 10259, 10292, 10361,

10362, 10411, 10435, 10516, 10610,

10630

10516

10000, 10185

11755

10381

10009, 10037, 10264, 10282

10017, 11661

10009, 10037, 10104, 10163, 10361,

10548

10218, 10320

10102

10009, 10264

10247

10019, 10037, 10038, 10039, 10070,

10087, 10154, 10163, 10171, 10177,

10178, 10179, 10180, 10185, 10236,

10247, 10280, 10282, 10320, 10361,

10370, 10371, 10463, 10486, 10623,

10714

10282

10030, 10813

10753

10833, 10840

10012, 10037

10171, 10812

10037, 10217

10003, 10009, 10030

10001, 10009

10217, 10264

10556

10037, 10216, 10217, 10264, 10421

10037

Europhon

Evolution

Expert

Exquisit

Fagor

Feilang

Feilu

Feiyan

Feiyue

Fenner

Ferguson

Fidelity

Filsai

Finlandia

Finlux

Firstar

Firstline

Fisher

Flint

Forgestone

Formenti

Formenti-Phoenix

10102, 10163, 10217, 10516

11756

10206

10037, 10247

10037

10009

10009, 10817

10264, 10412

10009, 10817

10009, 10374

10037, 10053, 10073, 10109, 10193,

10238, 10287, 10335, 10443, 10548,

10560, 10625

10037, 10163, 10171, 10193, 10216,

10264, 10361, 10363, 10371, 10412,

10512, 10531, 10544

10217

10045, 10072, 10163, 10208, 10287,

10346, 10359, 10363,10548

10037, 10070, 10072, 10087, 10102,

10104, 10105, 10179, 10217, 10346,

10411, 10473, 10480, 10492, 10516,

10556, 10606, 10621, 10629, 10631,

10714, 10715, 10808

10009, 10236

10009, 10037, 10072, 10163, 10208,

10216, 10217, 10235, 10238, 10247,

10321, 10361, 10374, 10411, 10531,

10544, 10556, 10587, 10668, 10714,

10808, 11037

10036, 10045, 10047, 10072, 10087,

10104, 10154, 10157, 10159, 10208,

10217, 10370, 10544, 10555

10037, 10072, 10218, 10264, 10455,

10610

10193

10037, 10087, 10216, 10320

10216, 10320

Fortress

Fraba

Friac

Frontech

Fujitsu

Fujitsu General

Funai

Furi

Futronic

Future

Futuretech

Galaxi

Galaxis

Ganxin

Gateway

GBC

GE

GEC

Geloso

General

General Technic

Genesis

Genexxa

Gericom

Giant

Gibralter

Gintai

10093

10037, 10370

10009, 10037, 10102, 10370, 10421,

10499, 10610

10009, 10163, 10217, 10247, 10264,

10363

10009, 10037, 10072, 10163, 10179,

10186, 10206, 10217, 10259, 10361,

10683, 10809, 10853

10009, 10163, 10206, 10217, 10683

10171, 10179, 10180, 10264, 10412,

10556, 10668, 11977

10145, 10264, 10412, 10817

10264, 10795

10037

10180

10037, 10361

10037, 10370

10817

11755, 11756

10009, 10218, 10374

10021, 10027, 10030, 10047, 10051,

10055, 10092, 10093, 10109, 10135,

10178, 10180, 10282, 10287, 10335,

10451, 10560, 10625, 11147, 11347,

11447, 11454

10037, 10072, 10163, 10217, 10361,

10516

10009, 10363, 10374

10186, 10590

10009

10009, 10037

10009, 10163, 10218

10808, 10865

10217

10017, 10019, 10030

10721

13

PRESET CODE

Go Video

Goldfunk

GoldHand

GoldStar

Gooding

Goodmans

Gorenje

GPM

Gradiente

Graetz

Gran Prix

Granada

Grandin

Gronic

Grundig

Grunpy

H&B

Haaz

Haier

10886

10668

10216

10001, 10019, 10030, 10032, 10037,

10039, 10056, 10109, 10154, 10163,

10178, 10216, 10217, 10247, 10290,

10361, 10363, 10377, 10455, 10556,

10606, 10714, 10715

10487

10009, 10032, 10035, 10036, 10037,

10072, 10179, 10217, 10218, 10235,

10264, 10335, 10360, 10371, 10374,

10451, 10480, 10487, 10499, 10516,

10556, 10560, 10579, 10630, 10634,

10661, 10668, 10714, 10808, 11037,

11163

10037, 10370, 10421

10218

10053, 10056, 10170

10037, 10163, 10339, 10361, 10371,

10487, 10714

10648

10037, 10045, 10072, 10108, 10146,

10163, 10208, 10217, 10226, 10339,

10356, 10359, 10363, 10473, 10516,

10548, 10560

10009, 10037, 10163, 10282, 10320,

10374, 10455, 10579, 10610, 10668,

10714, 10715, 11037

10163

10036, 10037, 10070, 10191, 10195,

10370, 10443, 10487, 10535, 10556,

10587, 10630, 10672, 10706

10179, 10180

10808

10706

10037, 10264, 10508, 10587, 10698,

10768, 10779, 10869, 10891, 11034

Haihong

Haiyan

Halifax

Hallmark

Hammerstein

Hampton

Hanimex

Hankook

Hanseatic

Hantarex

Hantor

Harley Davidson

Harman/Kardon

Harsper

Harvard

Harwa

Harwood

Havermy

HCM

Helios

Hello Kitty

Hema

Hemmermann

Hher

Higashi

Hikona

Himitsu

Hinari

Hisawa

10009

10264, 10412, 10817

10217

10178

10060, 10264

10216, 10217

10218

10019, 10030, 10056, 10178, 10180,

10628

10009, 10037, 10087, 10195, 10217,

10282, 10320, 10361, 10377, 10394,

10428, 10499, 10544, 10556, 10634,

10661, 10714, 10808, 11137

10009, 10037, 10102, 10238, 10516,

10865

10037

10179

10054

10865

10180

10773

10009, 10032, 10037, 10412, 10487

10093

10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264,

10282, 10412, 10418, 10606

10865

10451

10009, 10217

10544

10714

10216

10218

10180, 10628, 10779

10009, 10036, 10037, 10179, 10218,

10235, 10264, 10355

10218, 10282, 10455, 10610, 10714

Hisense

Hit

Hitachi

Hitachi Fujian

Hitsu

HMV

Home Electronics

Hongmei

Hongyan

Hornyphon

Hoshai

Hua Tun

Huafa

Huanghaimei

Huanghe

Huanglong

Huangshan

Huanyu

Huaqiang

Huari

Huodateji

Hyper

10009, 10037, 10145, 10156, 10208,

10264, 10508, 10512, 10556, 10696,

10706, 10748, 10753, 10780, 10821,

10848, 11156, 11170

10087

10009, 10016, 10019, 10027, 10030,

10032, 10036, 10037, 10038, 10039,

10044, 10056, 10072, 10092, 10105,

10108, 10109, 10145, 10151, 10156,

10157, 10163, 10165, 10178, 10179,

10186, 10194, 10217, 10356, 10359,

10361, 10363, 10381, 10473, 10480,

10481, 10492, 10499, 10508, 10512,

10516, 10548, 10576, 10578, 10629,

10634, 10719, 10744, 10884, 11037,

11045, 11137, *[11145], 11156, 11170,

11225, 11256, 11481, 11576

10037, 10108, 10145, 10150, 10499,

10828

10009, 10218, 10455, 10610

10087, 10193

10606

10009, 10093, 10264, 10817, 10848

10264, 10412, 10817

10012, 10037

10282

10009

10009, 10145

10009

10009, 10817

10009

10009, 10264, 10412, 10817

10216, 10264, 10374, 10817, 10848

10264, 10412

10145, 10264, 10412

10051

10009, 10216, 10217, 10247

14

PRESET CODE

IR

Hypson

Hyundai

Iberia

ICE

ICeS

Imperial

Imperial Crown

Indiana

Infinity

InFocus

Ingelen

Ingersoll

Inno Hit

Innova

Innowert

Inteq

Interbuy

Interfunk

Internal

Intervision

10037, 10264, 10282, 10411, 10455,

10621, 10668, 10714, 10715, 11037

10037, 10698, 10706, 10753, 10849,

10865

10037

10216, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10371,

10556

10216, 10218

10037, 10163, 10247, 10361, 10370,

10418, 10630

10001, 10009, 10264, 10374, 10412,

10661

10037

10054

10752

10163, 10361, 10487, 10610, 10714

10009

10009, 10037, 10072, 10102, 10217,

10247, 10282, 10290, 10516

10037

10865

10017

10037, 10247, 10264, 10512

10012, 10037, 10087, 10163, 10200,

10247, 10275, 10361,10512

10037

10009, 10037, 10102, 10163, 10217,

10218, 10247, 10264, 10282, 10370,

10377, 10394, 10455, 10486, 10487

10011, 10012, 10032, 10035, 10036,

10037, 10045, 10070, 10072, 10073,

10087, 10093, 10102, 10104, 10105,

10108, 10109, 10146, 10157, 10163,

10191, 10193, 10194, 10195, 10200,

10206, 10216, 10217, 10226, 10235,

10238, 10247, 10287, 10290, 10291,

10292, 10320, 10356, 10359, 10361,

10363, 10370, 10374, 10512, 10516,

10535, 10556

ITV

Janeil

JBL

JCB

Jean

Jensen

Jiahua

JiaLiCai

Jinfeng

Jinhai

Jinque

Jinta

Jinxing

JMB

JNL

Jocel

Jubilee

Juhua

JVC

Kaige

Kaisui

Irradio

IRT

Isukai

ITC

ITS

ITT

ITT Nokia

10218, 10247, 10290, 10371

10451, 10628, 10698, 11661

10037, 10218, 10282, 10455

10217, 10320

10216, 10264, 10371

10163, 10179, 10193, 10208, 10339,

10346, 10361, 10473, 10480, 10544,

10548, 10610

10163, 10179, 10208, 10339, 10346,

10361, 10363, 10473, 10480, 10548,

10606, 10610

10037, 10264, 10374

10046

10054

10000

10003, 10009, 10036, 10051, 10092,

10156, 10179, 10236, 10721

10698, 10706, 10761, 10815, 10817

10051

10009, 10264, 10412

10051, 10208, 10226, 10817

10848

10009, 10264, 10412, 10817

10009, 10264, 10412, 10848

10009, 10037, 10054, 10145, 10156,

10264, 10556, 10698, 10817, 10821

10443, 10499, 10556, 10634

10698

10712

10556

10264, 10412, 10817

10036, 10053, 10093, 10193, 10218,

10371, 10418, 10463, 10508, 10576,

10606, 10653, 10683, 10731, 11253

10009, 10264, 10412, 10817

10009, 10037, 10216, 10217, 10218,

10282, 10455

Kolin

Kolster

Kongque

Konichi

Kambrook

Kamp

Kangchong

Kangli

Kangyi

Kapsch

Karcher

Kathrein

Kawa

Kawasho

Kaypani

KB Aristocrat

KEC

Kendo

Kennedy

Kennex

Kenwood

KIC

Kingsley

Kiota

Kioto

Kiton

KLH

KLL

Kloss

Kneissel

10217, 10264, 10556

10216

10848

10001, 10009, 10264, 10374, 10661,

10817

10009, 10264, 10412

10104, 10163, 10206, 10361

10037, 10163, 10264, 10282, 10421,

10606, 10610, 10714

10556

10371

10216

10052

10163

10180

10037, 10102, 10235, 10247, 10362,

10411, 10428, 10512, 10610, 11437

10206, 10435

11037

10019, 10030

10217

10216

10001, 10371, 10455

10054, 10556, 10706, 10785

10037, 10668

10765, 10767

10037

10024, 10046

10037, 10238, 10259, 10292, 10362,

10374, 10411, 10435, 10499, 10556,

10610

10036, 10053, 10108, 10150, 10180

10102, 10247

10009, 10264, 10817

10009

Kontakt

Korpel

Korting

Kotron

Koyoda

Kraking

Kriesler

KTV

Kuaile

Kulun

Kunlun

Kyoshu

Kyoto

L&S Electronic

LaSAT

Leader

Lecson

Legend

Lemair

Lenco

Levis Austria

Leyco

LG

Konka

Liesenk & Tter

Liesenkotter

Lifetec

10037, 10218, 10282, 10371, 10418,

10587, 10628, 10632, 10638, 10641,

10703, 10707, 10714, 10725, 10726,

10754, 10779, 10795, 10816, 10817

10487

10037

10087, 10320, 10421

10264

10009

10238

10012

10030, 10039, 10180, 10185, 10217,

10280

10009, 10264, 10412

10009

10051, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10374,

10661, 10817

10032, 10264, 10412, 10418

10032, 10163, 10216, 10217

10714, 10808

10486

10009

10037

10009

10032, 10411

10037, 10163, 10374, 10721, 11037

10037

10037, 10072, 10264, 10579

10001, 10003, 10019, 10030, 10032,

10037, 10038, 10039, 10056, 10060,

10108, 10178, 10442, 10556, 10606,

10644, 10698, 10700, 10714, 10715,

10856, 11148, 11178, 11265, 11637,

10033

10037

10012, 10037

10037, 10218, 10264, 10374, 10668,

10714, 11037, 11137, 11437

15

PRESET CODE

Lihua

Lloyd's

Lloytron

Loewe

Logik

Logix

Longjiang

Luma

Lumatron

Lux May

Luxman

Luxor

LXI

M & S

M Electronic

Madison

Magnadyne

Magnafon

Magnavox

Magnum

Majestic

Manesth

Manhattan

Marantz

Marelli

10817

10001, 10009, 10264

10032

10037, 10087, 10136, 10292, 10362,

10512, 10516, 10633, 10655

10001, 10009, 10011, 10016, 10060,

10193, 10264, 10418, 10698, 10706,

10773, 10880

10668

10264, 10412, 10817

10206, 10259, 10362, 10363, 11037

10217, 10361

10009, 10037, 10556, 10581

10056, 10412, 10579

10163, 10179, 10194, 10208, 10217,

10290, 10356, 10361, 10363, 10473,

10480, 10548, 10631, 11037, 11163

10047, 10054, 10154, 10156, 10178

10054

10009, 10037, 10104, 10105, 10109,

10163, 10217, 10287, 10346, 10374,

10480

10037

10087, 10102, 10247, 10516, 10544

10102, 10216, 10516

10020, 10024, 10030, 10036, 10037,

10054, 10096, 10179, 10186, 10187,

10386, 10706, 10729, 10780, 10802,

11254, 11454

10037, 10606, 10648, 10714, 10715

10016

10035, 10037, 10163, 10217, 10235,

10264, 10320, 10361

10037, 10163, 10668, 11037

10030, 10037, 10054, 10412, 10556,

10704, 10854, 10855, 11154

10087

Mark

Master's

Masuda

Materin

Matsui

Matsushita

Matsuviama

Maxam

Maxdorf

Maxent

MCE

Mediator

Medion

Megapower

Megas

Megatron

MEI

Meile

Melectronic

Memorex

Memphis

Mercury

Mermaid

10037, 10217, 10486, 10714, 10715

10499

10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264,

10371

10208, 10858

10009, 10011, 10035, 10036, 10037,

10072, 10163, 10177, 10191, 10195,

10208, 10217, 10235, 10335, 10355,

10363, 10371, 10433, 10443, 10455,

10487, 10516, 10544, 10556, 10579,

10629, 10714, 11037

10051, 10250, 10650

10587

10264

10773

11755

10009

10012, 10037

10037, 10512, 10556, 10668, 10698,

10714, 10808, 10880, 11037, 11137,

11437

10700

10610

10003, 10145, 10178

10185, 11037

10264, 10412, 10817, 10848

10009, 10037, 10104, 10105, 10163,

10191, 10195, 10216, 10217, 10247,

10346, 10361, 10374, 10411, 10480,

10492, 10512, 10634, 10661, 10714

10009, 10016, 10056, 10060, 10150,

10154, 10178, 10179, 10250, 10463,

11037

10337

10001, 10009, 10060, 10264, 10473,

10556, 10706

10037

16

PRESET CODE

Merritt

Metronic

Metz

10163

10625

10037, 10070, 10087, 10275, 10367,

10388, 10447, 10535, 10587, 10668,

10746

MGA

Micromaxx

Microstar

MicroTEK

Midland

10019, 10030, 10037, 10150, 10178,

10218, 10374

10037, 10630, 10668, 10808, 11037

10808

10706

10017, 10032, 10039, 10047, 10051,

10135

10037 Minato

Minerva

Minoka

10070, 10108, 10487, 10516, 10535

10359, 10412

Minutz 10021

Mistral Electronics 10193

Mitsubishi 10019, 10030, 10036, 10037, 10056,

10087, 10093, 10108, 10150, 10154,

10178, 10179, 10180, 10208, 10236,

10250, 10381, 10512, 10535, 10556,

Mitsuri General

Mivar

Monaco

Monivision

Morgan's

Motorola

MTC

MTEC

MTlogic

Mudan

Multibroadcast

Multitec

10817, 10836, 10868, 11037, 11250

10163

10216, 10217, 10290, 10291, 10292,

10370, 10516, 10609

10009

10700, 10843

10037

10055, 10093

10019, 10030, 10056, 10060, 10163,

10185, 10216, 10361, 10370, 10512

10032

10714

10009, 10051, 10208, 10226, 10264,

10412, 10817

10193

10037, 10486, 10668, 11037

Murphy

Musikland

Myryad

NAD

Naiko

Nanbao

Nansheng

Naonis

NAT

National

NEC

NEI

Neovia

Nesco

Netsat

NetTV

Network

Neufunk

New Tech

Newave

Nicam

Nicamagic

Nikkai

Multitech

Neckermann

10009, 10037, 10102, 10180, 10216,

10217, 10247, 10264, 10363, 10486,

10556

10039, 10163, 10216

10037, 10218, 10247

10556

10156, 10178, 10361, 10866

10037, 10606

10009, 10264, 10412, 10848

10264, 10412, 10817

10363

10226

10051, 10055, 10208, 10226, 10508

10009, 10011, 10019, 10030, 10036,

10046, 10051, 10053, 10056, 10154,

10156, 10165, 10170, 10178, 10186,

10217, 10264, 10320, 10374, 10381,

10412, 10455, 10497, 10499, 10508,

10603, 10661, 10704, 10705, 10817,

10882, 11170, 11270, 11704

10037, 10087, 10163, 10191, 10200,

10247, 10320, 10363, 10370, 10411,

10418, 10512, 10556

10037, 10163, 10287, 10337, 10371

10865

10179, 10247

10037

11755

10032, 10337

10037, 10218, 10556, 10610, 10714

10217

10009, 10092, 10093, 10178, 10721

10544

10216

10009, 10032, 10035, 10036, 10037,

10072, 10216, 10217, 10218, 10264,

10337

Nikko

Nikon

Noblex

Nobliko

Nokia

Norcent

Nordic

Nordmende

Norfolk

Normerel

Noshi

Novak

Novatronic

NTC

Nu-Tec

Oceanic

Okano

Omega

Omni

On Command

Onimax

Onking

Onwa

Optimus

Optoma

Optonica

Orion

10030, 10092, 10178

10848

10154, 10180

10070, 10102, 10216

10109, 10163, 10179, 10208, 10320,

10339, 10346, 10359, 10361, 10374,

10473, 10480, 10548, 10606, 10610,

10631

10748, 10824

10217

10037, 10109, 10163, 10195, 10287,

10335, 10560, 10714

10163

10037

10018

10012, 10037

10037, 10105, 10374, 10531

10092

10037, 10455, 10698, 10706, 10820

10163, 10208, 10361, 10473, 10548

10009, 10037, 10370

10264

10264, 10698, 10706, 10780, 10826,

10872, 10891

10531

10714

10280

10102, 10180, 10218, 10371, 10433,

10581, 10602

10154, 10166, 10250, 10650

10887

10093, 10165

10011, 10037, 10177, 10179, 10235,

10236, 10264, 10320, 10321, 10355,

10412, 10443, 10463, 10516, 10531,

10544, 10556, 10606, 10655, 10714,

10880, 11463

17

PRESET CODE

Orline

Ormond

Orsowe

Osaki

Osio

Oso

Osume

Otto Versand

Pacific

Pael

Palladium

Palsonic

Panama

Panashiba

Panasonic

Panavision

Panda

Pathe Cinema

Pausa

Peng Sheng

Penney

Perdio

10037, 10218

10668, 11037

10516

10032, 10037, 10072, 10217, 10218,

10264, 10355, 10374, 10412, 10556

10290

10218

10032, 10036, 10037, 10072, 10157,

10218

10036, 10037, 10093, 10109, 10191,

10217, 10226, 10235, 10247, 10320,

10361, 10512, 10535, 10544, 10556

10037, 10556, 10714, 11037, 11137

10216

10037, 10247, 10363, 10370, 10411,

10418, 10630, 10655, 10714, 11137

10001, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10264,

10377, 10412, 10418, 10698, 10773,

10779

10037, 10217, 10247, 10264

10001

10037, 10051, 10054, 10055, 10108,

10163, 10208, 10226, 10250, 10361,

10367, 10508, 10516, 10548, 10650,

10853, 11310, 11410, 11650

10037, 10411

10009, 10051, 10208, 10226, 10264,

10412, 10508, 10698, 10706, 10780,

10817, 10821, 10826, 10848, 10891

10163, 10216, 10238, 10320, 10370

10009

10891

10003, 10018, 10019, 10021, 10027,

10030, 10032, 10039, 10047, 10051,

10056, 10060, 10135, 10156, 10178,

11347

10037, 10072, 10163, 10216, 10282,

10320

Phase

Philco

Philex

Philips

Phoenix

Phonola

Pilot

Pioneer

Pionier

Plantron

Playsonic

Polaroid

Polytron

Polyvision

Portland

Powerpoint

Prandoni-Prince

Premier

Prima

Princess

Princeton

10032

10019, 10020, 10030, 10032, 10037,

10054, 10056, 10087, 10092, 10096,

10145, 10178, 10180, 10186, 10247,

10370, 10418, 10451, 10463, 10628,

10774, 11661

10193, 10548

10000, 10009, 10012, 10017, 10019,

10020, 10024, 10027, 10030, 10032,

10037, 10051, 10054, 10056, 10080,

10087, 10092, 10108, 10178, 10186,

10187, 10191, 10193, 10200, 10238,

10361, 10374, 10423, 10556, 10690,

10721, 10772, 10774, 11154, 11454,

11756

10037, 10087, 10216, 10320, 10486

10012, 10037, 10080, 10087, 10193,

10216

10019, 10030, 10037, 10039, 10706,

10712

10011, 10037, 10038, 10109, 10163,

10166, 10170, 10287, 10361, 10423,

10428, 10486, 10512, 10679, 10760,

10866

10486

10009

10037, 10217, 10339, 10714, 10715

10765, 10865

10282, 10697

10697

10019, 10039, 10092, 10374

10037, 10487

10361, 10363, 10516

10037, 10264

10009, 10264, 10412, 10761, 10783,

10815, 10817

10698

10700, 10717

Proton

ProVision

Pulsar

Pye

Qingdao

Quadral

Qualcraft

Quasar

Quelle

Prinston

Prinz

Prism

Profex

Profex Fidelity

Profi

Profitronic

Proline

Proscan

Prosonic

Protech

Questa

R-Line

Radialva

Radiola

Radiomarelli

RadioShack

11037

10194, 10361, 10544

10051

10009, 10163, 10361, 10363, 10370

10102

10009

10037, 10102

10037, 10072, 10321, 10411, 10556,

10621, 10625, 10630, 10634

10047, 11347, 11447

10037, 10217, 10451, 10579, 10668,

10714

10009, 10037, 10102, 10163, 10180,

10217, 10247, 10264, 10337, 10418,

10486, 10668, 11037

10001, 10003, 10009, 10030, 10039,

10052, 10056, 10178, 10466, 10644

10037, 10556, 10714

10017, 10019

10012, 10037, 10087, 10193, 10374,

10412, 10556

10051, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10412,

10817

10218, 10418

10039

10009, 10051, 10055, 10165, 10247,

10250, 10650, 10865

10011, 10037, 10070, 10104, 10200,

10361, 10512, 10535, 10544, 10668,

11037

10032, 10036

10037, 10163

10218, 10337

10012, 10037, 10217, 10556

10037, 10087, 10516

10019, 10030, 10032, 10037, 10039,

10047, 10056, 10154, 10165, 10178,

10180

18

PRESET CODE

Radiotone

Rank Arena

RBM

RCA

Realistic

Recor

Rediffusion

Reflex

Relisys

Reoc

Revox

Rex

RFT

Rhapsody

Ricoh

Rinex

Roadstar

Robotron

Rover

Rowa

Rownsonic

Royal

Royal Lux

Runco

Ruyi

Saba

10009, 10037, 10264, 10412, 10428,

10579, 10648, 10668, 11037

10036, 10157, 10602, 10753

10070

10000, 10018, 10019, 10030, 10038,

10047, 10051, 10060, 10090, 10092,

10093, 10135, 10178, 10560, 10618,

10625, 10679, 10753, 11047, 11147,

11247, 11347, 11447, 11454, 11547

10019, 10030, 10032, 10039, 10056,

10154, 10165, 10178, 10180

10037, 10264, 10418

10036, 10346, 10361, 10548

10037, 10668, 11037

10865

10714

10037

10163, 10206, 10259, 10264, 10363,

10411

10037, 10072, 10087, 10264, 10370,

10428

10185, 10216

10037

10264, 10418, 10698, 10773

10009, 10037, 10218, 10264, 10282,

10418, 10668, 10714, 11037

10087

10036

10009, 10037, 10216, 10217, 10264,

10556, 10587, 10698, 10712, 10748,

10817

10163

10418, 10825

10335, 10412

10017, 10030, 10497, 10603

10817

10087, 10109, 10163, 10250, 10287,

10335, 10361, 10498, 10516, 10548,

10560, 10625, 10714

Saccs

Sagem

Saige

Saisho

Saivod

Saka

Sakyno

Salora

Salsa

Sambers

Sampo

Samsung

Samsux

Sandra

Sanjian

Sansei

Sansui

Santon

10238

10455, 10610

10009, 10817

10009, 10011, 10177, 10217, 10235,

10264, 10374, 10516, 10544, 10556

10037, 10668, 10712, 11037

10163

10455

10163, 10194, 10208, 10290, 10356,

10359, 10361, 10363, 10473, 10480,

10516, 10548, 10606, 10621, 10631

10335

10102, 10516

10009, 10030, 10032, 10036, 10039,

10052, 10092, 10093, 10154, 10171,

10178, 10650, 10700, 10721, 11755

10009, 10019, 10030, 10032, 10037,

10039, 10056, 10060, 10072, 10090,

10092, 10093, 10154, 10156, 10163,

10178, 10179, 10195, 10208, 10216,

10217, 10226, 10264, 10290, 10370,

10482, 10556, 10587, 10618, 10644,

10682, 10702, 10718, 10766, 10774,

10812, 10814, 10817, 10821, 11060

10039

10216, 10217

10264, 10412

10451

10037, 10264, 10371, 10412, 10455,

10463, 10587, 10602, 10655, 10698,

10706, 10714, 10727, 10729, 10861,

11537

10009

Sanyo

Sanyuan

SBR

Schaub Lorenz

Schneider

Scimitsu

Scotch

Scotland

Scott

Sears

Seaway

Seelver

SEG

SEI

Sei-Sinudyne

Seleco

Semivox

Semp

Sencora

Sentra

10011, 10036, 10045, 10072, 10088,

10104, 10108, 10145, 10146, 10154,

10156, 10157, 10159, 10180, 10208,

10216, 10217, 10264, 10280, 10339,

10370, 10381, 10412, 10486, 10508,

10544, 10555, 10556, 10721, 10799,

10893, 11154

10009, 10093, 10817

10012, 10037, 10193, 10556

10037, 10361, 10374, 10486, 10548,

10606, 10714

10012, 10037, 10070, 10163, 10217,

10218, 10247, 10259, 10361, 10371,

10394, 10544, 10556, 10648, 10668,

10714, 11037, 11137

10019

10178

10163

10019, 10178, 10179, 10180, 10236

10047, 10054, 10056, 10146, 10154,

10156, 10159, 10171, 10178, 10179

10556, 10634

11037

10009, 10036, 10037, 10102, 10163,

10216, 10217, 10218, 10264, 10362,

10487, 10634, 10668, 11037, 11163,

11437

10087, 10102, 10177, 10206, 10516,

10544

10037, 10087, 10102, 10206, 10516,

10544

10163, 10206, 10259, 10264, 10346,

10362, 10363, 10371, 10411, 10435

10180

10156, 11356

10009

10035

19

PRESET CODE

Serino

Shancha

Shanghai

Shaofeng

Sharp

Shen Ying

Shencai

Sheng Chia

Shenyang

Sherwood

Shintoshi

Shivaki

Shogun

Shorai

Show

Siarem

Siemens

Siera

Siesta

Signature

Silva

Silva Schneider

Silver

SilverCrest

Simpson

Singer

Sinotec

Sinudyne

10093, 10455, 10610

10264, 10412, 10817

10009, 10208, 10226, 10264, 10412,

10817, 10848

10145, 10817

10009, 10030, 10032, 10036, 10039,

10053, 10093, 10157, 10165, 10193,

10200, 10256, 10386, 10491, 10516,

10650, 10688, 10689, 10720, 10818,

10851, 11193

10003, 10009, 10092, 10179

10009, 10145, 10264, 10412

10009, 10093, 10179, 10236

10009, 10264, 10696, 10753, 10817

10009

10037

10037, 10178, 10374, 10443, 10451

10019

10179

10009, 10072, 10418, 10706

10087, 10102, 10516

10032, 10037, 10146, 10157, 10191,

10195, 10200, 10361, 10535

10012

10370

10016

10037, 10216, 10361, 10648

10037

10036, 10037, 10179, 10361, 10455,

10715

11037

10186, 10187

10009, 10087, 10102, 10163, 10335,

10362, 10371, 10433, 10435, 10548,

10698, 10706, 11537

10264, 10418, 10706, 10773

10087, 10102, 10177, 10206, 10235,

10516, 10544

Sliding

SLX

Smaragd

Soemtron

Solavox

Sole

Sonawa

Songba

Soniko

Sonitron

Sonoko

Sonolor

Sontec

Sony

Skantic

SKY

Skygiant

Skysonic

Skyworth

Sound & Vision

Soundesign

Soundwave

Sowa

Spectra

Spectricon

Squareview

Ssangyong

SSS

Stag

Staksonic

10356

10037, 10282

10180

10696, 10753

10009, 10037, 10264, 10696, 10698,

10727, 10748, 10753, 10805, 10817,

10825

10865

10512, 10668

10487

10865

10032, 10037, 10072, 10163, 10361,

10548

10813

10218

10009

10037

10208, 10217, 10339, 10370

10009, 10037, 10282

10163, 10208, 10282, 10361, 10548

10009, 10037, 10370

10000, 10011, 10036, 10037, 10053,

10080, 10093, 10102, 10111, 10145,

10150, 10156, 10157, 10170, 10250,

10353, 10650, 10834, 11100, 11505,

11651

10102, 10374

10178, 10179, 10180, 10186

10032, 10037, 10320, 10418, 10715

10036, 10051, 10060, 10092, 10156,

10178, 10226

10009

10003

10171

10009, 10032

10019, 10180

10032

10009

Standard

Starlite

Stenway

Stern

10009, 10037, 10217, 10218, 10320,

10374, 11037

10009, 10037, 10180, 10264

10218, 10282

10163, 10206, 10259, 10363, 10411

Strato 10009, 10037, 10264

Studio Experience 10843

Sunic Line

Sunkai

10037

10037, 10321, 10355, 10455, 10487,

Sunstar

Sunwood

Superla

Superscan

Supersonic

10531, 10610

10009, 10037, 10264, 10371, 10579

10037

10516

10864

10009, 10037, 10208, 10264, 10455,

10698, 10805

10009, 10037, 10216, 10218 SuperTech

Supervision

Supra

Supre-Macy

Supreme

Susumu

SVA

10264

10009, 10039, 10056, 10178

10046

10000

10218, 10287, 10335

10587, 10698, 10748, 10768, 10865,

10870, 10871, 10872

10455 Svasa

Swissline

Sylvania

Symphonic

Synco

10247

10020, 10030, 10054, 10096, 10171,

10381

10171, 10180

10000, 10036, 10060, 10092, 10093,

10178, 10451

10037

10216

Sysline

Sytong

T+A

Tacico

Tai Yi

Taishan

10447

10009, 10092, 10178, 10179

10009

10009, 10374, 10817

20

PRESET CODE

Tandberg

Tandy

Targa

Tashiko

Tatung

TCL

TCM

Teac

Tec

Tech Line

Techica

Technema

Technics

TechniSat

Technisson

Technol Ace

Technosonic

Techview

Techwood

Tecnimagen

Teco

Tedelex

10362, 10367, 10411

10039, 10072, 10093, 10163, 10217,

10218

10702

10032, 10036, 10092, 10146, 10163,

10216, 10217, 10359, 10363, 10650,

10721

10003, 10009, 10011, 10036, 10037,

10051, 10054, 10055, 10060, 10072,

10154, 10156, 10217, 10516, 10556,

10621, 10629, 11156, 11254, 11756

10412, 10698, 10706, 10727, 10826,

11537

10714, 10808

10009, 10037, 10170, 10171, 10178,

10217, 10247, 10264, 10282, 10412,

10418, 10455, 10512, 10544, 10556,

10668, 10698, 10706, 10712, 10714,

10721, 10755, 11037, 11437, 11724,

11755

10009, 10037, 10163, 10217, 10247,

10259, 10337, 10361

10037, 10668, 11437

10218

10320

10051, 10250, 10556, 10650

10037, 10163, 10556, 10655

10714

10179, 10264, 10374, 10412

10556

10847

10003, 10051, 10056, 11163

10556

10009, 10036, 10051, 10092, 10093,

10178, 10218, 10264, 10280, 10653

10009, 10037, 10208, 10217, 10264,

10418, 10556, 10606, 10706, 10726,

10891, 11537

Telefusion

Telegazi

Telemeister

Telesonic

Telestar

Teletech

Teleton

Televideon

Teleview

Tempest

Tennessee

Tensai

Tek

Teknika

Telecor

Telefunken

Tenson

Tera

Tesla

Tevion

Texet

ThemeScene

Thomson

Thorn

10009, 10264, 10706, 10795

10016, 10019, 10039, 10054, 10056,

10060, 10092, 10150, 10179, 10180,

10186

10037, 10394

10037, 10056, 10073, 10109, 10287,

10335, 10346, 10421, 10486, 10498,

10560, 10587, 10625, 10698, 10702,

10706, 10712, 10714, 10753, 10819,

10820, 10821

10037

10037, 10556

10320

10037

10009, 10037, 10412, 10556, 10579

10009, 10037, 10337, 10668, 11037

10036, 10163, 10186, 10206, 10217,

10259, 10363

10216, 10320

10037

10009, 10037, 10264, 10455, 10556

10037

10009, 10037, 10104, 10105, 10163,

10217, 10218, 10247, 10320, 10371,

10374, 10377, 10556, 10715, 11037

10009, 10320

10030, 10092, 10466

10037

10556, 10648, 10668, 10714, 10767,

11037, 11137

10009, 10216, 10217, 10218, 10374

10887

10037, 10109, 10287, 10335, 10560,

10625, 11447

10035, 10036, 10037, 10072, 10073,

10104, 10109, 10163, 10193, 10238,

10335, 10359, 10361, 10499, 10512,

10535

Thorn-Ferguson

Tiane

TMK

TML

TNCi

Tobishi

Tobo

Tokai

10073, 10193, 10238, 10499

10093, 10817

10056, 10177, 10178

11756

10017

10218

10009, 10264, 10412, 10748

10009, 10037, 10163, 10337, 10374,

10668, 11037

11037

10035

10218, 10282

10264, 10412

Tokaido

Tokyo

Tomashi

Tongguang

Tongtel

Tophouse

Toshiba

10587, 10780

10180

10009, 10035, 10036, 10060, 10070,

10093, 10102, 10109, 10145, 10154,

10156, 10191, 10195, 10217, 10264,

10381, 10412, 10508, 10556, 10618,

10644, 10650, 10714, 10718, 10821,

10832, 10845, 11156, 11256, 11265,

Tosonic

Totevision

Towada

Toyoda

Trakton

10009, 10037, 10264, 10412

10009, 10217, 10264

Trans Continens 10037, 10217, 10668, 11037

TRANS-continents 10621

Transonic

11356, 11508, 11656, 11704

10185

10039

10102, 10217, 10264

Triad

10009, 10037, 10264, 10418, 10455,

10512, 10587, 10698, 10712, 10780,

10858

10037, 10218, 10556

Trical

Trident

Tristar

Triumph

10157

10516

10193, 10218

10177, 10346, 10516, 10556

21

PRESET CODE

Tsoschi

Tuntex

TVS

TVTEXT 95

Uher

Ultravox

Unic

Unic Line

United

Universal

Universum

Univox

Utax

V2max

V7 Videoseven

V7Videoseven

Vector Research

Vestel

Victor

Videocon

Videologic

Videologique

Videomac

Videosat

Videotechnic

Videoton

Vidikron

Vidtech

Viewsonic

10282

10009, 10030, 10092

10463

10556

10037, 10206, 10320, 10374, 10418,

10480, 10486

10037, 10087, 10102, 10216, 10247

10163

10037, 10455

10037, 10606, 10714, 10715, 11037

10027, 10037

10009, 10011, 10032, 10036, 10037,

10070, 10104, 10105, 10146, 10157,

10163, 10170, 10177, 10191, 10200,

10217, 10247, 10264, 10290, 10346,

10361, 10362, 10370, 10411, 10418,

10421, 10473, 10480, 10492, 10512,

10535, 10544, 10556, 10618, 10631,

10668, 11037, 11437

10037, 10087, 10163, 10337

10163

10865

11755

10880

10030

10037, 10163, 10217, 10556, 10668,

11037, 11163

10036, 10053, 10250, 10650, 10653

10508

10216, 10218

10218

10009, 10264

10247

10217, 10320

10356

10054

10019, 10036, 10178

10724, 10857, 10864, 10885, 11755

Viking

VInc

Vision

Vistar

Vizio

Voxson

Waltham

Wards

10046

11756

10032, 10037, 10217, 10264, 10320

10206, 10361, 10548

10864, 10885, 11756

10087, 10163, 10178, 10363, 10418

10037, 10109, 10163, 10217, 10356,

10418, 10443, 10668, 11037

10000, 10016, 10017, 10018, 10019,

10020, 10021, 10024, 10027, 10030,

10047, 10051, 10054, 10055, 10056,

10060, 10080, 10096, 10111, 10135,

10154, 10156, 10165, 10166, 10178,

Warumaia

Watson

Watt Radio

Waycon

Wega

Wegavox

Weipai

Welltech

Weltblick

10179, 10180, 10186, 10187, 10866,

11147, 11156, 11347

10374, 10661

10009, 10037, 10218, 10320, 10394,

10579, 10668, 11037, 11437

10102, 10216, 10544

10156

10036, 10037, 10087

10037

10009

10714

10217, 10320

Westinghouse

Weston

10003, 10889

10037

Wharfedale 10037, 10264, 10556, 10706, 10861

White Westinghouse 10037, 10186, 10216, 10320, 10337,

Windsor

Windstar

Windy Sam

Wintel

World-of-Vision

Worldview

Xenius

10463, 10623

11037

10282, 10337

10556

10714

10880

10455

10634, 10661

Xiahua

Xianghai

Xiangyang

Xiangyu

Xihu

Xinaghai

Xingfu

Xinghai

Xinrisong

XLogic

XMS

Xoceco

Xrypton

Xuelian

Yamaha

Yamishi

Yapshe

Yingge

Yokan

Yoko

Yongbao

Yonggu

Yoshita

Youlanasi

Yousida

Yuhang

Zanela

Zanussi

Zenith

Zenor

ZhuHai

Zonda

ZX

10009, 10264, 10412, 10698, 10773,

10779, 10817

10009

10264, 10412

10009

10264, 10412, 10817

10412

10009

10264

10848

10698

10698

10779, 10785

10037

10848

10019, 10030, 10650, 10769, 10833,

10839

10217, 10282, 10455

10250

10009

10037, 10109

10009, 10037, 10216, 10217, 10218,

10247, 10264, 10339, 10421

10848

10009

10706

10817

10009, 10848

10009

10238

10206, 10264, 10363

10016, 10017, 10092, 10178, 10463

10208, 10339

10009, 10374

10003, 10698, 10779

10418

22

PRESET CODE

British Telecom

Cable & Wireless

Cabletenna

Cabletime

Cableview

Canal Plus

Century

Citizen

Clearmaster

ClearMax

Comcrypt

Comtronics

Contec

Coolmax

Cryptovision

Daeryung

Digeo

Digi

Director

Dumont

CABLE

ABC

ADB

Aichi Denshi

Alcatel

Allegro

Americast

00003, 00007, 00008, 00011, 00013,

00014, 00017, 00237

01063, 01269

01512

00896

00153, 00315

00899

Amstrad

Antronix

Archer

Auna

01222

00022

00022, 00153, 00797

00277, 01269

Austar

Bell & Howell

00012, 00276

00014

Bell South 00899

Birmingham Cable Communications

00276

00003

01068

00022

00448, 00665

00022

00443

00153

00153, 00315

00883

00883

00443

00040

00019

00883

00600

00008, 00277, 00477, 00877, 01877

01187

00637

00476

00637

DX Antenna

Eastern

Emerson

Everquest

Filmnet

Focus

Foxtel

France Telecom

Freebox

Fujitsu

Funai

Galaxi

Garrard

01500

00002

00797

00015, 00040

00443, 00619

00400

01222

00451, 00817, 00896

01482

01497

00019

00008

00153

GE

Gehua

00237

00476

Gemini 00015, 00797

General Instrument 00003, 00011, 00014, 00015, 00276,

GMI

Golden Channel

GoldStar

00476, 00810

00015, 00797

01063, 01110

00040, 00144

Goodmind

Hamlin

Hitachi

HyperVision

Hytex i3 Micro

Jasco

Jebsee

Jerrold

00797

00009, 00020, 00034, 00259, 00273

00011, 00014

00619

00007

01602

00015, 00153, 00315

00400

KNC

Leon

LG

Macab

Magnavox

Maspro

00003, 00011, 00012, 00014, 00015,

00276, 00476, 00810

00008

00015

00040, 00144

00817

00014

01510

Memorex

MNET

Moser

Motorola

Movie Time

Mr Zap

Mr. Zap

MS

Multichoice

Multitech

MultiVision

Myrio

00000

00019, 00443

00451

00276, 00476, 00810, 01106, 01187,

01254, 01376, 01483

00063

01112

01112

00015

00019, 00443

00883

00012

01602

NEC

Nokia

Noos

NSC

NTL

Oak

Ono

Optimus

Optus

Pace

01496

01569

00817

00063

00003, 00250, 00277, 01060, 01068

00007, 00019

01068

00021

Panasonic

Panther

Paragon

Philips

00276, 01060

00008, 00237, 01060, 01068, 01368,

01877

00000, 00008, 00021, 00040, 00107,

00443, 01488

00637

00000

00013, 00153, 00317, 00619, 00817,

Pioneer

01305

00144, 00533, 00877, 01500, 01877

Popular Mechanics 00400

Pulsar 00000

PVP Stereo Visual Matrix

00003

Quasar

Quiero

00000

00817

23

PRESET CODE

RadioShack

RCA

Recoton

Regal

Regency

00015, 00315, 00797, 00883

00021, 01256

00400

00020, 00259, 00273, 00279

00002

Rembrandt

Runco

Sagem

Salora

Samsung

Scientific Atlanta

00011

00000

00817, 01089, 01112

00000

00000, 00040, 00144, 01060

00008, 00017, 00237, 00277, 00477,

00877, 01510, 01877

01602 Sejin

Signal

Signature

SL Marx

Sony

Sprucer

Starcom

Stargate

Starquest

Sumitomo

Supercable

Supermax

Tadiran

Tandy

Tele Danmark

Tele+1

Telepiu

00015, 00040

00011

00040

01006, 01460

00021

00003, 00014, 00015

00015, 00040, 00797

00015

01500, 01504

00276

00883

00040

00258

01016

00443

00443

Teleview

Telewest

00040

01068, 01368

Thomson 01110, 01256

Time Warner cable 01877

Timeless

Tocom

Torx

Toshiba

00040

00012, 00013

00003

00000, 01509

Aegir

AGS

Aiwa

Akai

Akena

Alba

Aldes

Trans PX

TransACT

Tri-Vision

Tristar

TS

Tusa

TV86

Unika

United Artists

United Cable

Universal

US Electronics

V2

Videotron

Videoway

Viewmaster

Viewstar

Vision

Visionetics

Visiopass

Vortex View

Zenith

Zentek

SATELLITE

@sat

@Sky

ABsat

ADB

00153, 00276, 00315

01106

01257

00883

00003

00015

00063

00022, 00153

00007

00003

00022, 00153, 00191

00276

00883

00250

00250

00883

00063, 00258

00883

01064

00451

00883

00000, 00008, 00525, 00899

00400

01300

01334

00123, 00668, 00713, 00832

00642, 00887, 01259, 01367, 01473,

01491, 01492, 01493, 01494, 01495

00520

00668, 00710

01514

00200, 00515

00668

00421, 00455, 00515, 00613, 00713

00520

Allsat

Allsonic

Alltech

Allvision

Alpha

AlphaStar

Amitronica

Ampere

Amstrad

Anglo

Ankaro

AntSat

Anttron

Apollo

Arcon

Arcus

Arion

Armstrong

Arnion

ASA

Asat

ASCI

ASLF

AssCom

AST

Astacom

Aston

Astra

Astrastar

Astro

Athena

00200, 01017, 01043

00369

00713

01232, 01334, 01412

00668

00772

00713

00132, 00396, 00829

00132, 00243, 00345, 00396, 00501,

00675, 00689, 00713, 00742, 00795,

00847, 00863, 00882, 00885, 01113,

01175

00713

00369, 00692, 00713, 01279

01017, 01083

00421, 00613

00421, 00455

00692, 00834, 01043, 01075, 01205,

01279

01143

01205

00243

01300

00397

00200

00114, 01334

00713

00853

00321, 00351

00668, 00710

00142, 01261

00243, 00607, 00713

00548

00133, 00173, 00358, 00369, 00501,

00520, 00548, 00607, 00613, 00658,

01099, 01100, 01113

00668

24

PRESET CODE

Atsat

AtSky

Audioline

Audioton

Aurora

Austar

Avalon

Axiel

Axis

Beko

Bentley Walker

Best

01300

01334

01429

00613

00642, 00879

00497, 00642, 00863, 00879, 01173,

01259

00396

00668, 00710

00369, 00834, 00880, 01111

00455

01017

00369

Bestar

Black Diamond

Blaupunkt

Blue Sky

Boca

00243

01284

00173

00713, 00885

00132, 00243, 00713, 00794, 00829,

01232

00132, 00668, 00710

00692, 01294

Boston

Brainwave

British Sky Broadcasting

00847, 01175, 01847

Broco

BskyB

00713

00847, 01175

BT

Bubu Sat

Bush

BVV

Cambridge

Canal Digital

Canal Satellite

Canal+

CanalSatellite

CCE

Century

Channel Master

Chaparral

00515, 00668, 00710

00713

01284, 01471

00692

00501, 00515

00853

00853, 01339

00853

00853, 01339

00345

00856

00212

00053, 00209, 00216

Cherokee 00123, 00710, 01480

Chess

CityCom

00114, 00713, 01085, 01334

00115, 00299, 00607, 00818, 01075,

01176, 01232

Claasen Nachrichten 00520

Clark 00613

Clemens Kamphus 00396, 00834

CNS

CNT

01367

00520

Cobra

Colombia

Columbia

Columbus

00396

00132, 00668

00132

00668

Comag

Condor

Connexions

Conrad

Conrad Electronic

Cosat

Crossdigital

Crown

Cryptovision

Cyfra+

Cyrus

D-box

Daeryung

Daewoo

Daumling

Delfa

Deltasat

Dgtec

Digatron

Digena

Digenius

Digiality

Digipro

DigiQuest

DigitAll World

00132, 01232, 01412

00369, 00607

00396

00115, 00132, 00369, 00501, 00607

00607

00592

01109

00243

00455

01076

00200

00723, 00873

00396

00421, 00713, 01111, 01296

00794

00863

01075

01242, 01542

01294

01100

00299, 01161

00607

01105

00863

01227

Digiturk

DirecTV

01076

00099, 00247, 00392, 00566, 00639,

00724, 00749, 00819, 01076, 01108,

01109, 01142, 01377, 01392, 01414,

01442, 01443, 01444, 01609, 01639,

Discoverer

Discovery

Dish Network

Dish Network System

01640, 01749, 01856

00605

00668, 00710, 01480

00775

Dishpro

Distratel

00775, 01005, 01170, 01505, 01775

00775, 01005, 01505, 01775

00084, 00885, 01205, 01283

Distrisat

DMT

DNR

DNT

Dream Multimedia 01237, 01437, 01537, 01637

DST 00421

Dune

DX Antenna

00369

01530

Echostar

00200

01075

00692

00200, 00396

00159, 00167, 00269, 00280, 00396,

00454, 00610, 00668, 00713, 00775,

00853, 00871, 01005, 01086, 01170,

01200, 01323, 01409, 01467, 01477,

EIF

Einhell

Elap

Elsat

Elta

Emanon

Emme Esse eMTech

Engel

Eurieult

01505, 01775

00417

00132, 00243, 00421, 00501, 00692,

00713, 00794

00587, 00668, 00710, 00713

00713

00200, 00369, 00421

00421

00369, 00871

01214

00713, 01017

00084, 00136, 00417, 00882, 00885

25

PRESET CODE

Euro1

Eurocrypt

EuroLine

Europa

European

Europhon

Eurosat

Eurosky

Eurostar

Eutelsat

Exator

Expressvu

Fagor

Fenner

Ferguson

Fidelity

Finlandia

Finlux

Flair Mate

Force

Fortec Star

Foxtel

Fracarro

Freecom

Freesat

Fresat

FTEmaximal

Fuba

Fugionkyo

Galaxis

Galaxisat

01278

00455

01251

00501, 00607, 00863

00794

00132, 00299, 00607

00243

00114, 00115, 00132, 00243, 00299,

00369, 00501, 00607

00115, 00607, 00818, 00880, 00898

00713

00421, 00515, 00613

00775, 01775

00592

00157, 00369, 00605, 00668, 00713

00455, 00711, 01291

00501, 00675

00455

00397, 00455, 00573

00713

01101, 01194

01017, 01083, 01293

00455, 00497, 00720, 00879, 01162,

01173, 01176, 01356

00421, 00668, 00871

00173, 00421, 00501

00882

00885

00331, 00369, 00713, 00794, 00863,

01209, 01449

00115, 00173, 00299, 00369, 00396,

00417, 00421, 00573, 01161, 01214

01105

00115, 00369, 00592, 00692, 00834,

00853, 00863, 00879, 01101, 01111,

01557

00321

Gardiner

Garnet

GbSAT

GE

Gecco

00818

01075

01214

00566

01273, 01412

General Instrument 00869

GF 00834, 01043

GF Star

Globo

01043

01087, 01251

GOD Digital

GOI

Gold Box

Goldbox

00200

00775, 01775

00853

00292, 00853

Golden Interstar

Goldvision

Gooding

Goodmans

Gradiente

Granada

Grandin

Grocos

Grundig

Hanseatic

Hantor

Hanuri

Hauppauge

HB

HDT

Helium

Hinari

Hirschmann

Hisense

Hitachi

01283

01017

00571

00455, 01246, 01284

00099, 00856, 00887

00455

00084, 00136, 00417, 00885

00243

00173, 00345, 00455, 00501, 00571,

00750, 00805, 00847, 00853, 00879,

01150, 01291, 01330, 01335, 01435

00605, 01099, 01100

00421

00520

01294, 01298

01214

01011, 01159

00607

00421

00173, 00299, 00369, 00396, 00397,

00501, 00573, 00607, 00668, 00710,

00882, 01012, 01085, 01111, 01113

01535

00455, 00489, 00819, 01250, 01284,

01518, 01523, 01525, 00035

Hwalin

Hypson

Hyundai iCan

ID Digital

IEEC

ILLUSION sat iLo

Imex

Imperial

Indovision

Ingelen

Innova

International

Interstar

Intertronic

Intervision

InVideo

IQ

IQ Prism

IR

Irdeto Technology

ISkyB

Hnsel & Gretel

Homecable

Homecast

Houston

HTS

00132

00238

01214

00396, 00592, 00668

00775, 01775

Hughes

Hughes Network Syst

00749

00749


Humax

Huth

00749, 01142, 01442, 01443, 01444,

01749

00863, 01176, 01225, 01427, 01568

00132, 00243, 00607, 00692, 00794,

00829, 01017, 01075

00885

00136, 00417

01011, 01075, 01159

01367

01176

00605

01557

01535

00084, 00136, 00520

01429

00887

00114, 00396, 00882

00099

00132, 00243

01017, 01105, 01214

00243

00592, 00607, 00628

00871

00210

00210

00173, 00282, 00331, 00358, 00455

00879

00887

26

PRESET CODE

Italtel

Jadeworld

Jaeger

Janeil

JOK

Jolly

JVC

K-SAT

Kamm

Kaon

KaTelco

Kathrein

Kathrein Eurostar

Kenwood

Key West

Kiton

Klap

Kolon

Konig

Koscom

Kosmos

KR

Kreiling

Kreiselmeyer

Kyostar

L&S Electronic

Labgear

LaSAT

Legend

Lemon

Lenco

00871

00642

01334

00152

00690, 00710

00592

00492, 00515, 00571, 00775, 01170,

01507, 01531, 01775

00713

00713, 00880

01300

01111

00114, 00115, 00123, 00173, 00200,

00249, 00331, 00358, 00442, 00480,

00553, 00613, 00658, 00713, 00742,

00818, 00898, 01057, 01221, 01561,

01567

00115

00853

00132, 00794

00114

00668, 00710

00421

00607

00834, 01043, 01334, 01409

00331, 00442

00592, 00613

00114, 00249, 00658, 01461, 01480

00173

00421, 00613

00132, 00369, 01043, 01334

01296

00115, 00132, 00157, 00173, 00243,

00299, 00369, 00520, 00607

00269

00692, 01461

00115, 00369, 00421, 00607, 00628,

00692, 00713

Manhattan

Marantz

Marave

Mascom

Maspro

Mastec

Matsui

Matsushita

Max

Maximum

MB

MDS

Mediacom

Mediamarkt

MediaSat

Medion

Lennox

Lenson

Leyco

LG

Lifesat

Lifetec

Lodos

Loewe

Logix

Lorenzen

Lupus

Luxor

M vision

Magnavox

Manata

00592

00501

00515

01075, 01226, 01414

00132, 00157, 00299, 00369, 00605,

00713, 01043, 01122

00587

01284

00243

01017, 01075

00132, 00299, 00607, 00692, 00742,

00794, 00867, 01161, 01294

00369

00345, 00501, 00573

01557

00722, 00724

00132, 00136, 00417, 00668, 00710,

00713

00455, 00520, 00592, 00834, 01017,

01083

00200

00417

00520

00173, 00571, 00692, 00713, 00750,

01530

01334

00173, 00571, 00710, 01284

00500

00607

01075, 01334

00605

01225

01206

00243

00292, 00501, 00853

00132, 00299, 00369, 00713, 01043,

01075, 01161, 01232, 01334, 01412

Medison

Mega

Melectronic

Memorex

Metronic

Metz

Micro

Micro electronic

Micromaxx

Microstar

Microtec

Minerva

Mitsubishi

Morgan's

Motorola

Multichoice

Multistar

Myryad

Mysat

NEC

NEOTION

Netgem

Netsat

Neuhaus

Neuling

Neusat

Neveling

Newton

Next Level

NextWave

Nikko

00713

00200

00818

00269, 00724

00084, 00132, 00136, 00243, 00421,

00520, 00613, 00713, 00818, 00885,

01205, 01215, 01279, 01282, 01283,

01334

00173

00501, 00607, 00613, 00713, 01294

00713

00299, 00369

01075

00713

00571

00455, 00749

00132, 00200, 00243, 00713, 00794,

00829, 01232

00856, 00869

00642, 00879

00331

00200

00713

00496, 01270, 01519

01334

01322

00099, 00887

00501, 00592, 00607, 00692, 00713,

00834

00132, 01232

00587, 00692, 00713, 00834, 01279,

01334, 01409

01161

00396

00869

01017, 01143

00200, 00243, 00713

27

PRESET CODE

Nordmende

Octagon

OctalTV

Okano

Opentel

Optex

Optus

Orbis

Orbit

Orbitech

Origo

OSAT

Ouralis

Oxford

Pace

Nokia

Pacific Satellite

Packard Bell

Packsat

Palcom

Palladium

Palsat

Panarex

Panasat

Panasonic

Panda

Pansat

Patriot

00397, 00455, 00573, 00723, 00751,

00853, 00873, 01023, 01223, 01310,

01311, 01312, 01723

00421, 00455, 00520

00421, 00613

01294, 01505

00243, 00331, 00442, 00668

01232, 01412

00114, 00136, 00417, 00592, 00834,

01043, 01283

00879, 01143

01334

00351

00114, 00157, 00421, 00501, 00548,

00834, 01099, 01100

00497

00345

01205

00515, 00668

00200, 00241, 00329, 00455, 00497,

00720, 00791, 00795, 00847, 00853,

00867, 00879, 00887, 01175, 01323,

01356, 01423, 01623

00834

01111

00710

00299, 00587, 01161

00243, 00396, 00421, 00501, 00571

00157, 00501

01159

00615, 00879

00152, 00247, 00455, 00500, 00701,

00847, 01304, 01320, 01404, 01508,

01526

00173, 00455, 00607, 00834

01011, 01159

00132, 00515, 00668, 00710

Paysat

Philips

Primacom

Pro Visat

Prod

Profile

Promax

Prosat

Proscan

Protek

Proton

ProVision

Pye

Pyxis

QNS

Quadral

Quelle

Radiola

RadioShack

Phoenix

Phonotrend

Pilotime

Pino

Pioneer

Planet

Plasmatic

Polytron

Praxis

Predki

Preisner

Premier

Premiere

Prima

00724

00099, 00133, 00173, 00200, 00292,

00455, 00571, 00613, 00668, 00710,

00722, 00724, 00749, 00750, 00805,

00818, 00853, 00856, 00887, 00898,

01076, 01114, 01118, 01142, 01442,

01749

01273

00592, 00863, 01017, 01200

01339

01334

00292, 00329, 00352, 00853, 01308

00396, 00871

00442

00396

01123

00421

00132, 00396, 00794, 01101, 01113

00292, 00592

00292, 00723, 00873, 01429

00795

01111

00520

00573, 00639, 00723, 00873

00710

00455

00628, 01173

00392, 00566

01567

01535

00520

00571

00834

01367, 01404

00369, 00628, 00668, 00710, 01012

00115, 00299, 00607, 00742

00200

00869

Radix

Rainbow

RCA

Realistic

Rebox

Red Star

Regal

RFT

Roadstar

Roch

Romsat

Rover

S-ZWO

SAB

Saba

Sabre

Sagem

Samsung

Sanyo

SAT

Sat Control

Sat Cruiser

Sat Partner

Sat Team

Satcom

Satec

Satelco

Satline

Satplus

Satstation

Schaub Lorenz

Schcke

00285, 00396, 00882, 01113

00613

00143, *[00392], 00566, 00855, 01291,

01392

00052

01214

00369

01251

00200

00713, 00853

00136

00421

00369, 00628, 00713

01207

01251

00115, 00520, 00607, 00690, 00692,

00710, 00885, 01012

00455

00820, 01114, 01253, 01307

00853, 00863, 01017, 01108, 01109,

01206, 01243, 01244, 01276, 01292,

01293, 01343, 01377, 01442, 01458,

01570, 01609

00493, 01219

00321, 00351, 00501, 00675

01300

01143

00421, 00501, 00520, 00613, 00692

00713

00605, 00607

00713, 00834

00369, 01232

00628

00157, 01100

01083

01214

00613

28

PRESET CODE

Servi Sat

ServiSat

Sharp

Siemens

Silva

Skantin

Skardin

SKR

SKT

SKY

Schneider

Schwaiger

00157, 00668, 00710, 00805, 00898,

01206, 01251

00132, 00157, 00587, 00605, 00607,

00692, 00863, 00885, 01075, 01083,

01111, 01334, 01474

SCS 00115, 00299

Sedea Electronique 00132, 00421, 01105, 01206, 01283

Seemann

SEG

00243, 00396, 00515

00114, 00369, 00421, 00605, 00742,

Seleco

Septimo

Serino

01075, 01087, 01191, 01251

00592, 00871

00885, 01205

00610

SKY Italia

Sky Television

Sky XL

Sky+

Skymaster

00136, 00592, 00713

01251

00494, 01517

00173

00299

00713

00587

00713

01449

00099, 00711, 00847, 00856, 00887,

01014, 01175, 01847, 01848, 01856

01847, 01848

01014

01251, 01412

01175

00157, 00587, 00605, 00628, 00713,

Skymax

Skyplus

SkySat

Skyvision

SL

00880, 01075, 01085, 01200, 01409

00200

01232, 01334, 01409, 01412

00114, 00157, 00501, 00605, 00607,

00713

01334

00132, 00243, 00299, 00692, 00742,

01294

SL Marx

SM Electroni

Smart

Sony

SR

Star

Star Choice

Star Trak

Starland

Starlite

Stream

Strong

STS

STVI

Sunkai

Sunny

Sunny Sound

Sunsat

Sunstar

Supermax

Supernova

Tantec

Tarbs

Tatung

TCL

Teac

Techniland

TechniSat

00692

00157, 00587, 00713, 01200, 01409

00115, 00132, 00299, 00396, 00713,

00794, 00829, 00882, 01101, 01113,

01232, 01273

00275, 00282, 00292, 00294, 00486,

00489, 00492, 00493, 00494, 00496,

00500, 00639, 00847, 00853, 01524,

01558, 01639, 01640

00132, 00243

00887

00869

00180, 00421

01122

00200

01847, 01848

00132, 00369, 00421, 00520, 00613,

00853, 00879, 01105, 01147, 01158,

01159, 01300, 01409

00210

00136, 00417

00123

01300

00369

00713

00132, 00243, 00369, 00642, 00794,

00829

01143, 01283

00887

00455

01225

00455

01143

01225, 01227, 01251, 01322

00592

00114, 00157, 00200, 00396, 00455,

00501, 00548, 00863, 01099, 01100,

01195, 01322

Thorn

Tioko

Tivo

Tokai

Tonna

Topfield

Telemaster

Telesat

Telestar

Telesystem

Teletech

Televes

Televisa

Telewire

Tempo

Tevion

Thomson

Technomate

Technosat

Technotrend

Technowelt

Techsan

Techwood

Teco tekComm

Telasat

Teleciel

Telefunken

Teleka

01283

01143, 01206

01429

00132, 00607

01017

00114, 01284

00243

01017

00115, 00605, 00607

00613, 01043

00421

00243, 00396, 00501, 00607, 00613,

00692, 00750, 00834

00520

00605

00114, 00157, 00501, 01099, 01100,

01251, 01334

00396, 01251

00114, 00880

00132, 00455, 00501, 01214, 01300

00887

00592

01143

00713, 01334, 01409

00115, 00292, 00392, 00455, 00607,

00668, 00710, 00711, 00713, 00820,

00847, 00853, 01012, 01046, 01175,

01291, 01498, 01900

00455

00132, 00243

01142, 01442, 01443, 01444

00200

00455, 00501, 00587, 00592, 00668,

00713, 00834

01206, 01207, 01545

Toshiba

TPS

Triad

Triasat

Triax

US Digital

USDTV

Van Hunen

Variosat

Vega

Ventana

Vestel

Victor

Visionic

Visiosat

Vivid

Voom

Vortec

VTech

Welltech

Trio

TT-micro

Turnsat

Twinner

UEC

Uher

UltimateTV

Uniden

Unisat

United

Universum

29

PRESET CODE

00082, 00455, 00486, 00749, 00790,

01285, 01446, 01501, 01516, 01530,

01749

00820, 01253, 01307

00321, 00351, 00372

00501

00114, 00115, 00132, 00200, 00396,

00501, 00713, 00853, 01099, 01113,

01227, 01251, 01291, 01296

01075

01429

00713

00136, 00713

00879, 01162

00157

01392, 01640

00052, 00074, 00076, 00238, 00722,

00724, 00834

00132, 00200, 00243

01251

00114, 00115, 00173, 00299, 00397,

00571, 00607, 00675, 00742, 01087,

01099, 01251

01535

01535

01161

00173

00369

00200

00114, 00742, 01251

00492

01105, 01206, 01279, 01283

00114, 00142, 00690, 00710, 00713

01162

00869

00421

00321, 00351, 00690, 00818

00157

Wetekom

Wewa

Wibo

Wintel

Wisi

Woorisat

Worldsat

Xcom

Xcom Multimedia

XMS

Xrypton

Xsat

Xtreme

Yes

Zaunkonig

Zehnder

Zenith

Zinwell

Zodiac

Zwergnase

00157, 00501, 00605, 00829

00455

00243

00299, 01161

00173, 00299, 00321, 00351, 00372,

00396, 00455, 00501, 00607, 00638,

00690

00520

00114, 00123, 00668, 00710, 01012,

01251, 01323, 01480

00123, 00668, 00832

00668

01075

00369

00123, 00668, 00713, 00847, 01214,

01323

01300

00887

00692

00114, 00115, 00321, 00331, 00369,

00520, 00742, 00818, 01075, 01191,

01232, 01251, 01334, 01412

00856, 01856

01173

00396, 00613

00243, 00794

CD

Acoustic Research 30420

ADC

Adcom

Advantage

Aiwa

Akai

Arcam

Audio Alchemy

Audio Dynamics

30018

30155, 30234

30032

30012, 30124, 30157, 31690

30156, 30766, 31688

30157

30194

30018

Carrera

Carver

CCE

CDC

CEC

Classic

Condor

Copland

Crown

Cyrus

DAK

DBX

Denon

Audio Pro

Audio Research

Audio-Technica

Audiolab

Audiomeca

30437

30157

30170

30157

30157

Audioton

Bestar

BSR

Burmester

30157

30164

30194, 30245

30420

Bush

Cairn

30245

30157

California Audio Labs 30029, 30303

Cambridge 30157

30194

30157, 30179, 30437

30157

30420

30174, 30420

31297

30164, 30194

30393

30122

30157

30245

30018, 30254

30003, 30626, 30766, 30873, 31234,

*[31867], 31868

30000

30157

DKK

DMX Electronics

Dual

Dynamic Bass

EEC

Elektra

Emerson

Fisher

Garrard

GE

30003, 30194, 30196

30179

30194

30437

30155, 30164, 30305, 30469

30088, 30174, 30179, 30342, 31325

30245, 30280, 30393, 30420, 30425

30009

30

PRESET CODE

KLH

Kodak

Korsun

Koss

Krell

Kyocera

LG

Linn

Loewe

Luxman

LXI

Magnavox

Marantz

Mark

Mark Levinson

Matsui

McIntosh

MCS

Memorex

Genexxa

Goldmund

GoldStar

Goodmans

GPX

Grundig

Harman/Kardon

Hitachi

Inkel

Integra

Intersound

IR

JVC

Kenwood

Meridian

Micromega

30032, 30164, 30305, 30426

30157

30417, 31208

30245, 30280, 30305

31296

30157

30157, 30173, 30426, 31202

30032, 30155, 30038

30180, 30196, 30437

30101

30245

30000

30072, 30655, 31294, 31697

30028, 30036, 30037, 30157, 30190,

30626, 30681, 30826

31318, 31711

30287

31484

31317

30157

30018

31208

30157

30157

30093, 30393

30305

30157, 30305

30029, 30157, 30180, 30626

30194

31484

30157

30287

30029, 30043

30032, 30155, 30164, 30175, 30180,

30305

30157

30157

Orion

Panasonic

Parasound

Penney

Perform Hifi

Philips

Pioneer

PMG

Polk Audio

Poppy

Proceed

Proton

QED

Quad

Quasar

Radiola

RadioShack

Miro

Mission

Mitsubishi

MTC

Musical Fidelity

Myryad

NAD

Nagaoka

Naim

Nakamichi

NEC

Nikko

NSM

Oak

Onkyo

Optimus

30164

30420

30157

30157

30157

30029

30157

31075

30000

30157

30156

30420

30393, 30437

30157

30000, 31208

30018

30157

30147

30043, 30234

30164, 30170, 30174

30157

30145

30101, 30868, 31685

30000, 30032, 30037, 30087, 30145,

30175, 30179, 30194, 30196, 30280,

30305, 30342, 30420, 30426, 30437,

30468, 31063, 31075

30393

30029, 30207, 30303, 30752, 31682

30194, 30420

30043

30420

30157, 30287, 30626

30032, 30101, 30305, 30468, 31062,

31063, 31087

30164

30157

RCA

Realistic

Restek

Revox

Roadstar

Roksan

Rotel

Royal

SAE

Sansui

Sanyo

SAST

Scott

Sears

Sharp

Sherwood

Shure

Siemens

Silsonic

Simaudio

Sonic Frontiers

Sony

Soundesign

STS

Sugden

Symphonic

TAG McLaren

Tandy

Tascam

TDK

Teac

Tec

Technics

Thomson

30009, 30032, 30053, 30155, 30179,

30305, 30420, 30468, 30764, 31062

30155, 30164, 30175, 30179, 30180,

30420

30157

30157

30461

30420

30157, 30420

30164, 30420

30157

30157, 30202, 30305

30087, 30179, 30342

30157

30155, 30164, 30305

30305

30037, 30180, 30861, 31658, 31684

30180, 30196, 30426, 31067

30043

30157, 30180

30036, 30888

30157

30157

30000, 30100, 30185, 30490, 30604,

30605, 31364

30145, 30425

30018

30157

30305

30157

30032

30420

31208

30174, 30180, 30393, 30420

30245

30029, 30207, 30303

30053

31

PRESET CODE

Yoko

Yorx

Zonda

CDR

Classic

Denon

Fisher

GPX

Harman/Kardon

JVC

Kenwood

LG

Marantz

NAD

Philips

Pioneer

RCA

Sony

TDK

Teac

Yamaha

TAPE

Thorens

Thule Audio

Tivoli Audio

Tokai

Toshiba

Traxdata

Universum

Vector Research

Victor

Wards

Yamaha

30157

30157

31553

30164, 30420

31693

30626

30053, 30157, 30437

30194, 30417

30072

30000, 30032, 30053, 30087, 30157,

30179

30000, 30032, 30036, 30037, 30170,

30187, 30888, 31292

30194

30461

30157

31297

30626, 30766, 31868

31325

31296

31202

30072, 31294

30626

31208

30626

31208

30626

31062, 31087

30053, 30420

30000, 30100, 31364

31208

30420

30888, 31292

Kenwood

LG

Luxman

Magnavox

Marantz

Memorex

Mitsubishi

Myryad

Onkyo

Optimus

Orion

Panasonic

Philips

Phonotrend

Pioneer

Polk Audio

Radiola

RCA

Revox

Sansui

Sanyo

Sharp

Sherwood

Aiwa

Akai

Arcam

Carver

Denon

Fisher

Garrard

Genexxa

GoldStar

Grundig

Harman/Kardon

Inkel

JVC

20029, 20197, 20200, 21315

20283, 20439

20076

20029

20076, 20371, 21311, 21471

20074

20308, 20309, 20375, 20439

20439

20353, 20375

20029, 20229, 20375

20029, 20182, 21314

20070, 20071, 20337

20244, 20273, 20274, 20303, 20304,

20310, 21309

20070, 20071, 20092, 20233, 20234,

21364

20375

20308, 20309

20029

20009, 20029

20099

20283, 20439

20029

20135, 20136, 20282

20027, 20220, 20337, 20439

20308, 20309, 20353

20229

20029, 20229

20337

20027, 20099, 20220, 21306, 21312

20029

20029

20027, 20220

20029, 20190

20009, 20029

20074

20231, 20371

20337

Siemens

Sonic

Sony

TaeKwang

Tandberg

Teac

Technics

Thorens

Universum

Victor

Wards

Wharfedale

Yamaha

20029

20375

20170, 20234, 20243, 20291, 21313

20439

20109

20280, 20283, 20289, 20308, 20309

20229, 20353

20029

20375, 20439

20244, 20273, 20274

20027, 20029

20439

20094, 20097

PVR 1

ABS

Alienware

CyberPower

Dell

DirecTV

Gateway

Hewlett Packard 21972

Howard Computers 21972

HP 21972


21972

21972

21972

21972

20739

21972

Humax

Hush iBUYPOWER

Linksys

Media Center PC

Microsoft

Mind

Niveus Media

Northgate

Panasonic

Philips

20739

20739

21972

21972

21972

21972

21972

21972

21972

21972

20616

20618, 20739

32

PRESET CODE

RCA

ReplayTV

Sonic Blue

Sony

Stack 9

Systemax

Tagar Systems

Tivo

Toshiba

Touch

Viewsonic

Voodoo

ZT Group

20880

20614, 20616

20614, 20616

20636, 21972

21972

21972

21972

20618, 20636, 20739

21008, 21972

21972

21972

21972

21972

TV/DVD Combination 2, 3

Advent 41016

Apex Digital 40830

Audiovox

Axion

Broksonic

Bush

Denver

Emerson

Go Vision

Grundig

Hitachi

Jensen

Konka

Panasonic

Philips

Prima

RCA

Samsung

Sansui

Sova

Sylvania

41071, 41121, 41122

41071

40695

40516, 40713, 40884

41353, 41359

41268

41071

40695

41247

41016

40719, 40720

41490

40854, 41260

41016

41022

40899

40695

41122

40675, 41268

Toshiba

Bush 3

Denver

Sylvania

3

3

40695

10698, 11037

10587

10171

TV/VCR Combination 3, 4

America Action

Audiovox 3

Emerson

Funai 3

3

3 10180

10180

10236

11977

4

Aiwa

America Action

Audiovox

Broksonic

Citizen

Colt

Curtis Mathes

Daewoo

Emerson

Funai

GE

GoldStar

Harley Davidson

Hitachi

Lloyd's

Magnasonic

Magnavox

Magnin

Memorex

MGA

Mitsubishi

Optimus

Orion

Panasonic

Penney

20000, 20479

20278

20278

20002, 20479, 21479

21278

20072

21035

21278

20002, 20294, 20479, 21278, 21479

20000, 21333

20240, 20807, 21035, 21060

21237

20000

20000

20000

21278

20000, 21781

20240

20162, 21237

20240

20043, 20807

20162

20002, 20479, 21479

20162, 21035, 21308

20240, 21035, 21237

Philco

Quasar

RadioShack

RCA

Samsung

Sansui

Sanyo

Sears

Sharp

Sony

Sylvania

Symphonic

Teac

Thomas

Toshiba

Zenith

20479

20162, 21035

20000

20240, 20807, 21035, 21060

20432, 21014

20000, 20479, 21479

20240, 21330

20000, 21237

20807

20000, 21232, 21295

21781

20000

20000

20000

20845, 21145, 21323

20000, 20479, 21479

TV/VCR/DVD Combination

2, 4

Akai

Broksonic

Emerson

40899

40868

40821

Funai

Magnavox

Panasonic

RCA

Sharp

Superscan

Sylvania

Toshiba

41334

40821

41362, 41462

41132

40630

40821

40821

41045

Sharp 4 20807

CABLE/PVR Combination 1

Americast

Digeo

00899

01187

Freebox 01482

General Instrument 00476, 00810

33

PRESET CODE

Jerrold

Motorola

Nokia

Pace

Pioneer

RCA

Scientific Atlanta

Sony

Supercable

Thomson

Zenith

00476, 00810

00476, 00810, 01106, 01187, 01376

01569

00237, 01877

00877, 01877

01256

00877, 01877

01006

00276

01256

00899

DBS/PVR Combination 1

@sat

Atsat

01300

01300

British Sky Broadcasting

01175

Canal Satellite

Comag

Digiturk

DirecTV

01339

01412

01076

00099, 00392, 00639, 01076, 01142,

Dish Network System

01377, 01392, 01442, 01443, 01444,

01640

00775, 01505

Dishpro 00775, 01505

Dream Multimedia 01237

Echostar

Euro1

00610, 00775, 01170, 01505

01278

Expressvu

Force

Foxtel

GbSAT

00775

01194

01356

01214

Grundig 01150


Humax

01142, 01442, 01443, 01444

01176, 01427, 01568

Sagem

Samsung

SKY

Skyplus

Sony

Star Choice

Strong

Thomson

Topfield

TPS

Zehnder

Hyundai

JVC

Kathrein

Maximum

Motorola

Nokia

Opentel

Pace

Panasonic

Philips

Proscan

RCA

Rebox

01159

01170

01221, 01561

01334

00869

01310, 01311

01412

01423, 01623

01320

00099, 01142, 01442

00392

01392

01214

01253, 01307

01442

01175, 01848

01412

00639, 01640

00869

01158, 01300

01900

01206, 01545

01253, 01307

01075, 01412

1 These preset codes can be recorded in the SAT/CBL mode.

1 Ces codes de présélection peuvent être enregistrés en mode SAT/CBL.

2 These preset codes can be recorded in the DVD mode.

2 Ces codes de présélection peuvent être enregistrés en mode DVD.

3 These preset codes can be recorded in the TV mode.

3 Ces codes de présélection peuvent être enregistrés en mode TV.

4 This preset code can be recorded in the VCR mode.

4 Ces codes de présélection peuvent être enregistrés en mode VCR.

*[ ] : Preset codes set upon shipment from the factory.

*[ ] : Les codes préréglés diffèrent en fonctiom des livraison de l’usine.

DVD-555

DVD-755

DVD-900

DVD-910

DVD-955

DVD-1000

DVD-1200

DVD-1500

DVD-1710

DVD-1910

DVD-2200

DVD-2800

DVD-2800 II

DVD-2900

DVD preset codes / Codes préréglés DVD

41470 (default / défaut) 40490

DVD-2910

DVD-3800

DVD-3910

DVD-5900

DVD-5910

DVD-9000

DVM-715

DVM-1800

DVM-1805

DVM-1815

DVM-2815

DVM-4800

DVD-800

DVD-1600

DVD-2000

DVD-2500

DVD-3000

DVD-3300

34

PRESET CODE

TOKYO, JAPAN www.denon.com

Denon Brand Company, D&M Holdings Inc.

Printed in Japan 00D 511 4413 009